CA08104001E 381241 Catalog 1

265021-Catalog 265021-Catalog 265021-Catalog Batch9 unilog cesco-content

: Pdf 381241-Catalog 1 381241-Catalog_1 786679 Batch5 unilog

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 126

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
January 2005

Index

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers &
Trip Units — Low Voltage

Sheet 0571

Home

CA08104001E

21.0-1

Contents

20

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1-1
Power Circuit Breakers — DSII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2-1
Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-1
Microprocessor Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4-1
Enclosed Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5-1
Specifications
See Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Product Specification Guide:
1995 CSI Format: Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS . . . . Section 16475
Power Circuit Breakers — DSII. . . . . . . . . . . Section 16475
Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16475
Microprocessor Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16904
Enclosed Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16476
2004 CSI Format: Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS . . . . Section 26 28 11
Power Circuit Breakers — DSII. . . . . . . . . . . Section 26 28 11
Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . Section 26 28 11
Microprocessor Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 26 28 50
Enclosed Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 26 28 16.11

21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

Low Voltage Circuit Breakers

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

PIN 0130100, 0120000, 0080300

21.0-2 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0572

This page intentionally left blank.

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0573

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

Index

General Description

Contents
Magnum DS
General Description . . . . . . .
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Control Diagram. . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Data . . . . . . . . . . .

21.1-1








21.1-1
21.1-5
21.1-6
21.1-6
21.1-7
21.1-9

21

Magnum DS





22



23



Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer
 Magnum DS
Breakers are power circuit breakers
designed and engineered specifically
for use in Magnum DS Low Voltage
Switchgear assemblies applied at nominal voltages of 240, 480 and 600 Vac.
Six continuous ratings — 800 amperes
through 6000 amperes — are covered
by only two physical breaker sizes.



24
25



	

Controls and indicators are functionally
grouped on the front of the breakers and
the through-the-door design means they
are easily viewed and accessible.
Magnum DS Breaker


 Trip Flag
 Three Accessory Windows

Magnum DS is also suitable for use in:

 Digitrip RMS Trip Unit

■

 Contact Status Indicator
(Open or Closed)

20

26
27
28
29

UL 1558 low voltage switchgear.
■ UL 891 low voltage switchboards.
■ CSA 22.2.31 low voltage assemblies.

30

 Spring Status Indicator
(Charged or Discharged)

31

 “Push Off” to Open Breaker Button

32

 “Push On” to Close Breaker Button
 Manual Charging Handle

 Optional Operations Counter

The breaker can be conveniently racked in
or out, stopping at the various positions
with the door closed.

 Optional “Off” Key Lock
 Padlockable Levering Device
	 Color-Coded Breaker Position
Indicators
Magnum DS Breakers are 100% rated,
UL
 listed, and are built and tested in
an ISO
 9000 certified facility to applicable standards including:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

34
35

Integrally designed breaker steel
cassette for drawout breakers provides
clear indication of connect, test and
disconnect positions.

36

ANSI C37.13
NEMA
 SG3
ANSI C37.16
UL 1066
ANSI C37.17
CSA
 22.2
ANSI C37.50

37
38
39
Faceplate controls facilitate operation
of the breaker, and the three accessory
mounting windows provide for easy
identification.

CA08104001E

33

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

The breaker spring charging handle
is designed with sufficient space for
operation even with a gloved hand.

40

21.1-2 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

Home

General Description

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33

40

Sheet 0574









Many minor replacement functions
involving the mechanism, control,
and/or accessories can be easily
accomplished.

Two-Step Stored Energy
Mechanism for Manually and
Electrically Operated Breakers
The potential energy is stored in the
mechanism to close the breaker in
five cycles or less. Sufficient energy
to open the breaker remains available
following the closing operation.



Internal View of Magnum DS Breaker




 Secondary Wiring Points
 Field Installable Accessories
(Three Maximum)


 Digitrip RMS Trip Unit
 Optional Electric Charging Motor

After closing, the charging spring can
be recharged to provide potential
energy for reclosing following a fault,
providing high continuity of service.
This feature allows for the following
sequence: charge – close – recharge –
open – close – open.

Increased Short Time and
Interrupting Ratings

39

>>

The contact wear indicator eliminates
the need for elaborate testing to
determine if the contact assembly
needs replaced.

36

38

<<

January 2005

The current sensor viewing window on
the rear of the breaker allows for easy
identification of the current sensor
mounted inside.

35

37

Index

The stored energy mechanism, control
devices, accessories and secondary
contacts are easily accessible by
removing the front cover that is held in
place by four captive screws. This can
only be done when the breaker is in
the disconnect position or removed
from the cell.

On manually operated breakers,
closing springs are charged by hand.
For electrically operated breakers,
springs are charged by an electric
motor but can be manually charged
if no power is available.

34



Designed for Easy Access,
Inspection and Minimal
Maintenance

TOC

 Manual Charging Handle
 Padlockable Levering Device
 Breaker Position Indicator
 Secondary Contacts

 Arc Chute Covers
	





This rear view of a Magnum DS drawout
breaker shows the designed-in safety
feature of locating the secondary contacts
away from the primary disconnects.

 Primary Finger Cluster Disconnects
 Current Sensor Window
	 Rigid Frame Housing

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS
Power Circuit Breakers are available
with short time ratings up to 85,000
amperes rms symmetrical and interrupting ratings up to 100,000 amperes
rms symmetrical. These increased
ratings far exceed ratings previously
available on power circuit breakers.
Positioning of the secondary contact
subassembly is dedicated for installation,
maintenance and testing. Top view shown
with breaker cover removed, bottom of
photo is front of breaker.

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0575

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

Multi-finger contact structure
divides the current flow, increasing
the thermal carrying capability of
the entire current path.

As the circuit breaker is called upon to
open, the toe and heel simultaneously
touch. At that point, the current
changes its path from the main contact
to the arcing contact. As the heel lifts
off, any remaining current is driven to
the toe. The result is minimal arcing
damage to the main contact (heel)
providing for longer main contact life.
Upon closing, the toe absorbs most of
the impact and deals with any arcing
by touching down before the heel.
Once again, the main contact (heel)
is protected resulting in longer life.

Arc Running System Provides
Higher Interrupting Capacity
in Less Space
Visual contact wear indicator shows
when contact replacement is necessary.
■

Flexible braided current path to the
contact fingers reduces necessary
current carrying space and provides
a smooth connection, eliminating
bolted joints and contact springs.
This design helps increase breaker
service life by reducing localized
heat buildup and mechanical
stress inherent in conventional
bolted joints.

Arc
Chute
Moving
Arcing
Contact
(Toe)

Integral
Arc Runner
Stationary
Main Contact

Moving
Contact
Fingers

21.1-3

General Description

Flexible Current Path Increases
Current Carrying Capability
in Less Space
■

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

Heel-toe contact structure is a
single contact finger design that
performs both main and arcing
contact functions by controlling the
arc direction. This design provides
for longer contact life.
■ Integral arc runner enhances the
magnetic action of the arc chute by
drawing the arc into the chute with
increased efficiency, reducing arcing
at the toe of the contacts. This
exclusive design allows for higher
arcing in a smaller space, resulting
in increased interrupting ratings.
Alternating V Arc Chute™ quickly
divides and extinguishes the arc.
The V Arc Chute reaction speed
protects contact material, extending
contact life.

Isolated View of Contact
Opening Sequence

21
22
23
Figure 21.1-2. (1) Fully Closed Position
Only the main contact (heel) touches and
all current flow is through the main contact.

XXXXXXX
X
X
X
X
XXXXXXX

Moving
Contact
Carrier
Braided
Flexible
Shunts

XXXXXXX
X
X
X
X
XXXXXXX

24
25

■

26
27
Figure 21.1-3. (2) Simultaneous Touching
of All Contacts

28

The arcing contact (toe) touches down
before the main contact (heel) lifts off
with current flow dividing between
main (heel) and arcing (toe) contacts.

29
30
31
32

Current
Flow

Moving
Main
Contact
(Heel)

20

Line
Conductor
Load
Conductor
Current
Flow
Current
Sensor

Breaker
Front

Figure 21.1-4. (3) Toe (Arcing) Contacts
Touching

33

The main contact (heel) lifts off with the
arcing contact (toe) still touching to deal
with any arcing. Current flow is only
through the arcing contact (toe).

34
35

Figure 21.1-1. Cross-Section of Magnum DS
Heel-Toe Contact
Unlike conventional power breaker
designs utilizing separate arcing
and main current carrying contacts,
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS
Circuit Breakers perform both functions on different parts of the same
contact finger. Each finger has a moving main contact (heel) and a moving
arcing contact (toe). A complete movable contact is merely the combination
of a number of individual fingers.

36
Arc chutes can be easily removed and
inspected. The contact wear indicator
on the main contact assembly can also
be inspected.

37
Figure 21.1-5. (4) Fully Open Position
Both the main (heel) and arcing (toe) contacts
are open and there is no current flow. The arc
dissipates up into the arc chute.

38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.1-4 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

Home

General Description

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

Rigid Frame Housing
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS
Breaker utilizes a rigid frame housing —
an ANSI power breaker exclusive. This
housing provides the strength and stability required in the mounting of the
current path and operating mechanism.
Increased Uptime. Because the
current path is isolated and insulated
inside a two-piece interconnected
housing, any potential damage that
may occur during arc interruption
between the poles or outside of the
breaker is minimized.
■ Increased Breaker Life. By providing
rigid support for the operating
mechanism and the contact structure, mechanical stress is reduced,
increasing reliability.
■ Design Reliability. The housing
reduces the number of frame parts
in comparison with conventional
ANSI power breakers, providing
increased reliability.
■ Rigid Frame. The engineered
thermoset composite resin
provides excellent structural
properties, dielectric strength,
and arc track resistance helping
to provide the higher interrupting
and short time (withstand) ratings
in a smaller size.

Built-in Safety Features Provide
Optimum Operator Safety and
System Security
■

■

■

■

■
■

■

■

■

32

Improved C-loop current path
design provides dramatic improvements in both safety and efficiency.
Higher current ratings increase
the blow-on forces on the contact
surfaces, allowing the proper
downstream protective device
to open, isolating the fault and
increasing uptime.
Positive on is indicated on the
breaker faceplate. This unique
interlocking feature prevents the
levering door from being opened if
the contacts are welded, protecting
personnel from exposure to live
primary contacts.
Making current release prevents
the breaker from closing in on a
fault exceeding 25X peak ≈ 11X rms
times the nominal current.
Keyed sensor plug ensures error-free
installation of the sensor in the field.
Deadfront faceplate isolates the
operator from the primary voltage
when the breaker is energized.
Anti-pump prevents any attempts to
reclose the breaker on a short circuit
fault if the close signal (mechanical
or electrical) is maintained.
Interlocked levering door cannot be
opened until the contacts are in the
open condition.
Three position indicators on the
faceplate for drawout mounting.
Specific colors identify the breaker
position.

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0576

Quality and Reliability
Eaton performs consistent endurance
and reliability tests on Magnum DS
Breakers.
Mini-Life Tests. A breaker is
randomly selected from the
production line daily, and tested
for an average of 50 mechanical
operations to assure performance
as required.
■ Maxi-Life Tests. MTBF testing
continuously tests Magnum DS
Breakers until they fail. This
identifies potential performance
issues with the breaker and
provides statistical analysis for
further improvement.
■

33
34
35

Breaker Position Indicator

Connect. Both main and secondary
contacts are connected and the
breaker is ready for normal
operation.
■ Test. Main disconnects are
disengaged, secondary contacts
are engaged. All functions of the
breaker and trip unit can be tested
in this position.
■ Disconnect. A storage position in
the compartment but the breaker
is open and disconnected.
■

36
37
38
39
40

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0577

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

Index

A Common Family of
Accessories for Both
Frame Sizes
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS
accessories fit all frame sizes.

Accessories

Factory Installed or Available as
UL Listed Field Installable Kits

20

Through-the-Window Electrical
Accessories

21
22

Magnum DS through-the-window
accessories are installed near the
right front of the breaker. The unique
windows in the breaker cover enable
accessories to be quickly identified
by name and rating.
Accessories are plug-in, providing
for easy mounting and wiring to save
both installation time and cost. This
feature facilitates accessory changes
and replacements by user personnel,
eliminating the need to use factory
trained personnel or outside service
companies.
Modular accessories are keyed for fast
error-free mounting in the field. For
example, the spring release can only
be mounted in the center cavity.

21.1-5

23
The auxiliary switch is an internal accessory
that provides remote electrical indication
if the breaker is open or closed.
Accessory Windows

Shunt Trip. Provides remote
controlled circuit breaker opening
when energized by a voltage input.
■ Spring Release. Remotely
closes the breaker when its coil
is energized by a voltage input.
■ Undervoltage Release (UVR).
Trips the breaker remotely when
an existing voltage signal is lost
or drops below an established
threshold.

25

■

Internal Accessories

26
27
An electric motor automatically charges
the closing springs. In absence of control
power, the springs can be manually charged.

Auxiliary Switch. Provides the
capability to remotely indicate if the
breaker is open or closed. Up to six
normally open and six normally
closed auxiliary contacts are
available for customer use.
■ Overcurrent Trip Switch (Bell Alarm).
A set of normally open and
normally closed contacts that
indicate when a breaker trips.
■ Electrical Operator. A universal type
electric motor, internally mounted in
the circuit breaker, that charges the
closing springs automatically, facilitating remote or local closing.
■

The accessory cavity design, unique
to ANSI power breakers, is accessible
in the front of the breaker. Up to three
accessories can be easily installed and
wired in the field.

24

28
29
30
31
32
33
34

Magnum DS modular design allows
customers to mount accessories in the field.

35
36
37
38
39
Through-the-window electrical
accessories are identically sized,
yet keyed for error-free mounting.

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

40

21.1-6 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

Home

Trip Units

20
21
22

Trip Units

❑

Eaton introduced the first microprocessorbased trip unit and has advanced the
technology into a new family of UL
and CSA listed Digitrip RMS Electronic
and Programmable Trip Units designed
and engineered exclusively for
Magnum DS Breakers.

❑

❑

❑

23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

Electronic Trip Units

❑

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0578

Two programmable contacts
for customer use.
Time stamping of trip events for
improved troubleshooting and
diagnostics.
Accuracy of 1% on current and
voltage values and 2% on energy
and power.
Systems diagnostic information.
PowerNet communications.

Digitrip RMS 520 enables the user as
many as nine phase and ground current protection settings for maximum
flexibility in trip-curve shaping and
multi-unit coordination, and adds
ground current protection settings.
■ Digitrip RMS 520M adds phase,
neutral and ground current metering with a four-character LCD
display window.
■ Digitrip RMS 520MC adds communication of current values and breaker
status (open, closed, tripped).
■

Digitrip 1150

Programmable Trip Units
■

Digitrip RMS 1150 provides
programmability for more sophisticated distribution systems.
❑ Increased protection and
coordination capabilities.
❑ Systems monitoring information
including power factor, voltage,
current, harmonic distortion
values, and waveform capture
with a three-line, (eight characters
per line) LED display.

Digitrip RMS 1150 Programmable Trip Unit

This state-of-the-art trip unit with true
rms sensing can be programmed at the
faceplate or remotely with a PC using
the PowerNet communications system.
All system parameters as well as programming information can be viewed
on the easy-to-read three-line digital
display window.

Digitrip 520

For additional information on trip units
see Section 21.5.

32
33
34
35
36
37
38

Legend
LS
— Limit Switch for Closing Spring
MOT — Motor for Spring Charging
SH TR — Shunt Trip
SR
— Spring Release
Y
— Anti-Pump Relay
Description of Operation
1 — Motor is energized through LS contact.
2 — Motor runs and charges Closing Spring.
3 — When Closing Spring fully charged, LS
contacts reverse.
4 — CIosing CS-C contact energizes SR Coil
through Y, LS & “b” contacts.
5 — When Breaker closes, “b” opens and Y
Coil is energized in series with SR Coil.
6 — Y contact opens to open SR Coil circuit &
prevent pumping should breaker open
while CS-C is held closed. Y Coil has very
low drop-out voltage.
7 — LS contacts reverse and motor recharges
closing springs.

Pos
CS
Close

B12
Control
Power

Open

B15

G

Close

B26

Lev-in Door
Switch
(DC Only)

SR

LS

CS
Trip

R

B10
SR
TR

b

a

B27

B11

MOT
B13

B14

Neg
MDSEOBKR

39
Figure 21.1-6. Standard Control Diagram for Magnum Electrically Operated Breaker, in Magnum Switchgear, for ac or dc Control Source

40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0579

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

Index

21.1-7

Technical Data

Magnum DS Ratings

20

Table 21.1-1. Magnum DS UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Frame
Breaker
Amperes Type

800

Frame
Type

rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz




Interrupting Interrupting Interrupting Short Time
at 254 Vac
at 508 Vac
at 635 Vac
Withstand Rating

Available Current Sensor and Rating
Fixed Internal Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit
(Establishes Breaker In Rating)
Inst. Trip
—
—
—
14 x In

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800

MDN-408
MDN-508
MDN-608
MDN-C08

Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow

42
50
65
100

42
50
65
100

42
50
65
65

42
50
65
30

MDS-408
MDS-608
MDS-808
MDS-C08
MDS-L08 
MDS-X08 

Standard 42
Standard 65
Standard 85
Standard 100
Standard 200
Standard 200

42
65
85
100
200
200

42
65
85
100
200

42
65
85
85
—
30

MDN-412
MDN-512
MDN-612
MDN-C12

Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow

42
50
65
100

42
50
65
100

42
50
65
65

42
50
65
30

MDS-612
MDS-812
MDS-C12
MDS-L12 
MDS-X12 

Standard 65
Standard 85
Standard 100
Standard 200
Standard 200

65
85
100
200
200

65
85
100
200

65
85
85
—
30

MDN-416
MDN-516
MDN-616
MDN-C16

Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow

42
50
65
100

42
50
65
100

42
50
65
65

42
50
65
30

MDS-616
MDS-816
MDS-C16
MDS-L16 
MDS-X16 

Standard 65
Standard 85
Standard 100
Standard 200
Standard 200

65
85
100
200
200

65
85
100
200

65
85
85
—
30

MDN-620
MDN-C20

Narrow
Narrow

65
100

65
100

65
65

65
30

MDS-620
MDS-820
MDS-C20
MDS-L20 
MDS-X20 

Standard 65
Standard 85
Standard 100
Standard 200
Standard 200

65
85
100
200
200

65
85
100
200

65
85
85
—
30

—
—
85
—
30

MDS-625
MDS-825
MDS-C25

Standard 65
Standard 85
Standard 100

65
85
100

65
85
100

65
85
85

—
—
85

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800,
1000, 1200, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500

3000

MDS-630
MDS-830
MDS-C30

Standard 65
Standard 85
Standard 100

65
85
100

65
85
100

65
85
85

—
—
85

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800, 1000,
1200, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000

3200

MDS-632
MDS-832
MDS-C32
MDS-X32 

Standard 65
Standard 85
Standard 100
Double
200

65
85
100
200

65
85
100

65
85
85
85

—
—
85
50

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800,
1000, 1200, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500,
3000, 3200

4000

MDS-840
MDS-C40
MDS-X40 

Double
Double
Double

85
100
200

85
100
200

85
100

85
100
50

—
—
50

2000, 2500, 3000, 3200, 4000

5000

Double
MDS-850
Double
MDS-C50

Double
MDS-X50

85
100
200

85
100
200

85
100

—
—
50

2500, 3000, 3200, 4000, 5000



85
100
50

100

100

100

100

—

3200, 4000, 5000, 6000

1200

1600

2000

2500

6000








MDS-C60



Double













22

—
—
—
85
—
30
—
—
—
14 x In

23
24
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800,
1000, 1200

—
—
85
—
30
—
—
—
14 x In

25
26

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800,
1000, 1200, 1250, 1600

27
28

—
—
85
—
30
—
14 x In

21

29
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800,
1000, 1200, 1250, 1600, 2000

30
31
32
33
34
35

Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS Trip Unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal
to the published Short Time Withstand Rating. These interrupting ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an opening operation,
a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for
short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 second each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between
the two periods.
Magnum DSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker with Integral Current Limiters. Current Limiter selected determines short time and fixed
instantaneous trip rating. Maximum voltage rating is 600 Vac.
Magnum DSX Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker with Fast Opening Contacts.
Contact Eaton for product rating.
Breaker applied with fan cooling in tested enclosure.

36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.1-8 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

Technical Data

January 2005
Sheet 0580

Table 21.1-2. Digitrip RMS Adjustable Trip Settings

20
21
22
23
24

Time/Current
Characteristics

Pickup
Setting

Pickup Point
(see note)

Time Band,
Seconds

Long Delay

0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8
0.9, 0.95, 1.0

In Times
Long Delay Setting

2, 4, 7, 10, 12, 15, 20, 24
(at 6 times pickup value)

Instantaneous

Off, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10
M1
2, 2.5, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10
M1

In Times
Instantaneous Setting

—
—

Ir Times
Short Delay Setting

0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5
(Flat Response)
0.1 
, 0.3 
, 0.5 


0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4,
0.5, 0.6, 0.75, 1.00
(1200 A Maximum)

In Times
Ground Fault Setting

0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5
(Flat Response)
0.1 
, 0.3 
, 0.5 


Short Delay

Ground Fault




I2t Response.

Note: In = Rating Plug Value, Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting Times In

Table 21.1-3. Magnum DS Breaker Control Device Voltages and Application Data

25
26
27
28

Breaker
Control Device

24 Vdc

48 Vdc

125 Vdc

250 Vdc

120 Vac

240 Vac

Shunt Trip Circuit Voltage
Power Consumption (Inrush)

70 to 110%
(Required for 35 ms)

17 – 26 Vdc
250 Watts

34 – 53 Vdc
250 Watts

77 – 138 Vdc
450 Watts

154 – 275 Vdc
450 Watts

77 – 140 Vac
450 VA

146 – 264 Vac
450 VA

Close Circuit Voltage
Power Consumption (Inrush)

70 to 110%
(Required for 200 ms)

17 – 26 Vdc
250 Watts

34 – 53 Vdc
250 Watts

77 – 138 Vdc
450 Watts

154 – 275 Vdc
450 Watts

77 – 140 Vac
450 VA

146 – 264 Vac
450 VA

Spring Charge Motor Voltage
Amps (Running)
Amps (Inrush)
Power Consumption
Charging Time

85 to 110%
Running
% of Running

20 – 26 Vdc
12.0 Amps
300%
300 Watts
5 Sec

41 – 53 Vdc
5.0 Amps
500%
250 Watts
5 Sec

94 – 138 Vdc
2.0 Amps
600%
250 Watts
5 Sec

187 – 225 Vdc
1.0 Amps
600%
250 Watts
5 Sec

93 – 140 Vdc
2.0 Amps
600%
250 VA
5 Sec

177 – 264 Vdc
1.0 Amps
600%
250 VA
5 Sec

29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0581

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

Application
Standards
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS
circuit breakers meet or exceed all
applicable requirements of ANSI Standards C37.13, C37.17, C37.50 and CSA.

System Voltage and Frequency
Magnum DS breakers are designed for
operation on ac systems only, 60 Hz or
50 Hz, 635 volts maximum.

Continuous Current Ratings
Unlike transformers, generators and
motors, circuit breakers are maximumrated devices and have no built-in
temporary overload current ratings.
Consequently, it is vital that each
application takes into consideration
the maximum anticipated current
demand, initial and future, including
temporary overloads.
The continuous rating of any Magnum
DS breaker is limited to the sensor
rating, or the frame size current rating,
whichever is the lesser. For instance,
an MDS-616 1600 ampere frame
breaker with 800 ampere sensors has
a maximum continuous rating of 800
amperes, but the same breaker with
1600 ampere sensors is limited to 1600
amperes maximum.
All current ratings are based on a
maximum ambient air temperature
of 40°C (104°F).

Ambient Temperature
The temperature of the air surrounding the enclosure should be within
the limits of:
-30°C (-22°F) to +40°C (104°F).

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

21.1-9

Application Data

Altitude
The breakers are applicable at their
full voltage and current ratings up
to a maximum altitude of 6,600 feet
(2,012 m) above sea level. When
installed at higher altitudes, the ratings
are subject to the following correction
factors in accordance with ANSI
C37.20.1:
Table 21.1-4. Altitude Derating Factors
Altitude
Meters

Voltage
Current
Correction Correction

6,600
7,000
7,500

2,012
2,134
2,286

1.000
.989
.976

1.000
.998
.995

8,000
8,500
9,000

2,438
2,591
2,743

.963
.950
.933

.993
.990
.987

9,500
10,000
10,500

2,896
3,048
3,200

.917
.900
.883

.983
.980
.977

11,000
11,500
12,000

3,353
3,505
3,658

.867
.850
.833

.973
.970
.967

12,500
13,000

3,810
3,962

.817
.800

.963
.960

Feet

Unusual Environmental and
Operating Conditions
Special attention should be given to
applications subject to the following
conditions:
1. Damaging or hazardous fumes,
vapors, etc.
2. Excessive or abrasive dust.
For such conditions, it is generally
recommended that the switchgear
be installed in a clean, dry room, with
filtered and/or pressurized clean air.
This method permits the use of standard
indoor switchgear and avoids the derating effect of non-ventilated enclosures.

3. Salt spray, excessive moisture,
dripping, etc.
Drip shields in equipment rooms and
space heaters in indoor switchgear,
or outdoor weatherproof enclosures,
may be indicated, depending upon
the severity of the conditions.
4. Excessively high or low ambient
temperatures.
For ambient temperatures exceeding
40°C, and based on a standard temperature rise of 65°C, the continuous
current ratings of breaker frame sizes,
and also buses, current transformers,
etc., will be subject to a derating factor
calculated from the following formula:
105°C ° Total – Special Ambient, °C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------105°C ° Total – 40°C ° Standard Ambient

Circuit breakers are not adversely
affected by very low outdoor ambient
temperatures, particularly when energized and carrying load currents. The
standard space heaters in weatherproof
switchgear will raise the temperature
slightly and prevent condensation.

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28

Electrical components such as relays
and instruments, however, must be
applied within the manufacturer’s
specified limits.

29

5. Exposure to seismic shock.

30

Magnum DS assemblies and breakers
have been certified for applications
through UBC
 Zone 4 and for the
California Building Code. Assembly
modifications are required, so such
conditions must be specified.
6. Abnormally high frequency
of operation.
In line with above, a lesser number
of operations between servicing, and
more frequent replacement of parts,
may be indicated.

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.1-10 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS
Application Data

20
21
22
23
24

Application
Transformer Main
Secondary Breakers
Transformer secondary breakers are
required or recommended for one or
more of the following purposes:
1. To provide a one-step means
of removing all load from the
transformer.
2. To provide transformer overload
protection in the absence of an
individual primary breaker, and/or
when primary fuses are used.

25

3. To provide the fastest clearing of
a short circuit in the secondary
main bus.

26

4. To provide a local disconnecting
means, in the absence of a local
primary switch or breaker, for
maintenance purposes.

27
28

5. For automatic or manual transfer
of loads to alternate sources, as in
double-ended secondary selective
unit substations.

29

6. For simplifying key interlocking
with primary interrupter switches.

30

7. To satisfy NEC
 service entrance
requirements when more than
six feeder breakers are required.

31
32
33
34
35

Main secondary breakers must have
adequate interrupting ratings, but
not necessarily adequate continuous
current ratings. They should be able
to carry continuously not only the
anticipated maximum continuous
output of the transformer but also
any temporary overloads.

Maximum capabilities of transformers
of various types, can be found in
Section 14.0 It will be noted that the
maximum ratings will often require the
substitution of larger frame main breakers than those listed in the tables. Even
if a self-cooled transformer only is
considered, it should be remembered
that with ratings of 750 kVA and higher,
provision for the future addition of
cooling fans is automatically included.
It is recommended that the main breaker
have sufficient capacity for the future
fan-cooled rating, plus an allowance for
overloads, if possible, particularly since
load growth cannot always be predicted.
The same considerations should be
given to the main bus capacities and
main current transformer ratios.

Bus Sectionalizing (Tie) Breakers
The minimum recommended continuous current rating of bus sectionalizing
or tie breakers, as used in double-ended
secondary selective unit sub-stations,
or for connecting two single-ended
substations, is one-half that of the
associated main breakers. The interrupting rating should be at least equal to
that of the feeder breakers. It is common
practice to select the tie breaker of the
next frame size below that of the main
breakers. However, many users and
engineers prefer that the tie breaker be
identical to and interchangeable with
the main breakers, so that under normal
conditions it will be available as a spare
main breaker.
In general, the tie breaker, like the
main breaker, trip unit should have
its instantaneous tripping defeated.

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0582

Generator Breakers
In most applications where generators
are connected through breakers to the
secondary bus, they are used as emergency standby sources only, and are
not synchronized or paralleled with the
unit substation transformers. Under
these conditions, the interrupting rating
of the generator breaker will be based
solely on the generator kVA and subtransient reactance. This reactance varies
with the generator type and rpm, from
a minimum of approximately 9% for a
2-pole 3600 rpm turbine driven gener ator to 15% or 20% or more for a medium
or slow speed engine type generator.
Thus the feeder breakers selected for the
unit substation will usually be adequate
for a standby generator of the same
kVA as the transformer.
Most generators have a 2-hour 25%
overload rating, and the generator
breaker must be adequate for this
overload current. Selective type long
and short delay trip protection only is
usually recommended for coordination
with the feeder breakers, with the long
delay elements set at 125% to 150% of
the maximum generator current rating
for generator protection.
In the case of two or more paralleled
generators, anti-motoring reverse power
relays (device 32) are recommended
for protection of the prime movers,
particularly piston type engines. For
larger generators requiring a Magnum
MDS-632 or larger, voltage-restraint
type overcurrent relays (device 51V)
are recommended.

For a fully selective system, instantaneous protection on main breakers
should be defeated, as they typically
cannot be coordinated with downstream devices.

36
37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0583

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

Application
Feeder Breakers — General
Circuit breakers for feeder circuit
protection may be manually or
electrically operated, with long and
short delay or long delay and instantaneous type trip devices, and trip
settings, as required for the specific
circuit and load requirements.

General purpose feeder breakers, such as
for lighting circuits, are usually equipped
with long delay and instantaneous trip
devices, with the long delay pickup set
for the maximum load demand in the
circuit. Where arcing fault protection is
required, the instantaneous trip setting
should be as low as practicable consistent with inrush requirements.

Motor Starting Feeder Breakers
These breakers are usually electrically
operated, with long delay and instantaneous tripping characteristics for
motor running, locked rotor and fault
protection. The breaker sensor rating
should be chosen so that the long delay
pickup can be set at 125% of motor full
load current for motors with a 1.15
service factor, or at 115% for all other
motors. Contactors are recommended
for this application when there are a
number of daily operations involved.
When system short circuits are less
than 40 times the motor full load
current, the motor breaker tripping
characteristic should include a short
delay characteristic for greater fault
protection.

Repetitive Duty
Repetitive breaker opening and closing, such as in frequent motor starting
and stopping, are covered by ANSI
standards C37.13 and C37.16. These
standards list the number of operations between servicing (adjusting,
cleaning, lubrication, tightening, etc.)
and the total numbers of operations
under various conditions without
requiring replacement of parts, for
the various breaker frame sizes.

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS

21.1-11

Application Data
For motor starting duty, with closing
starting currents up to 600% and opening
running currents up to 100% of the
breaker frame size, at 80% power
factor or higher, the endurance or
total operations (not requiring parts
replacement) will be as follows:
800 A Frame: 1400 operations
1600 A Frame: 400 operations
The frequency of operation should not
exceed 20 starts in 10 minutes or 30 in
one hour.

Group Motor Feeder Breakers
Typical loads for such circuits are motor
control centers. The feeder breakers
may be either manually or electrically
operated as preferred, and are usually
equipped with long and short delay trip
protection only for coordination with
the individual motor circuit devices.
The minimum long delay pickup setting
should be 115% of the running current
of the largest motor in the group, plus
the sum of the running circuits of all
other motors.

Zone Selective Interlocking
By definition, a selectively coordinated
system is one where by adjusting trip
unit pickup and time delay settings, the
circuit breaker closest to the fault trips
first. The upstream breaker serves two
functions: (1) back-up protection to the
downstream breaker and (2) protection
of the conductors between the upstream
and downstream breakers. These
elements are provided for on Digitrip
trip units.
For faults which occur on the conductors between the upstream and downstream breakers it is ideally desirable
for the upstream breaker to trip with
no time delay. This is the feature provided by zone selective interlocking.
Digitrip trip units include this option.
Zone selective interlocking is a communication signal between trip units
applied on upstream and downstream
breakers. Each trip unit must be applied
as if zone selective interlocking were
not employed, and set for selective
coordination.

During fault conditions, each trip
unit which senses the fault sends a
restraining signal to all upstream trip
units. This restraining signal results in
causing the upstream trip to continue
timing as it is set. In the absence of a
restraining signal, the trip unit trips the
associated breaker with no intentional
time delay, minimizing damage to the
fault point. This restraining signal is
a very low level. To minimize the
potential for induced noise, and
provide a low impedance interface
between trip units, twisted pair conductors are utilized for interconnection.
Ground fault and short delay pickup
on Digitrip Trip Units have zone
selective interlocking.
Zone selective interlocking may be
applied as a type of bus differential
protection. It must be recognized,
however, that one must accept the
minimum pickup of the trip unit for
sensitivity.
It must also be recognized that not
all systems may be equipped with
zone selective interlocking. Systems
containing multiple sources, or where
the direction of power flow varies,
require special considerations, or may
not be suitable for this feature. Digitrip
zone interlocking has been tested with
up to three levels with up to 20 trip
units per level.

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.1-12 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS
Application Data

15000

50

00

32

10000

00

25

00

00

16

During-Weld Amperes (rms)

5000

00

12

00
10
00
80

0

2000

0

40

0

30

0

Sheet 0584

0

T = Long Time Delay Setting in
seconds (range is 2-24 seconds)

0

iw = rms value of the welding
current in amperes

25
20

500

In = Rating plug current value
in amperes

29
200

The memory is filled during the weld
and empties during the non-welding
period of the duty cycle.

30
31

33

>>

The size of the thermal memory is
30 T (In / In)2 unit Amperes2 seconds. It
fills at a rate of (iw / In)2 unit Amperes2
seconds/second, trips at 30T seconds,
and empties at the rate of (In / In)2 unit
Amperes2 seconds/second, where:

60

28

32

<<

January 2005

The Magnum DS microprocessor-based
true rms sensing devices have a thermal memory and are well suited for this
service. The thermal memory functions
prevent exceeding the breaker and
cable maximum permissible thermal
energy level. The circuit also replicates
time dissipation of thermal energy.

20

23

27

40

00

22

26

Index

The application of Eaton’s CutlerHammer Magnum DS circuit breakers
to resistance welding circuits is shown
in Figure 21.1-7 of the Sensor Selection
Guide. Sensor ratings only are given;
the breaker frame must be selected as
required for interrupting ratings.

Sensor Rating,
Amperes

21

25

TOC

Resistance Welding

20

24

Home

100
3

4

5 6 7 8 9 10
20
Percent Duty Cycle

30

40 50 60

Figure 21.1-7. Magnum DS Breaker Sensor Selection Guide for Resistance Welding Applications

These welding applications are based
on long delay and instantaneous trip
devices with the following settings.
The long time delay setting is based
on the weld amperes and duty cycle.
Instantaneous trip setting is two times
the average weld amperes (weld
amperes times percent duty cycle)
or higher.
Note: Making Current Release (MCR)
may prevent closing the breaker during
a welding cycle.

34
35
36
37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0585

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

21.2-1

General Description

Contents
DSII/DSLII
General Description . . . . . . . .
Current Limiters (DSLII) . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Control Diagram . . . .
Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Data. . . . . . . . . .

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — DSII

Type DSII Circuit Breaker Features
21.2-1
21.2-3
21.2-4
21.2-4
21.2-4
21.2-5
21.2-9

Type DSII Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers

20

Protection During Levering Operation.
When levering the breaker between
the connected, test and disconnected
positions, the operator is protected by
a steel barrier (faceplate) from contact
with live parts.

21
22

Two-Step Stored Energy Closing
Mechanism. Spring charging (1) and
spring release to close breaker (2) are
independent operations, and always
give positive control of the instant
of closing.

23
24

Motor Operated Stored-Energy
Closing Mechanisms. Supplied on
electrically operated breakers. Standard control voltages are 48, 125 and
250 dc, and 120 and 240 ac.

25
26

Remote Closing and Tripping. Can be
accomplished with manually operated
breakers by charging the closing mechanism manually, then closing and
tripping it remotely through electric
spring release and shunt trip coils;
available as optional attachments.

DSII with 910 Trip Unit

Type DSII Low Voltage Power Circuit
Breakers provide:
100% rated, fully selective
protection.
■ Integral microprocessor-based
breaker tripping systems.
■ Two-step stored-energy breaker
closing.
■

And many other features for coordinated, safe, convenient, trouble-free
and economical control and protection
of low voltage distribution systems.

Maximum Ratings
600 Vac.
5000 amperes continuous.
■ 200,000 amperes short circuit capacity.
■
■

Digitrip RMS Integral MicroprocessorBased Breaker Overcurrent Trip
Systems. Provides maximum reliability,
true rms sensing as standard, excellent
repeatability, and requires minimum
maintenance. No external control source
is required.
Change in Trip Rating. The overcurrent
trip pickup range is established by a
combination of trip unit rating plugs
and the rating of the current sensors
on the breaker.
Interphase Barriers on Breakers.
Provide maximum insulation security.
The barriers are easily removable for
breaker inspection.
Provision for Padlocking. All breakers
include provision for padlocking open
to prevent electrical or manual closing.
This padlocking also secures the breaker
in the connected, test or disconnected
position by preventing levering.
Ease of Inspection and Maintenance.
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Type DSII
breakers are designed for maximum
accessibility and the utmost ease of
inspection and maintenance.

27
28
Two-Step Stored-Energy Closing

Two-step stored energy closing gives
operator positive control of closing after
spring mechanism is charged. Breaker
can’t close while still being charged.
Operation is optional — full manual,
full electric, or manual charge and
electric close.
On manual breakers, the spring
mechanism is manually charged by
one downward stroke of the lever
without pumping, and released by the
mechanical “push-to-close” release
button. On electrically operated
breakers, the mechanism is normally
charged and released electrically, but
can be charged manually by pumping
the charging lever 10 to 12 times and
released mechanically.
An interlock discharges the closing
springs as the breaker is removed
from the compartment. The system
is patterned after 5 kV and 15 kV
Metal-Clad switchgear.

29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.2-2 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — DSII

Home

General Description

20
21
22
23
24

Arc Chute

Levering Mechanism

There are three basic means of
extinguishing an arc: lengthening
the arc path; cooling by gas blast or
contraction; deionizing or physically
removing the conduction particles
from the arc path. It was the discovery
by Westinghouse of this last method
which made the first large power air
circuit breaker possible.

The worm gear levering mechanism is
self-contained on the breaker drawout
element and engages slots in the
breaker compartment. A removable
crank is used to lever the breaker
between the Connected-TestDisconnected and Removed positions.

The DE-ION
 principle is incorporated
in all of these circuit breakers. This
makes possible faster arc extinction
for given contact travel; ensures
positive interruption and minimum
contact burning.

25
26
Arcing
Contact Spring

Mechanical interlocking is arranged so
that levering cannot be accomplished
unless the breaker is in the opened
position.

Stored-Energy Mechanism
A cam-type closing mechanism closes
the breaker. It receives its energy from a
spring which can be charged by a manual
handle on the front of the breaker or by
a universal electric motor.

Stationary Arcing
Contacts

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0586

Release of the stored energy is accomplished by manually depressing a bar
on the front of the breaker or electrically energizing a releasing solenoid.

Contacts
All Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer air circuit
breakers have solid block, silver
tungsten, inlaid main contacts.
This construction ensures lasting
current-carrying ability, which is not
seriously impaired even after repeated
fault interruptions or repeated
momentary overload.
The main contacts are of the butt type
and are composed of a multiplicity of
fingers to give many points of contact
without alignment being critical.

Interphase
Barriers

27

Secondary
Disconnecting
Contacts

28
29

Molded Base

30
31

Moving
Arcing
Contact

Stationary Main
Contact Fingers

32
33

Moving Contact
Assembly
Insulating
Link

34
Levering
Device Arm
(Connected
Position)

35
36
37

Sensors

Main Disconnecting
Contacts

Insulating Link
Lock Nut

DSII Breaker Pole Unit

DSII Breaker Rear View

38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0587

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — DSII

Index

21.2-3

General Description

Type DSLII Limiter Type Air Circuit Breakers

20
21
22
23
24
25
26

DSLII-620 Front View

DSLII-620 Rear View

Application

Scope of Fault Interruption

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Type DSLII
breakers are coordinated combinations
of Type DSII breakers and series
connected current limiters. They are
intended for applications requiring the
overload protection and switching functions of air circuit breakers on systems
whose available fault currents exceed
the interrupting rating of the breakers
alone, and/or the withstand ratings of
“downstream” circuit components.

With properly selected and coordinated limiters, it is expected that
the breaker itself will clear overloads
and faults within its interrupting
rating, leaving the limiters intact and
undamaged. The limiters will provide
fast interruption of fault currents
beyond the breaker rating, up to
a maximum of 200,000 amperes
symmetrical. Thus, on overloads
and faults within the breaker interrupting rating, the breaker protects the
limiters; on higher fault currents
exceeding the breaker rating, the
limiters protect the breaker.

Sizes and Arrangements
Types DSLII-308 (800 ampere),
DSLII-516 (1600 ampere), and
DSLII-620 (2000 ampere) frame
breakers include the limiters
integrally mounted on the drawout
breaker elements in series with the
upper terminals.
Current limiters used in Types
DSLII-632 and DSLII-840 combinations
are mounted on separate drawout
trucks in an additional equal size
compartment.

Protection Against Single Phasing
Loads are protected against single
phase operation by interlock arrangements which trip the circuit breaker
whenever any one limiter blows. The
breaker cannot be reclosed on a live
source until there are three unblown
limiters in the circuit.
On the Types DSLII-308, DSLII-516
and DSLII-620 breakers, the primaries
of small auxiliary transformers are
connected in parallel with the limiters.

The voltage between the ends of an
unblown limiter is zero, but when any
limiter blows, the associated transformer is energized and (1) operates
an indicator identifying the blown fuse
and (2) picks up a solenoid which raises
the breaker trip bar, holding the breaker
mechanically trip-free.
The DSLII-632 and DSLII-840 combinations with separately mounted limiters
operate on the same principle except
that the solenoid operates a micro-switch
which trips the breaker electrically
through a shunt trip coil.

27
28
29
30
31
32

Safety Features
The integral fuses on Types DSLII-308,
DSLII-516 and DSLII-620 breakers are
inaccessible until the breaker is completely withdrawn from its compartment,
thereby ensuring complete isolation.
Likewise, the Types DSLII-632 and
DSLII-840 fuses are inaccessible until
the separate fuse truck is completely
withdrawn and the fuses isolated. The
fuse truck is key interlocked with the
breaker to prevent withdrawal or insertion unless the breaker is locked open.

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.2-4 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — DSII

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

General Description — Accessories/Trip Units

20

Optional Breaker Attachments
and Accessories

21

A. Shunt trip on manually operated
breakers, for any standard control
voltage.

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

B. Auxiliary contacts on manually
or electrically operated breakers.
Maximum of five normally open
and five normally closed contacts
are available on any breaker,
manually or electrically operated.
The contact rating is 10 amperes.

F. Electric Lockout (optional on
manual breakers). In order to close
the breaker after manually charging the closing mechanism, it is
necessary to operate an electrical
pushbutton on the breaker faceplate. This pushbutton is wiredout to the secondary contacts so
it may be wired in series with any
required external interlocking.
The mechanical “push-to-close”
bar is made inoperative when
the breaker is in the connected
position.

C. Compartment position switch, six
or 12 contacts, actuated by movement of drawout breaker between
the connected and test positions.
Most common uses are for disconnecting remote control circuits of
electrically operated breaker, and
for bypassing “b” interlocking
auxiliary contacts, when breaker
is withdrawn to test position.

G. Electric close release on manually
operated breakers, for any standard
control voltage. Breaker can be
closed by remote control switch
or pushbutton after the closing
spring is manually charged.

D. Undervoltage trip (ac and dc
available). Acts to trip the breaker
when the voltage on its solenoid
coil is insufficient to restrain a
spring-loaded core. The dropout
point is within 30 to 60% of the
nominal coil voltage and is not
adjustable. Available as either
instantaneous or time delay type.
The time delay is within two to
seven seconds after zero voltage
occurs, and is not adjustable. The
device automatically resets when
the breaker opens; approximately
one minute is required for resetting of the time delay type.

Electronic Trip Units

E. Overcurrent trip switch (OTS).
A latching type switch with two
independent contacts either
normally open or normally closed.
Operates only when the breaker is
tripped automatically on an overload or fault condition. It may be
used for alarm and/or interlocking
circuits. Resetting is done by a
pushbutton on the breaker faceplate,
or by a remote switch through an
optional reset coil.

H. Operation counter.
I. Latch check switch.

Eaton offers the most comprehensive
range of electronic trip units in the
industry for power circuit breakers.
Digitrip electronic trip units are ac
devices that employ microprocessorbased technology that provides a true
rms current sensing means for proper
correlation with thermal characteristics

Legend
LS
— Limit Switch for Closing Spring
MOT — Motor for Spring Charging
SH TR — Shunt Trip
SR
— Spring Release
Y
— Anti-Pump Relay
Description of Operation
1 — Motor is energized through LS contact.
2 — Motor runs and charges Closing Spring.
3 — When Closing Spring fully charged, LS
contacts reverse.
4 — CIosing CS-C contact energizes SR Coil
through Y, LS & “b” contacts.
5 — When Breaker closes, “b” opens and Y
Coil is energized in series with SR Coil.
6 — Y contact opens to open SR Coil circuit
& prevent pumping should breaker
open while CS-C is held closed. Y Coil
has very low drop-out voltage.
7 — LS contacts reverse and motor
recharges closing springs.

January 2005
Sheet 0588

of conductors and equipment. The primary function of the Digitrip electronic
trip unit is to provide circuit protection.
This is achieved by analyzing the secondary current signals received from
the circuit breaker current sensors
and initiating trip signals to the circuit
breaker trip unit when preset current
levels and time delay settings are
exceeded. By sampling the current
waveform at various points on the
wave and calculating true rms current,
the Digitrip is able to reduce nuisance
tripping events due to non-sinusoidal
wave shapes.
Electronic trip units are applied to
distribution systems when high standards of protection and coordination
are called for. In addition, electronic
trip units can provide further enhanced
features such as alarming, diagnostics,
system monitoring and communications.
Cutler-Hammer rms sensing trip
units for power breakers fall into two
main categories:
Front adjustable trip units:
Digitrip RMS 510, 610, 810, 910.
■ Programmable trip units:
Digitrip OPTIM 750, 1050.
■

For additional information on trip units
see Section 21.4.

CS (or PB)
Close

Ind. G
Lts.

MOT

SR

CS (or PB)
Trip

R

SHTR

Y
Y

LS
b

LS
b

a

Figure 21.2-1. Standard Control Diagram for Type DSII Electrically Operated Breaker,
in DSII Switchgear, for ac or dc Control Source

38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0589

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — DSII

Index

Technical Data

DSII Ratings

Maximum voltages at which the interrupting ratings in Table 21.2-1 apply are:

Table 21.2-1. Interrupting Ratings of Type DSII Breakers
Breaker
Type

Frame
Size,
Amperes

Ratings, rms Symmetrical Amperes
Short Time Rating 


Interrupting Rating
208-240 V

480 V

600 V

208-240 V

480 V

600 V

800
800
800

42,000
65,000
65,000

30,000
50,000
65,000

30,000
42,000
50,000

30,000
50,000
65,000

30,000
50,000
65,000

30,000
42,000
50,000

DSII-516
DSII-616
DSII-620

1600
1600
2000

65,000
65,000
65,000

50,000
65,000
65,000

42,000
50,000
50,000

50,000
65,000
65,000

50,000
65,000
65,000

42,000
50,000
50,000

DSII-632
DSII-840
DSII-850

3200
4000
5000

85,000
130,000
130,000

65,000
85,000
85,000

65,000
85,000
85,000

65,000
85,000
85,000

65,000
85,000
85,000

65,000
85,000
85,000

Short circuit ratings of non-automatic breakers except the DSII-840 and DSII-850 which are 65,000.

Table 21.2-2. Digitrip RMS Adjustable Trip Settings
Time/Current
Characteristic

Pickup
Setting

Pickup Point
(see note)

Time Band,
Seconds

Long Delay

0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8,
0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1.0

In Times
Long Delay Setting

2, 4, 7, 10, 12, 15, 20, 24
(at 6 times pickup value)

Instantaneous

2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6
M1=8, M2=12

In Times
Instantaneous Setting

—

Short Delay

2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6
S1=8, S2=10

Ir Times
Short Delay Setting

0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5
(Flat Response)
0.1 , 0.3 , 6.5 

Ground Fault

A (.25), B (.3), C (.35),
D (.4), E (.5), F (.6),
H (.75), K (1.0)
(1200A Maximum)

In Times
Ground Fault Setting

0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5
(Flat Response)
0.1 , 0.3 , 0.5



I2t Response.

Note: In = Rating Plug Value
Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting x In.

Table 21.2-3. Interrupting Ratings of Type DSLII Breakers
Type

DSLII-308

DSLII-516

DSLII-620

DSLII-632

DSLII-840

Frame Size, Amperes

800

1600

2000

3200

4000

Maximum Interrupting Rating,
rms Symmetrical Amperes,
System Voltage 600 or Below

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

48 dc

125 dc

250 dc

120 ac

240 ac

Close current (SR), ampere
Shunt trip current, ampere
Spring charge motor ampere

5.0
5.0
7.5

2.0
2.0
3.0

1.0
1.0
1.5

3.0
2.0
3.0

2.0
1.0
1.5

Control voltage range:
Close —
Trip —

38 – 56
28 – 56

100 – 140
70 – 140

200 – 280
140 – 280

104 – 127
60 – 127

208 – 254
208 – 254

Note: Motor currents are running currents; inrush is approximately 400%. Motor running time
to charge spring approximately 5 seconds.

Table 21.2-5. Estimated Heat Loss Per Breaker
DSII-308 (DSLII-308)
DSII-516 (DSLII-516)
DSII-620 (DSLII-620)

400 (600)
1000 (1500)
1500 (2250)

DSII-632
DSII-840
DSII-850

2400
3000
4700

DSII-FT32
DSII-FT40

3600
4500

CA08104001E

Maximum
Voltage

21

208 or 240
480
600

254
508
635

22

These interrupting ratings are based
on the standard duty cycle consisting
of an opening operation, a 15-second
interval and a close-open operation,
in succession, with delayed tripping
in case of short-delay devices.
The standard duty cycle for short-time
ratings consists of maintaining the rated
current for two periods of 1/2 second
each, with a 15-second interval of zero
current between the two periods.
Table 21.2-7. Available Sensor Ratings for
Digitrip RMS
Breaker
Type

Frame
Sensor
Size,
Ratings,
Amperes Amperes

23
24
25
26
27
28

DSII-308, DSLII-308,
DSII-508 or
DSII-608

800

200, 300, 400,
600, 800

DSII-516, DSLII-516
or DSII-616

1600

200, 300, 400,
600, 800, 1200,
1600

DSII-620

2000

200, 300, 400,
600, 800, 1200,
1600, 2000

30

DSLII-620
DSII-632, DSLII-632
DSII-840, DSLII-840
DSII-850

2000
3200
4000
5000

2000
2400, 3200
3200, 4000
5000

31

Sensor Ratings, Plug Rating
Amperes
in Amperes (In)

Control
Voltage

Watts

System
Voltage

Table 21.2-8. Available Digitrip RMS Rating
Plugs Marked 50/60 Hertz

Table 21.2-4. Control Voltages and Currents

Breaker Type

20

Table 21.2-6. Maximum Voltage Rating

DSII-308
DSII-508
DSII-608




21.2-5

200
300
400

29

32
33

100, 200
200, 250, 300
200, 250, 300, 400

34

600
800
1200

300, 400, 600
400, 600, 800
600, 800, 1000, 1200

35

1600
2000
2400

800, 1000, 1200, 1600
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000 
1600, 2000, 2400

3200
4000
5000

1600, 2000, 2400, 3000, 3200
2000, 2400, 3200, 4000
3200, 4000, 5000



2000 ampere is the only plug available for
DSLII-620.

Note: The rating plug is for 50 and 60 Hz
applications. Rating plugs are not interchangeable with 60 Hz or 50 Hz only
rating plugs.

36
37
38
39
40

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.2-6 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — DSII

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

Technical Data

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33

The following curves illustrate the ratings,
melting time-current characteristics
and current limiting, or let-through
characteristics, of limiters for Eaton’s
Cutler-Hammer Type DSLII breakers.
The let-through current for a given
limiter application is readily determined
by extending a vertical line from the
applicable maximum available symmetrical fault amperes at the bottom
margin to the characteristic line for
the particular limiter, and from this
intersection extending a horizontal line
to the left margin and reading the peak
current. The withstand rating of any
circuit elements protected by the
limiters should be at least equal to
this peak current.
It will be noted that the let-through
current increases with the limiter size
or ampere rating; in other words, the
maximum current limiting effect is
obtained with the smallest size. This
effect is to be expected, since the
resistance decreases as the rating
increases. If the vertical line from the
bottom margin as described in the
previous paragraph does not intersect
the limiter characteristic line, it is
indicated that the available system
fault current is below the “threshold”
current of that limiter, and it will offer
no current limiting effect.
The current limiting principle is
illustrated below:
la = The Available Peak Fault Current
tm = The Melting Time

Limiter Selection
The selection of a suitable limiter
rating for a given application is
generally governed by a choice of
the following types of protection:
A. Maximum protection of “downstream” components. Type DSLII
breakers are often used for this
purpose even when the maximum available fault currents are
within the interrupting rating of
the corresponding Type DSII
unfused breakers.

Breaker
Type

38
39

Breaker
Type

Available Limiters,
Amperes

DSLII-632
DSLII-840

2500, 3000, 4000
2500, 3000, 4000, 5000

Recommended 

Maximum 
2000
2000
2000

DSLII-308
DSLII-308
DSLII-516

600
800
600

800
1200
800

1200
1600
2000

2000
2000
3000

DSLII-516
DSLII-516
DSLII-516
DSLII-620

800
1200
1600
2000

1000
2000
—
—

2000
2500
3000
3000

3000
3000
—
—






For use only when protection of downstream equipment is required. Not completely coordinated
with breaker to avoid nuisance blowing.
Lowest rating which can be coordinated with breaker to minimize nuisance blowing.
Highest available ratings, for protection of breaker only.

Table 21.2-11. Sensor, Plug and Limiter Selection
DSII
Breakers

Sensor Rating, Plug Rating,
Amperes
Amperes

308, 508,
608

200
300
400
600
800

516, 616

Limiter Rating, Amperes
(Applicable only to DSLII Breakers)

100, 200
200, 250, 300
200, 250, 300, 400
300, 400, 600
400, 600, 800

250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1200, 1600, 2000
400, 600, 800, 1200, 1600, 2000
600, 800, 1200, 1600, 2000
800, 1200, 1600, 2000
1200, 1600, 2000

200
300
400
600
800
1200
1600

100, 200
200, 250, 300
200, 250, 300, 400
300, 400, 600
400, 600, 800
600, 800, 1000, 1200
800, 1000, 1200, 1600

800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000
800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000
800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000
800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000
2000, 2500, 3000
3000

620

200
300
400
600
800
1200
1600
2000

100, 200
200, 250, 300
200, 250, 300, 400
300, 400, 600
400, 600, 800
600, 800, 1000, 1200
800, 1000, 1200, 1600
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000 

632

2400
3200

1600, 2000, 2400
2500, 3000, 4000
1600, 2000, 2400, 3000, 3200 2500, 3000, 4000

840

3200
4000

1600, 2000, 2400, 3200
2000, 2400, 3200, 4000

2500, 3000, 4000, 5000
2500, 3000, 4000, 5000

850

5000

3200, 4000, 5000

Not Applicable

ta

Table 21.2-9. DSLII-632 and DSLII-840
Available Limiters

Minimum 


1200
1200
1200

tc

Figure 21.2-2. Current Limiting

Limiter Rating, Amperes

250
400
600

Ip

37

Sensor Rating,
Amperes
200
300
400

Ia

tm

Minimum, recommended, and maximum limiter sizes for Eaton’s CutlerHammer Types DSLII-308, DSLII-516,
and DSLII-620 breakers are given
in table.

DSLII-308
DSLII-308
DSLII-308

34

36

Case A would tend to use the smallest
available limiter; Case B the largest.
When downstream protection is
required, the selection is usually
a compromise, since certain small
limiters cannot be coordinated with
the breaker to avoid nuisance blowing
on overloads or small and moderate
short circuits.

Table 21.2-10. DSLII Limiter Selection

tc = The Total Interrupting (Clearing)
Time

35

Sheet 0590

B. Protection of the circuit breaker only.

Ip = The Peak Let-Through Current
ta = The Arcing Time

January 2005




Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
3000 

2000 ampere is the only plug available for DSLII-620.
3000 ampere is the only limiter available for DSLII-620.

40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

Sheet 0591

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

4000

3000

2000

40 50 60

500
600
700
800
900
1000

30

400

20

300

5 6 7 8 9 10

200

4

3

70
80
90
100

SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES
2

1
1000
900
800
700
600
500

20

400,000

1000
900
800
700
600
500

300,000

400

400

200,000

300

300

200

AMPERE
RATING

2

2

Pr
od
uc
e

3

an

4

3

400

irc
ui
tc

4

40,000

30,000

300
250

ur
re
nt
C

10
9
8
7
6
5

20,000

1
.9
.8
.7
.6
.5

.4

.4

5000

.3

.3

4000

.2

.2

.1
.09
.08
.07
.06
.05

.1
.09
.08
.07
.06
.05

24

.04

.04

.03

.03

.02

.02

7000

25

6000

3000

26

2000

27

SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES

Ref. Curve No. 639771

Type DSL-206 Limiters — For DSL-206 and DSLII-308 Breakers

200,000

90,000
100,000

70,000
80,000

60,000

50,000

40,000

30,000

20,000

9000
10,000

8000

7000

6000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

AVAILABLE CURRENT, RMS SYMMETRICAL AMPERES

.01

5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
10,000

4000

3000

2000

40 50 60

400

30

500
600
700
800
900
1000

20

300

5 6 7 8 9 10

200

4

70
80
90
100

1000

3

Figure 21.2-3. DSLII-308 Average Melting Time-Current Characteristics

28

Ref. Curve No. 639772

Supersedes AD 36-783
dated April 1990

Supersedes AD 36-783
dated April 1990

Type DSL-206 Limiters — For DSL-206 and DSLII-308 Breakers

January 1997

January 1997

29

Figure 21.2-5. DSLII-308 Let-Through Characteristics

30

6000
7000
8000
9000
10,000

5000

40 50 60

4000

30

3000

20

2000

6 7 8 9 10

600
700
800
900
1000

5

500

4

400

3

300

2

200

1

70
80
90
100

SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES

1000
900
800
700
600
500

1000
900
800
700
600
500

400

400

300

300

400,000
300,000

AMPERE
RATING

200,000
200

2500
2000

100
90
80
70
60
50

100
90
80
70
60
50

40

40

30

30

20

20

10
9
8
7
6
5

10
9
8
7
6
5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1
.9
.8
.7
.6
.5

1
.9
.8
.7
.6
.5

.4

.4

5000

.3

.3

4000

.2

.2

1600

100,000
90,000

1200

80,000

60,000

e

50,000

od

uc

33

ui

tc

an

Pr

40,000

C
ur

re

nt

C

irc

30,000

20,000

34

um
m
ax
i
M

MAXIMUM PEAK LET-THROUGH CURRENT, AMPS

800

10,000
9000
8000

35

7000
6000

36

3000
.1
.09
.08
.07
.06
.05

.1
.09
.08
.07
.06
.05

.04

.04

.03

.03

32

1000

70,000

TIME IN SECONDS

TIME IN SECONDS

31

3000

3000

1600
2000
2500

1200

1000

800

Limiter Ampere Rating

Pe
ak

200

23

10,000
9000
8000

1
.9
.8
.7
.6
.5

2

22

600

C

20

10
9
8
7
6
5

50,000

ak

20

60,000

Pe

30

um

30

1200
800

70,000

im

40

1600

80,000

ax

40

100,000
90,000

M

100
90
80
70
60
50

MAXIMUM PEAK LET-THROUGH CURRENT, AMPS

100
90
80
70
60
50

.01
1

21

2000

TIME IN SECONDS

600

800
1200
1600
2000

250
300

400

Limiter Ampere Rating

200

TIME IN SECONDS

21.2-7

Technical Data

5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
10,000

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — DSII

2000

37
200,000

90,000
100,000

70,000
80,000

60,000

50,000

40,000

30,000

20,000

9000
10,000

8000

7000

6000

5000

4000

3000

.02

.02

2000

1000

1000

.01

6000
7000
8000
9000
10,000

5000

40 50 60

4000

30

3000

20

2000

6 7 8 9 10

600
700
800
900
1000

5

400

4

500

3

300

2

200

1

70
80
90
100

AVAILABLE CURRENT, RMS SYMMETRICAL AMPERES
.01

38

SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES

Type DSL-416 Limiters — For DSL-416, DSLII-516, DSL-420 

and DSLII-620 
 Breakers

Type DSL-416 Limiters — For DSL-416, DSLII-516, DSL-420 
and DSLII-620  Breakers

Ref. Curve No. 639431
Supersedes AD 36-783
dated April 1990
January 1997

Figure 21.2-4. DSLII-516 and DSLII-620 Average Melting
Time-Current Characteristics



Supersedes AD 36-783
dated April 1990

39

January 1997

Figure 21.2-6. DSLII-516 and DSLII-620 Let-Through Characteristics


DSL-420 and DSLII-620 — use only 3000 limiter.

DSL-420 and DSLII-620 — use only 3000 limiter.

CA08104001E

Ref. Curve No. 639432

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

40

21.2-8 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — DSII

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

26

4000

3000

2000

40 50 60

500
600
700
800
900
1000

30

400

20

300

5 6 7 8 9 10

200

4

5000

4000

3000

Ampere Rating Limiter

40
30

20

20

10
90
80
70
60
50

10
90
80
70
60
50

40

40

30

30

20

20

10
9
8
7
6
5

10
9
8
7
6
5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1
.9
.8
.7
.6
.5

1
.9
.8
.7
.6
.5

.4

.4

.3

.3

.2

.2

.1
.09
.08
.07
.06
.05

.1
.09
.08
.07
.06
.05

.04

.04

Sheet 0592

400,000

100
90
80
70
60
50

AMPERE
RATING
300,000
5000
4000
200,000
3000

100,000
90,000
80,000
70,000
60,000

od

uc
e

50,000

rc
ui
tc
an

Pr

40,000

Cu

rr
en
t

Ci

30,000

Pe
ak

20,000

M
ax
im
um

TIME IN SECONDS

TIME IN SECONDS

2500

MAXIMUM PEAK LET-THROUGH CURRENT, AMPS

25

3

40

22

24

2

30

21

23

1

70
80
90
100

SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES
100
90
80
70
60
50

2500

20

5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
10,000

Technical Data

January 2005

10,000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000

3000

29

Ref. Curve No. 705503
Supersedes AD 36-783
dated April 1990

Figure 21.2-7. DSLII-632 and DSLII-840 Average Melting
Time-Current Characteristics

200,000

70,000
80,000

60,000

50,000

40,000

30,000

20,000

9000
10,000

8000

Type DSL-632 Limiters — For DSL-632, and DSLII-632 Breakers
Type DSL-840 Limiters — For DSL-840, and DSLII-840 Breakers

Ref. Curve No.
705504Supercedes AD
36-783
dated April 1990
January 1997

January 1997

30

7000

AVAILABLE CURRENT, RMS SYMMETRICAL AMPERES

SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES

Type DSL-632 Limiters — For DSL-632, and DSLII-632 Breakers
Type DSL-840 Limiters — For DSL-840, and DSLII-840 Breakers

90,000
100,000

5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
10,000

40 50 60

4000

30

3000

20

2000

5 6 7 8 9 10

400

4

500
600
700
800
900
1000

3

300

2

6000

1000
5000

.01

4000

.01
1

3000

.02

2000

.03

2000

1000

.03
.02

200

28

70
80
90
100

27

Figure 21.2-8. DSLII-632 and DSLII-840 Let-Through Characteristics

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0593

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

Application
Standards
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer DSII circuit
breakers meet or exceed all applicable
requirements of ANSI Standards
C37.13, C37.17, C37.50 and CSA.

System Voltage and Frequency
DSII breakers are designed for operation on ac systems only, 60 Hz or 50 Hz,
635 volts maximum.

Continuous Current Ratings
Unlike transformers, generators and
motors, circuit breakers are maximumrated devices and have no built-in
temporary overload current ratings.
Consequently, it is vital that each
application takes into consideration
the maximum anticipated current
demand, initial and future, including
temporary overloads.
The continuous rating of any DSII
breaker is limited to the sensor rating, or
the frame size current rating, whichever
is the lesser. For instance, a DS-616 1600
ampere frame breaker with 800 ampere
sensors has a maximum continuous
rating of 800 amperes, but the same
breaker with 1600 ampere sensors is
limited to 1600 amperes maximum.
All current ratings are based on a
maximum ambient air temperature
of 40°C (104°F).

Ambient Temperature
The temperature of the air surrounding
the enclosure should be within the
limits of:
-30°C (-22°F) to +40°C (104°F).

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — DSII

21.2-9

Application Data

Altitude
The breakers are applicable at their
full voltage and current ratings up to a
maximum altitude of 6,600 feet (2,012 m)
above sea level. When installed at
higher altitudes, the ratings are subject
to the following correction factors in
accordance with ANSI C37.20.1:
Table 21.2-12. Altitude Derating Factors
Altitude
Meters

Voltage
Current
Correction Correction

6,600
7,000
7,500
8,000

2,012
2,134
2,286
2,438

1.000
.989
.976
.963

1.000
.998
.995
.993

8,500
9,000
9,500
10,000

2,591
2,743
2,896
3,048

.950
.933
.917
.900

.990
.987
.983
.980

10,500
11,000
11,500
12,000

3,200
3,353
3,505
3,658

.883
.867
.850
.833

.977
.973
.970
.967

12,500
13,000

3,810
3,962

.817
.800

.963
.960

Feet

Unusual Environmental and
Operating Conditions
Special attention should be given to
applications subject to the following
conditions:
1. Damaging or hazardous fumes,
vapors, etc.
2. Excessive or abrasive dust.
For such conditions, it is generally
recommended that the switchgear
be installed in a clean, dry room, with
filtered and/or pressurized clean air.
This method permits the use of standard
indoor switchgear and avoids the derating effect of non-ventilated enclosures.

3. Salt spray, excessive moisture,
dripping, etc.
Drip shields in equipment rooms and
space heaters in indoor switchgear,
or outdoor weatherproof enclosures,
may be indicated, depending upon
the severity of the conditions.
4. Excessively high or low ambient
temperatures.
For ambient temperatures exceeding
40°C, and based on a standard temperature rise of 65°C, the continuous current
ratings of breaker frame sizes, and also
buses, current transformers, etc., will be
subject to a derating factor calculated
from the following formula:
105°C ° Total – Special Ambient, °C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------105°C ° Total – 40°C ° Standard Ambient

Circuit breakers are not adversely
affected by very low outdoor ambient
temperatures, particularly when
energized and carrying load currents.
The standard space heaters in
weatherproof switchgear will raise
the temperature slightly and prevent
condensation.
Electrical components such as relays
and instruments, however, must be
applied within the manufacturer’s
specified limits.

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

5. Exposure to seismic shock.
DSII assemblies and breakers have
been certified for applications through
UBC Zone 4 and for the California
Building Code. Assembly modifications are required, so such conditions
must be specified.

31

6. Abnormally high frequency
of operation.

33

In line with above, a lesser number
of operations between servicing, and
more frequent replacement of parts,
may be indicated.

32

34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.2-10 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — DSII
Application Data

20

Application
Feeder Breakers — General

21
22
23
24
25
26

Circuit breakers for feeder circuit
protection may be manually or
electrically operated, with long and
short delay or long delay and instantaneous type trip devices, and trip
settings, as required for the specific
circuit and load requirements.
General purpose feeder breakers,
such as for lighting circuits, are usually
equipped with long delay and instantaneous trip devices, with the long delay
pickup set for the maximum load
demand in the circuit. Where arcing
fault protection is required, the instantaneous trip setting should be as low
as practicable consistent with inrush
requirements.

Motor Starting Feeder Breakers

27
28
29
30
31
32

These breakers are usually electrically
operated, with long delay and instantaneous tripping characteristics for
motor running, locked rotor and fault
protection. The breaker sensor rating
should be chosen so that the long delay
pickup can be set at 125% of motor full
load current for motors with a 1.15
service factor, or at 115% for all other
motors. Contactors are recommended
for this application when there are a
number of daily operations involved.
When system short circuits are less
than 40 times the motor full load current,
the motor breaker tripping characteristic
should include a short delay characteristic for greater fault protection.

Repetitive Duty
Repetitive breaker opening and closing, such as in frequent motor starting
and stopping, are covered by ANSI
standards C37.13 and C37.16. These
standards list the number of operations between servicing (adjusting,
cleaning, lubrication, tightening, etc.)
and the total numbers of operations
under various conditions without
requiring replacement of parts, for
the various breaker frame sizes.
For motor starting duty, with closing
starting currents up to 600% and opening
running currents up to 100% of the
breaker frame size, at 80% power
factor or higher, the endurance or
total operations (not requiring parts
replacement) will be as follows:
800 A Frame: 1400 operations
1600 A Frame: 400 operations
The frequency of operation should not
exceed 20 starts in 10 minutes or 30 in
one hour.

Group Motor Feeder Breakers
Typical loads for such circuits are motor
control centers. The feeder breakers
may be either manually or electrically
operated as preferred, and are usually
equipped with long and short delay
trip protection only for coordination
with the individual motor circuit
devices. The minimum long delay
pickup setting should be 115% of the
running current of the largest motor in
the group, plus the sum of the running
circuits of all other motors.

Zone Selective Interlocking

33
34
35
36
37
38
39

By definition, a selectively coordinated
system is one where by adjusting trip
unit pickup and time delay settings, the
circuit breaker closest to the fault trips
first. The upstream breaker serves two
functions: (1) back-up protection to the
downstream breaker and (2) protection
of the conductors between the upstream
and downstream breakers. These
elements are provided for on Digitrip
trip units.

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0594

Zone selective interlocking is a
communication signal between trip
units applied on upstream and downstream breakers. Each trip unit must
be applied as if zone selective interlocking were not employed, and set
for selective coordination.
During fault conditions, each trip unit
which senses the fault sends a restraining
signal to all upstream trip units. This
restraining signal results in causing
the upstream trip to continue timing as
it is set. In the absence of a restraining
signal, the trip unit trips the associated
breaker with no intentional time delay,
minimizing damage to the fault point.
This restraining signal is a very low level.
To minimize the potential for induced
noise, and provide a low impedance
interface between trip units, a special
secondary connector is added to the
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS
breaker, and twisted pair conductors
are utilized for interconnection. For
this reason, zone selective interlocking
must be specified.
Ground fault and short delay pickup on
Digitrip Trip Units may be specified with
zone selective interlocking. Since most
system faults start as arcing ground
faults, zone selective interlocking on
ground fault pickup only is usually
adequate. Zone selective interlocking on
short delay pickup may be utilized where
no ground fault protection is provided.
Zone selective interlocking may be
applied as a type of bus differential protection. It must be recognized, however,
that one must accept the minimum
pickup of the trip unit for sensitivity.
It must also be recognized that not all
systems may be equipped with zone
selective interlocking. Systems containing multiple sources, or where the
direction of power flow varies, require
special considerations, or may not be
suitable for this feature. Digitrip zone
interlocking has been tested with up
to three levels with up to 20 trip units
per level.

For faults which occur on the conductors
between the upstream and downstream
breakers it is ideally desirable for the
upstream breaker to trip with no time
delay. This is the feature provided by
zone selective interlocking. Digitrip
trip units may be specified to utilize
this option.

40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0595

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers — DSII

Index

21.2-11

Application Data

Resistance Welding
The application of Eaton’s CutlerHammer DSII circuit breakers to
resistance welding circuits is shown in
Figure 21.2-9 of the Sensor Selection
Guide. Sensor ratings only are given;
the breaker frame must be selected as
required for interrupting ratings.

Sensor Rating,
Amperes
15000

40

00

32

10000

00

24

The DSII Digitrip microprocessor-based
true rms sensing devices have a thermal
memory and are well suited for this
service. The thermal memory functions
to prevent exceeding the breaker and
cable maximum permissible thermal
energy level. The circuit also replicates
time dissipation of thermal energy.

00
00

20
16

During-Weld Amperes (rms)

5000

00

12

00

80

0

The size of the thermal memory is
30 T (In / In)2 unit Amperes2 seconds. It
fills at a rate of (iw / In)2 unit Amperes2
seconds/second, trips at 30T seconds,
and empties at the rate of (In / In)2 unit
Amperes2 seconds/second, where

60

0

2000

40

0

30

24
25
26
27

iw = rms value of the welding
current in amperes

28

In = Rating plug current value
in amperes

29

The memory is filled during the weld
and empties during the non-welding
period of the duty cycle.

30

10

0

100
4

23

0
0

3

22

T = Long Time Delay Setting in
seconds (range is 2 – 24 seconds)

15

200

21

0

20

500

20

5 6 7 8 9 10
20
Percent Duty Cycle

30

40 50 60

Figure 21.2-9. Type DSII Breaker Sensor Selection Guide for Resistance Welding Applications

These welding applications are based
on long delay and instantaneous trip
devices with the following settings.
The long time delay setting is based
on the weld amperes and duty cycle.
Instantaneous trip setting is two times
the average weld amperes (weld
amperes times percent duty cycle)
or higher.

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.2-12 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0596

This page intentionally left blank.

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0597

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

21.3-1

General Description

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Contents
General Description
Circuit Breaker Components and Functions . . . . .
Cutler-Hammer Family
Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Application Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
World Standard Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Current Trip Curve Characteristics . . . . . . . .
Selection Data
Frame Reference Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupting, Ampere and Voltage Ratings . . . . . .
QUICKLAGT Circuit Breaker Selection Data . . . . .
QUICKLAG Circuit Breaker
Catalog Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solenoid Operated,
Remote-Controlled Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Breaker/Frame
Catalog Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Breaker Selection Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker
Selection Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRI-PAC (Fused) Circuit Breaker
Selection Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.3-2
21.3-3
21.3-3
21.3-3
21.3-4
21.3-5
21.3-5
21.3-6
21.3-7
21.3-7
21.3-12
21.3-14
21.3-15
21.3-19
21.3-20
21.3-30
21.3-31

Earth Leakage Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protector Selection Data . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Trip Unit Selection Data . . . . . . . . . . . .
Molded Case Circuit Breaker Accessories . . . . . . .
Application Information
Voltage, Frequency, Continuous Amperes . . . . . .
Cable Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Breaker Sizing Considerations . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Branch Circuits/Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacitor Protection/Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transformer Protection/Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unusual Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Breaker Temperatures, Ambient . . . . . . . .
Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welding Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mining Service Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Generator Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Molded Case Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
400 – 415 Hz Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100% Rated Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series Rated Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series Combination Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panelboard Replacement Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.3-33
21.3-34
21.3-44
21.3-45

30
31
32

21.3-50
21.3-50
21.3-51
21.3-52
21.3-53
21.3-54
21.3-56
21.3-56
21.3-56
21.3-57
21.3-57
21.3-57
21.3-57
21.3-59
21.3-60
21.3-62
21.3-65
21.3-68
21.3-83

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-2 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
General Description

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

General Circuit Breaker Information
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer molded case
circuit breakers are designed to provide circuit protection for low voltage
distribution systems. They are
described by NEMA as, “. . . a device
for closing and interrupting a circuit
between separable contacts under both
normal and abnormal conditions,” and
furthermore as, “. . . a breaker assembled as an integral unit in a supporting
and enclosing housing of insulating
material.” The NEC describes them as,
“A device designed to open and close
a circuit by non-automatic means, and
to open the circuit automatically on a
predetermined overload of current,
without injury to itself when properly
applied within its rating.”
So designed, Cutler-Hammer circuit
breakers protect conductors against
overloads and conductors and connected apparatus, such as motors and
motor starters, against short circuits.

Circuit Breaker Components
and Functions
Being essentially a high interrupting
capacity switch with repetitive elements,
Cutler-Hammer circuit breakers are comprised of three main functional components. These are: trip elements, operating mechanism and arc extinguishers.

Trip Elements
The function of the trip element is to trip
the operating mechanism in the event
of a prolonged overload or short circuit
current. To accomplish this, a thermalmagnetic trip action is provided.

Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Thermal trip action is achieved through
the use of a bimetal heated by the load
current. On a sustained overload, the
bimetal will deflect, causing the operating mechanism to trip. Because bimetals
are responsive to the heat emitted by
the current flow, they allow a long time
delay on light overloads, yet they have
a fast response on heavier overloads.
Magnetic trip action is achieved through
the use of an electromagnet in series
with the load current. This provides an
instantaneous tripping action when the
current reaches a predetermined value.
Front adjustable magnetic trip elements
are supplied as standard on 250 ampere
frame circuit breakers and above (except
100 and 150 ampere magnetic only
breakers), all other thermal-magnetic
breakers have non-adjustable magnetic
trip elements.

Electronic rms Trip Breakers
Both the overload trip action and the
short circuit trip action of breakers with
Digitrip electronic trip units are achieved
by the use of current transformers and
solid-state circuitry that monitors the
current and initiates tripping through
a flux shunt trip when an overload or
short circuit is present. All multiple
pole circuit breakers have trip elements
in each pole and a common trip bar.
An abnormal circuit condition in any
one pole will cause all poles to open
simultaneously.

■
■
■

39

■
■
■

40

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0598

Trip unit adjustments are made by
setting switches on the front of the trip
unit or by programming the trip unit
electronically.
All electronic rms trip breakers are
equipped with a manual push-to-trip
mechanism.

Operating Mechanism
The function of the operating mechanism is to provide a means of opening
and closing the breaker contacts. All
mechanisms are of the quick-make,
quick-break type and are “trip free.”
“Trip free” mechanisms are designed
so that the contacts cannot be held
closed against an abnormal circuit
condition and are sometimes referred
to as an “overcenter toggle mechanism.”
In addition to indicating whether the
breaker is “on” or “off,” the operating
mechanism handle indicates when the
breaker is “tripped” by moving to a
position midway between the extremes.
This distinct trip point is particularly
advantageous where breakers are
grouped, as in panelboard applications,
because it clearly indicates the faulty
circuit. The operating mechanism contains a positive on feature. In the normal
switching operation, the handle of the
circuit breaker shall not be capable of
being left readily at or near the off position
when the main contacts are closed.

Arc Extinguishers
The function of the DE-ION arc
extinguisher is to confine, divide
and extinguish the arc drawn between
opening breaker contacts. It consists of
specially shaped steel grids isolated
from each other and supported by an
insulating housing. When the contacts
are opened, the arc drawn induces a
magnetic field in the grids, which in
turn draws the arc from the contacts
and into the grids. The arc is thus split
into a series of smaller arcs and the
heat generated is quickly dissipated
through the metal. These two actions
result in a rapid removal of ions from
the arc, which hastens dielectric buildup between the contacts and results in
rapid extinction of the arc.

Electronic rms trip breakers can
include trip features such as:
■

38

Home

■
■

Adjustable long-time pickup.
Adjustable short-time pickup.
Adjustable long delay time.
Adjustable short delay time.
Adjustable instantaneous pickup.
Adjustable ground fault pickup.
Adjustable ground fault delay time.
Zone selective interlocking.
Communications.

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0599

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

Cutler-Hammer Family Molded
Case Circuit Breakers
In low voltage distribution systems, there
are many varied applications of molded
case circuit breakers. Eaton offers the
most comprehensive family of molded
case circuit breakers in the industry.
This family of circuit breakers includes:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

Thermal-magnetic trip breakers.
Electronic rms trip breakers.
Molded case switches.
Motor circuit protectors.
Earth leakage breakers.
Current limiting breakers.
Special application breakers.
World breakers.

Interrupting Ratings
Molded case circuit breakers are available in various interrupting capacities.
Standard interrupting capacity breakers
are available in both industrial and
replacement circuit breaker lines.
These breakers have interrupting
capacities up to 35 kA at 480 Vac.
High interrupting capacity breakers are
similar to standard interrupting capacity
breakers, but the improved performance
makes these breakers suited for use in
today’s network systems where higher
fault currents exist. These breakers have
interrupting capacities up to 65 kA at
480 Vac.
For applications that call for very high
interrupting ratings, current limiting
high interrupting capacity breakers are
available. These breakers offer true
current limiting characteristics in the
same physical frame size as the high
interrupting capacity version and have
interrupting capacities of 100 kA at
480 Vac.

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

21.3-3

General Description

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Breaker

Motor Circuit Protectors

Cutler-Hammer thermal-magnetic
breakers are general purpose devices
suitable for the majority of breaker
applications and are considered the
industry standard. Available from
15 through 800 amperes, thermalmagnetic breakers provide accurate
reliable overload and short circuit
protection for conductors and
connected apparatus.

Application flexibility of Cutler-Hammer
motor circuit protectors (Type GMCP/
HMCP/HMCPE) is enhanced by the
higher interrupting ratings and current
limiting characteristics designed into
the line. These devices are available
from 3 – 600 amperes in 63, 100, 150,
250, 400 and 600 A frame sizes.

Electronic Trip Breakers
Cutler-Hammer electronic trip breakers are generally applied for applications where high levels of system
coordination are called for. Available
from 70 through 2500 amperes, today’s
electronic trip breakers can provide
superior protection and coordination
as well as system alarms and diagnostics, monitoring and communications.

Molded Case Switches
Cutler-Hammer molded case switches
are UL 1087 devices that have no
thermal protection but do have a self
protecting high magnetic trip setting.
Molded case switches are applied
when a compact high capacity disconnect device is called for. Accessories
that can be installed in molded case
circuit breakers are also available for
molded case switches. The most common application for a molded case
switch would be as a main disconnect
for a panelboard or a loadcenter. Available from 100 through 2500 amperes,
molded case switches provide a compact disconnect device along with the
added benefits of a molded case circuit
breaker without the thermal protection.

The motor circuit protectors are
designed for application in individual
motor circuits in combination motor
starter units. Motor circuit protectors
operate on the magnetic principle with
a current sensing element in each pole
to provide short circuit protection.
The motor circuit protector design
permits the most effective protection
possible against low-level faults while
offering circuit breaker convenience,
quick-make quick-break action,
deadfront safety, and prevention
of single phasing.

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers
Cutler-Hammer Earth Leakage Breakers
offer Class 1 ground fault protection and
improved ground fault coordination
capability. A Class 1 device can open at
high levels of fault current, while a Class
2 device prevents opening beyond the
contact rating of its interrupting device.
Earth Leakage Breakers are factory
supplied with a single sensor and
ground fault relay built-in. The ground
fault pickup setting is adjustable from
0.03 to 30 amperes in eight steps, and
the ground fault time delay setting
is adjustable from instantaneous to
2.0 seconds.

28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-4 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
General Description

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0600

Current Limiting Circuit Breakers

Current Limit-R Breakers

TRI-PAC Breakers

Eaton offers one of the most complete
lines of both fusible and non-fused
current limiting breakers in the industry.
The industrial breakers are available in
current limiting versions with interrupting capacities up to 100 kA at 480 V
without fuses in the same physical size
as standard and high interrupting
capacity breakers. Eaton also manufactures both fused and non-fused current limiting devices with interrupting
capacities up to 200 kA at 600 Vac.

The Current Limit-R molded case
circuit breaker was developed with
interrupting ratings up to 200,000
amperes at 480 Vac to provide
complete system protection against
faults, including:

The current limiting breakers utilize a
reverse loop stationary contact. When
current is flowing through the contacts
of these breakers, the positions of the
reverse loop and moving contact arm
induce opposing magnetic fields. The
resulting flux lines cause rapid contact
blow-apart under these conditions,
resulting in very high interrupting
capacities and provide current
limiting characteristics.

3. High-level short circuits, by using
ultra high-speed, blow-apart,
current limiting contacts.

The increase in demand for electrical
power in modern commercial and
industrial buildings has resulted in
electrical services becoming substantially larger. In some low voltage distribution systems, available short circuit
currents can exceed 100,000 symmetrical
rms amperes. Fault currents of this
intensity may exceed the interrupting
ratings of molded case breakers. As a
result, larger expensive circuit interrupting devices which could withstand
the thermal and magnetic stresses
associated with currents of this value
have had to be used. High interrupting
capacity current limiting devices have
been developed which will restrict short
circuit current. If applied correctly, they
may be used in conjunction with the
molded case circuit breakers to provide
adequate and economical protection.

Current limiting breakers are available
from 15 through 2500 amperes and have
an interrupting rating of 100 kA at 480 V.
These breakers are most commonly
applied when very high (up to 100 kA)
fault levels are available and in series
rating applications where the current
limiting capability of these breakers are
used upstream in series combinations.
Circuit breakers 600 amperes and
below which are current limiting have
frame catalog numbers which end with
the letter “C.” For example, the F-frame
model which is current limiting has a
catalog number FDC. In accordance with
UL circuit breaker marking requirements, the nameplate on the breaker
is also labeled “current limiting.”

1. Overloads, by using inverse time
current tripping characteristics.
2. Low-level short circuits, by using
instantaneous and/or short-time
delay tripping characteristics.

Current Limit-R
 circuit breakers can
be used in series with Cutler-Hammer
standard molded case circuit breakers
with listed interrupting ratings as low
as 10,000 amperes in systems capable
of delivering fault currents as high
as 200,000 amperes. The excellent
current limiting properties of the
Current Limit-R breakers completely
protect all Cutler-Hammer downstream
series circuit breakers applied within
their voltage ratings.
The high level current-limiting action
is achieved by the use of special
design, blow-apart contacts. The opening speed of the contacts is amplified
by the repulsion force in the patented
slot motor to effectively separate the
contacts under high level fault conditions in less than one millisecond. The
rapid rise of arc voltage introduces
impedance into the system, thus limiting the amount of the otherwise available fault current.
The Current Limit-R current limiting
circuit breakers incorporate all the
advantages and features of conventional
molded case circuit breakers. They are
available in 2- and 3-pole versions in
two physical frame sizes and three
continuous current frame ratings.

The Type FCL has a maximum continuous
current frame rating of 100 amperes. It
is equipped with a conventional, noninterchangeable, thermal-magnetic-type
trip unit with individual ampere ratings.
The Type LCL is available with frames
having maximum continuous current
ratings of either 250 or 400 amperes.
Overload and low level short circuit protection is provided by a SELTRONIC
electronic trip unit which uses the individual rating plug concept for determining the continuous rating of the breaker.
Rating plugs are available with either
fixed or adjustable ampere ratings.

The TRI-PAC
 breaker was developed
for this application and so named
because it affords TRIple-PACkage protection with (1) time delay thermal trip,
(2) instantaneous magnetic trip and (3)
current limiting protection, combined
and coordinated in a compact and
economical device. These protective
actions are so coordinated that overcurrents and low magnitude faults are
cleared by the thermal action; normal
short circuits are cleared by the magnetic
action; and abnormal short circuits,
above an established value, are cleared
by the current limiting device. Thus,
unless a severe short circuit occurs,
the current limiter is unaffected and
its replacement is held to a minimum.
TRI-PAC breakers are available in ratings
from 15 through 1600 amperes and
have a UL listed interrupting capacity
of 200,000 amperes at up to 600 Vac
and also have an interrupting capacity
of 100,000 amperes at up to 250 Vdc.
The TRI-PAC breaker offers all of the
advantages of the economical molded
case breaker and the current limiter
is retained, while the disadvantages
of separately mounted devices
are eliminated.

40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0601

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

Special Application Breakers
Eaton offers a wide range of special
application molded case circuit breakers.
Special application breakers are breakers built with special features to meet
the unique requirements of the special
application as follows. See the application data section for further information.

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
General Description
Eaton offers 125 Vac AFCI single-pole,
15 and 20 ampere breakers, plug-in
and bolt-on, to meet Article 210-12
of the 2002 NEC.

Lighting and Industrial Breakers

Breakers are available for use with
ungrounded applications where all
three poles are connected in series.
Rated for up to 600 Vdc, breakers are
available from 15 – 2500 ampere trip
ranges with thermal magnetic trip
units or special low magnetic only
trip devices. Their compact size and
increased interrupting performance
give Eaton the most complete range
of dc breakers in the industry.

Recognizing the growing need for high
interrupting requirements on 240V
applications such as loadcenters,
metercenters, metering switchboards,
distribution switchboards and panelboards, etc., the Cutler-Hammer family
of lighting and industrial circuit breakers
is designed to meet all applications.
The Cutler-Hammer family of QUICKLAG
miniature circuit breakers is available in
bolt-on, plug-in and cable-in cable-out
configurations. For molded case circuit
breakers, Eaton offers the GB/GC
design up through 100 amperes and
the ED/EDH/EDC design up through 225
amperes up to 200 kA at 240 volts.

Mining Breakers

HACR Listed Circuit Breakers

DC Rated Breakers

Cutler-Hammer Mining Circuit Breakers have a tradition of proven dependability and reliability in harsh mine
environments, consistently combining
strength and reliability with safe,
efficient operation. The E2G mining
breaker is available in 225 and 400
ampere frames and is designed for
trailing cable applications per MSHA
30 CFR 75. With interrupting ratings
of 14 kA at 1000/577 Vac and rms sensing electronic trip unit, the E2G mining
breaker can be applied to all mining
circuit breaker applications.

Navy/Marine Circuit Breakers
Molded Case Navy Circuit Breakers
provide both overload protection for
conductors and short circuit protection
for all circuit elements such as conductors, motors and starters. They also serve
as manual disconnecting means as well
as circuit protectors. All Cutler-Hammer
Navy breakers meet applicable Navy/
Marine specifications for “hi-shock”
and “vibration” requirements.
These manually operated breakers
are rated from 5 to1600 amperes
with interrupting ratings from 1500
to 100,000 amperes.

AFCI Circuit Breakers
An arc-fault circuit interrupter is a
device intended to provide protection
from the effects of arc faults by recognizing characteristics unique to arcing
and by functioning to de-energize the
circuit when an arc fault is detected.

21.3-5

HACR listed circuit breakers are circuit
breakers that have been tested per UL
for use in heating, air conditioning and
refrigeration applications. HACR type
circuit breakers are typically applied as
the protection device for multimotor or
combination loads in a group installation configuration. Eaton has its family
of QUICKLAG QC miniature breakers
and Series C
 molded case breaker
frames G, F, J and K listed for HACR
applications.

Engine Generator Circuit Breakers
Engine generator circuit breakers are
designed specifically for application
on diesel engine powered standby
generator systems. Generator breakers
are equipped with a special trip unit that
provides standard overload protection
with low magnetic short circuit protection to suit generator applications that
call for close short circuit protection at
low interrupting ratings.

Eaton offers a family of engine generator
circuit breakers in six frames from 15
to 1200 amperes that conform to UL,
CSA and IEC standards.

100% Rated Circuit Breakers
100% rated circuit breakers are tested
inside a minimum size enclosure to
UL 489 for application at 100% of the
breakers continuous current rating.
100% rated circuit breakers are equipped
with electronic trip units and applied
with 90ºC cable rated at 75ºC ampacity.
To apply 100% rated breakers in
switchboards and panelboards, additional tests are required to meet UL 67
and UL 891. Cutler-Hammer molded

case circuit breaker frames K-, L-, Nand R-, 70 through 2000 amperes can
be applied at 100% of their rated continuous current as long as the breaker
is installed in its minimum size enclosure including ventilation. 100% rated
breakers are applied to distribution system to provide installation cost savings.
The amount of savings that can be
realized is dependent on the application.

Series Rating Circuit Breakers
Series rating is a short circuit interrupting rating assigned to a combi-nation of
two or more overcurrent devices connected in series. The short circuit interrupting rating of the upstream device
must be equal to or greater than the
available fault current. Downstream
breakers, however, are not fully rated
for the system’s available fault current.
Series combinations must be tested to
UL 489. Series ratings are applied to
distribution systems where short circuit
coordination is not required. The CutlerHammer listing of available series
rating combinations are shown in the
applications section of this document.

World Standard Circuit Breakers
(IEC 947-2)
Molded case circuit breakers meet all
major electrical standards of the
world. There are two branches of the
family tree. One meets applicable UL,
NEMA, CSA and IEC standards and
employs a fixed thermal and fixed or
adjustable magnetic trip. The second
meets IEC 947-2 and has been assigned
ultimate and service interrupting ratings, and employs adjustable thermal
and adjustable magnetic trips. The
frame ratings of both types of breakers
are physically interchangeable with
each other. Eaton is the first manufacturer in the industry to have a true
family of world circuit breakers.

Standards
Canadian Standards Association
Standard C22.2 No. 5, Service
Entrance and Branch Circuit Breakers.
■ National Electrical Manufacturers
Association Standards Publication
Number AB1, Molded Case
Circuit Breakers.
■ Underwriters Laboratories
Standard UL 489, Molded Case
Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker
Enclosures, including Marine
Circuit Breakers File E7819.
■ Underwriters Laboratories
Standard UL 1087, Molded
Case Switches.
■

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-6 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

General Description

20

Time-Current Trip Curve
Characteristics

Because of this allowed spread, users
should not specify exact tripping times.

21

Time-current trip curve characteristics
are available in the Molded Case Circuit
Breaker CD-ROM (available on request)
and on the Eaton Web site.

The upper left portions of these curves
show the inverse time delay tripping
of the breakers due to thermal action.
The lower right segments for these
curves portray the magnetic tripping
action of the breakers. In the case of
the front adjustable thermal-magnetic
breakers, the magnetic tripping
elements may be adjusted to trip at
values within a specific current range.
This adjustment is shown their respective characteristic tripping curves.
When these breakers leave the factory,
their magnetic trip elements are set at
the high side of their tripping range.
Adjustment downward may be made to
fit the requirements of the installation.
Currents equal to or greater than these

22
23
24
25
26
27

The band curves shown for each
breaker type represent current tripping
limits for the breaker and are within
limits established by Underwriters
Laboratories. For a given current, at
rated ambient, a breaker will clear the
circuit automatically at some total time
within the two extreme values defined
by “maximum” and “minimum” curves.
For example, a 1-pole, 15-ampere
QUICKLAG would trip in no less than
10 seconds and in no more than 150
seconds on a 30-ampere current.

10000

10000

5000

5000

1000

1000

500

500

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0602

magnetic settings will cause instant
tripping. Curves can be family curves
and are suitable for most applications;
for more accurate applications, a detailed
curve of the particular type and ampere
rating of the breaker should be requested.
The total time taken by a breaker to
clear a fault consists of the mechanical
operating time plus the time of actual
current interruption. Characteristic
time/current curves show total clearing
times. Magnetic only breakers have
no time delay in tripping. The tripping
characteristics of these breakers are
similar to the right-hand portion of
the standard breakers, except with
the vertical lines extended to the top
of the curve.

AMPERE RATING
A
OR
LONG TIME PICK-UP

28
29

TYPICAL TIME-CURRENT CURVE
TA
A
F LT
FAUL

UNIT WITH ADJUSTABLE
T

MAXIMUM

30
31
32
33
34

LONG TIME
PORTION

100
T
I
M
E

LONG TIME DELAY
A

100
T
I
M
E

50

50

T
I
M
E

MINIMUM
I
N

I
N
10

S
E
C
O
N
D
S

I
N

10
S
E
C
O
N
D
S

5

5
SHORT TIME
PICK-UP

1

1

.5

.5

I2t RAMP
SHORT TIME
DELAY
A

.1

37

4
3

GROUND F
FAUL
LT
PICK-UP

2
2

I t RAMP

1
.8
.6

GROUND FAUL
F LT
TIME DELAY
A

.4
.3
.2
.1
.08
.06
.04
.03
.2 .3 .4

35
36

S
E
C
O
N
D
S

10
8
6

FRAME OR SENSOR RATING
A

.1

.05

.6 .8 1
2 3 4 6 8
A LT PICK-UP
AUL

INSTANT
T TANEOUS
PICK-UP

.05
INSTANTANEOUS
PORTION

.01

.01

.5

1
5
10
50 100
500 1000
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF CIRCUIT BREAKER RATING

.5

1

5
10
50
100
500 1000
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES
L
OF RA
ATING PLUG OR CURRENT SENSOR

5000 10000

38
39
40

Non-Adjustable Thermal-Magnetic
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Solid-State Trip Unit with Adjustable
Phase and Ground Current Settings

Figure 21.3-1. Typical Time-Current Curves

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0603

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

21.3-7

Circuit Breaker Selection Guide and Interrupting Ratings

Table 21.3-1. Circuit Breaker Frame Reference Guide
Frame

Nominal Size
Amperes

Q or B

20

Circuit Breaker
Types

5 – 125

HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW, QPGF, QPHGF, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP, BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW, QBGF, QBHGF, QBGFEP,
QBHGFEP, QC, QCD, QCF, QCR, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW, QCGF, QCHGF, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP

21
22

G
E
EG
F

15 – 100
100 – 225
15 – 125
15 – 150

GHB, HGHB, GHBS, GHC, HGHC, GD
ED, EDH, EDC, EHD (100 ampere)
EGB, EGE, EGS, EGH
FDB, FD, HFD, FDC

JG
J
K
L
LG

63 – 250
70 – 250
70 – 400
300 – 600
100 – 600

JGE, JGS, JGH
JDB, JD, HJD, JDC
KDB, KD, CKD, HKD, CHKD, KDC
LDB, LD, CLD, HLD, CHLD, LDC, CLDC
LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC

23

M
N
R

400 – 800
600 – 1200
800 – 2500

MDLB, MDL, CMDL, HMDLB, HMDL, CHMDL
ND, CND, HND, CHND, NDC, CNDC
RD, CRD, RDC, CRDC

24

Table 21.3-2. Industrial Circuit Breakers
Circuit Continuous
Breaker Ampere
Type
Rating at
40°C

No.
of
Poles

Volts
ac

dc

Type Federal
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
of
Specification ac Ratings Volts
dc 
Trip 
 W-C-375b
120
120/240 240
277
480
600
125

25
250

125/250

—
—
—
—
—
—

—
14,000
—
14,000
—
—

—
—

—
—

26

G-Frame
GHB
GHB
GHB
GHB
HGHB
GQ

15 – 100
15 – 100
15 – 100
15 – 100
15 – 30
15 – 20

1
2, 3
1
2, 3
1
1

120
240
277
277/480
277
277

125
N.I.T.
125/250
125
125/250
125
—

11a
65,000
10b, 11b,
—
12b, 14b,
—
15b
—
12c, 13a, 13b 65,000
65,000

GHBS
GBHS

15 – 30
15 – 20

1, 2
1, 2

277/480
347/600

—
—

—
—

65,000 65,000
—
—

GD
GD

15 – 50
15 – 100

2
3

480
480

125/250 N.I.T.
250
N.I.T.

13b
13b

—
—

—
—

GHC
GHC
GHC
GHC
HGHC

15 – 100
15 – 100
15 – 100
15 – 100
15 – 30

1
2, 3
1
2, 3
1

120
240
277
277/480
277

125
N.I.T.
125/250
125
125/250
125

12c, 13a
13b
12c, 13a
13b

65,000
—
—
—
65,000

—
—
—
—
—

EGB

15 – 125

1
277
2, 3, 4 480

250

—
—

35,000 —
—
—

EGE

15 – 125

2, 3, 4 600Y/347 250

N.I.T.

—

—

EGS

15 – 125

1
347
250
2, 3, 4 600Y/347

N.I.T.
N.I.T.

—
—

100,000 —
—
—

85,000 35,000
85,000 —

—
—
35,000 —
—
35,000 22,000 —
35,000 —

EGH

15 – 125

1
347
250
2, 3, 4 600Y/347

N.I.T.

—
—

200,000 —
—
—

100,000 65,000
100,000 —

—
—
42,000 —
—
65,000 25,000 —
42,000 —

100 – 225
100 – 225
100 – 225
100 – 225
100 – 225

2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3

240
240
240
240
240

125
125
125
125
125

N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
—
—

12b
12b
12b
14b
1

—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—

22,000
42,000
65,000
100,000
200,000

—
—
—
—
—

EHD
EHD

15 – 100
15 – 100

1
2, 3

277
480

125
250

N.I.T.

13a
13b

—
—

—
—

—
14,000
18,000 —

FDB
FDB

15 – 150
15 – 150

2, 3
4

600
600

250
250

N.I.T.

18a

—
—

—
—

18,000 —
18,000 —

FD
FD
FD

15 – 225
15 – 225
15 – 225

1
2, 3
4

277
600
600

125
250
250

N.I.T.

13a
22a

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
35,000
65,000 —
65,000 —

—
—
10,000 —
—
35,000 18,000 —
10,000 —
35,000 18,000 —
10,000 —

37

HFD
HFD
HFD

15 – 225
15 – 225
15 – 225

1
2,3
4

277
600
600

125
250
250

N.I.T.

13a
22a

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
65,000
100,000 —
100,000 —

—
—
10,000 —
—
65,000 25,000 —
22,000 —
65,000 25,000 —
22,000 —

38

FDC 
FDC 

15 – 225
15 – 225

2, 3
4

600
600

250
250

N.I.T.

24a

—
—

—
—

200,000 —
200,000 —

100,000 35,000 —
100,000 35,000 —

—
N.I.T.

—
—
—
—
—
—

—
65,000
—
—
—
—

—
—
14,000
14,000
25,000
14,000

—
—
—
14,000
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—

14,000
—

—
—

—
—
10,000 —

65,000 —
65,000 —
—
65,000
—
—
—

—
—
14,000
14,000
25,000

14,000 —
22,000 —
—
—
—
14,000
—

—
—
—
—
—

14,000
—
14,000
—
14,000
—

—
—

—
10,000
10,000 —

14,000
—
14,000
—
14,000

—
—
—
—
—

—
14,000
—
14,000
—

EG Frame 
N.I.T.

—

25,000 18,000
25,000 —
35,000 —

—
—
18,000 —

10,000 —
—
—
10,000 —

25,000 18,000 10,000 10,000 —

27
28
29
30
31
32
33

F-Frame
EDB
EDS
ED
EDH
EDC 















N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit.
Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.
Not presently available for panelboard or switchboard mounting.
Current limiting.
Not defined in W-C-375b.

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—

—
—
14,000 —

10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000

—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—

34
35

10,000 —
—
—
10,000 —

14,000 14,000 —
14,000 14,000 —

10,000 —
10,000 —

36

22,000 —
22,000 —

39
40

21.3-8 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Circuit Breaker Selection Guide and Interrupting Ratings

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0604

Table 21.3-2. Industrial Circuit Breakers (Continued)

20
21
22

Circuit
Breaker
Type

Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C

No.
of
Poles

Volts
ac

dc

Federal
Type
Specification
of
Trip 
 W-C-375b

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
dc 

ac Ratings Volts
120 120/240

240

277 480

600

125 250

125/250

25,000
35,000
65,000

18,000
18,000
25,000

—
—
—

10,000 —
22,000 —
22,000 —

35,000
35,000
65,000
100,000

18,000
18,000
25,000
35,000

—
—
—
—

10,000
10,000
22,000
22,000

JG Frame 
JGE
JGS
JGH

63 – 250
63 – 250
63 – 250

2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.
2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.
2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

65,000 —
85,000 —
100,000 —

2, 3
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4

600
600
600
600

22a
22a
22a
22a

—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—

65,000
65,000
100,000
200,000

J-Frame

23
24
25
26
27

JDB
JD
HJD
JDC 

70 – 250
70 – 250
70 – 250
70 – 250

250
250
250
250

N.I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.

—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—

K-Frame
DK

250 – 400

2, 3

240 250 N.I.T.

14b

—

—

65,000

—

—

—

—

10,000 —

KDB
KD

100 – 400
100 – 400

2, 3
600 250 N.I.T.
2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.

23a
23a

—
—

—
—

65,000
65,000

—
—

35,000
35,000

25,000
25,000

—
—

10,000 —
10,000 —

CKD 

100 – 400

2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.

23a

—

—

65,000

—

35,000

25,000

—

10,000 —

HKD

100 – 400

2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.

23a

—

—

100,000 —

65,000

35,000

—

22,000 —

CHKD 

100 – 400

2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.

23a

—

—

100,000 —

65,000

35,000

—

22,000 —

KDC 

100 – 400

2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.

23a

—

—

200,000 —

100,000 50,000

—

22,000 —

23a
23a
23a
23a

—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—

65,000
85,000
100,000
200,000

—
—
—
—

35,000
50,000
65,000
100,000

18,000
25,000
35,000
50,000

—
—
—
—

22,000
22,000
42,000
42,000

65,000
65,000

—
—

35,000
35,000

25,000
25,000

—
—

22,000 —
22,000 —

35,000
65,000

25,000
35,000

—
—

22,000 —
25,000 —

L-Frame

28

LGE
LGS
LGH
LGC

100 – 600
100 – 600
100 – 600
100 – 600

3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4

29

LDB
LD

300 – 600
300 – 600

2, 3
600 250 N.I.T.
2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.

23a
23a

—
—

—
—

CLD 
HLD

300 – 600
300 – 600

2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.
2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.

23a
23a

—
—

—
—

65,000 —
100,000 —

CHLD 
LDC 

300 – 600
300 – 600

2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.
2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.

23a
23a

—
—

—
—

100,000 —
—

65,000 35,000
100,000 50,000

—
—

25,000 —
25,000 —

CLDC 

300 – 600

2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.

23a

—

—

200,000 —

100,000 50,000

—

25,000 —

300 – 800
300 – 800
300 – 800
300 – 800

2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3

600
600
600
600

250
250
250
250

I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.

23a
23a
23a
23a

—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—

65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000

—
—
—
—

50,000
50,000
65,000
65,000

25,000
25,000
35,000
35,000

—
—
—
—

22,000
22,000
25,000
25,000

—
—
—
—

600 – 1200
600 – 1200
600 – 1200
600 – 1200
600 – 1200
600 – 1200

3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4

600
600
600
600
600
600

—
—
—
—
—
—

N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.

23A
23A
23A
23A
23A
23A

—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—

65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
200,000
200,000

—
—
—
—
—
—

50,000
50,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000

25,000
25,000
35,000
35,000
50,000
50,000

—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—

800 – 1600
800 – 1600
1000 – 2000
1000 – 2500
1000 – 2000
800 – 1600
800 – 1600
1000 – 2000
1000 – 2500
1000 – 2000

3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4

600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.

24a
24a
24a
24a
24a
25a
25a
25a
25a
25a

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

125,000
125,000
125,000
200,000
125,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

30
31

600
600
600
600

250
250
250
250

I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.

—
—
—
—

M-Frame

32
33
34
35
36
37
38

MDL
CMDL 
HMDL
CHMDL 

N-Frame
ND
CND 
HND
CHND 
NDC
CNDC 

R-Frame
RD 1600
CRD 1600 
RD 2000
RD 2500
CRD 2000 
RDC 1600
CRDC 1600 
RDC 2000
RDC 2500
CRDC 2000 




39





50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit.
Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.
Not presently available for panelboard or switchboard mounting.
Current limiting.
100% rated.

40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0605

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

21.3-9

Circuit Breaker Selection Guide and Interrupting Ratings

Table 21.3-2. Industrial Circuit Breakers (Continued)
Circuit
Breaker
Type

Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C

No.
of
Poles

Federal
Type
Specification
of
Trip 
 W-C-375b

Volts
ac

dc

20

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
dc 

ac Ratings Volts
120 120/240

240

277 480

600

125 250

125/250

Current Limit-R Current Limiting Circuit Breakers — Non-Fused Type
FCL
LCL

15 – 100
125 – 400

2, 3
2, 3

480 —
600 —

N.I.T.
N.I.T.

—
—

—
—

—
—

200,000 —
200,000 —

150,000 —
—
200,000 100,000 —

—
—

—
—

N.I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.

16a, 16b, 17a, 26a
16a, 16b, 17a, 26a
16b, 17a, 26a
17a, 26a

—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—

200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000

200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000

—
—
—
—

100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000

TRI-PAC Current Limiting Circuit Breakers — Fused Type
FB
LA
NB
PB




15 – 100
70 – 400
300 – 800
600 – 1600

2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3

600
600
600
600

250
250
250
250

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit.
Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.

—
—
—
—

200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000

—
—
—
—

21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-10 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Circuit Breaker Selection Guide and Interrupting Ratings

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0606

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers 

Table 21.3-3. Plug-in, Bolt-on, Cable-in/Cable-out
Circuit
Breaker
Type
HQP
HQP
HQP
QPHW
QPHW
QPHW

Circuit
Breaker
Type Code
P

P

QHPX
QHPX
QHPX

P

QHPW
QHPW
QHPW

P

QPGF
QPGF
QPHGF
QPHGF
QPGFEP
QPGFEP
QPHGFEP
QPHGFEP
BAB
BAB
BAB

P, GF

BABR, BABRS
BABR, BABRS
QBHW
QBHW
QBHW

B
B
B

HBAX
HBAX
HBAX

B

HBAW
HBAW
HBAW

B





32

TOC



P, GF
P, GFEP
P, GFEP
B

Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C

Number
of Poles

Volts
ac

dc

Federal
Specification
W-C-375b

Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
ac Ratings Volts
120
120/240

240

dc 
24 – 48

62.5

80
—
5,000
—
—
5,000
—

10 – 70
10 – 125
10 – 100
15 – 70
15 – 125
15 – 100

1
2
2, 3
1
2
2, 3

120/240
120/240
240
120/240
120/240
240

24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
—
24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
—

10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 12a
10b, 11b, 12b
14a
14a
14b

—
—
—
—
—
—

10,000
10,000
—
22,000
22,000
—

—
—
10,000
—
—
22,000

5,000
5,000
—
5,000
5,000
—



15 – 70
15 – 100
15 – 100

1
2
3

120/240
120/240
240

24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

42,000
42,000
—

—
—
42,000

5,000
5,000
—



15 – 30
15 – 30
15 – 20

1
2
3

120/240
120/240
240

24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
—

15a
15a
15b

—
—
—

65,000
65,000
—

—
—
65,000

5,000
5,000
—



15 – 40
15 – 50
15 – 30
15 – 50
15 – 40
15 – 50
15 – 30
15 – 30
10 – 70
10 – 125
10 – 100

1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
2, 3

120
120/240
120
120/240
120
120/240
120
120/240
120/240
120/240
240

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
—

10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 11a, 12a
—
—
—
—
10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 12a
10b, 11b, 12b

10,000
—
22,000
—
10,000
—
22,000
22,000
—
—
—

—
10,000
—
22,000
—
10,000
—
22,000
10,000
10,000
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
10,000

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5,000
5,000
—

15 – 30
15 – 30
15 – 70
15 – 125
15 – 100

1
2
1
2
2, 3

120
120/240
120/240
120/240
240

—
—
24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
—

—
—
14a
14a
14b

—
—
—
—
—

10,000
10,000
22,000
22,000
—

—
—
—
—
22,000

—
—
5,000
5,000
—

15 – 70
15 – 100
15 – 100

1
2
3

120/240
120/240
240

24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
—.

—
—
—

—
—
—

42,000
42,000
—

—
—
42,000

5,000
5,000
—



15 – 30
15 – 30
15 – 20

1
2
3

120/240
120/240
240

24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
—

15a
15a
15b

—
—
—

65,000
65,000
—

—
—
65,000

5,000
5,000
—



5,000
—


5,000
—
5,000
—
5,000
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—


5,000
—
—
—


5,000
—
5,000
—
5,000
—

—
5,000
—
—
5,000
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5,000
—
—
—
—
5,000
—
—
5,000
—
—
5,000
—

QUICKLAG circuit breakers are suitable for application in relative humidity 0 – 95% noncondensing.
Two-pole dc interrupting ratings based on 2 poles connected in series.
62.5 Vac interrupting rating is 3800 AIC 10 – 50 amperes and 2500 AIC 55 – 100 amperes continuous.

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0607

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

21.3-11

Circuit Breaker Selection Guide and Interrupting Ratings

Table 21.3-3. Plug-in, Bolt-on, Cable-in/Cable-out (Continued)
Circuit
Breaker
Type

Circuit
Breaker
Type Code

Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C

Number
of
Poles

Volts
ac

dc

Federal
Specification
W-C-375b

120

120/240

240

24 – 48

62.5

80

QBGF
QBGF

B, GF

15 – 40
15 – 50

1
2

120
120/240

—
—

10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 11a, 12a

10,000
—

—
10,000

—
—

—
—

—
—

—
—

QBHGF
QBHGF

B, GF

15 – 30
15 – 30

1
2

120
120/240

—
—

10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 11a, 12a

22,000
—

—
22,000

—
—

—
—

—
—

—
—

QBGFEP
QBGFEP

B, GFEP

15 – 40
15 – 50

1
2

120
120/240

—
—

—
—

10,000
—

—
10,000

—
—

—
—

—
—

—
—

QBHGFEP
QBHGFEP

B, GFEP

15 – 30
15 – 30

1
2

120
120/240

—
—

—
—

22,000
22,000

—
22,000

—
—

—
—

—
—

—
—

QC
QC
QC

C

10 – 70
10 – 100
10 – 100

1
2
2, 3, 4

120/240
120/240
240

24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
—

10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 12a
10b, 11b, 12b

—
—
—

10,000
10,000
—

—
—
10,000

5,000
5,000
—



5,000
—

—
5,000
—

QCD
QCD
QCD

C

10 – 100
10 – 100
15 – 100

1
2
3

120
120/240
240

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

10,000
10,000
—

—
—
10,000

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

QCF
QCF
QCF
QCR
QCR
QCR

C

10 – 60
15 – 20
15 – 30
10 – 60
15 – 20
15 – 30

1, 2
1, 2
2, 3
1, 2
1, 2
2, 3

120/240
120/240
240
120/240
120/240
240

24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 62.5

—
—
—
—
—
—

10,000
22,000
—
10,000
22,000
—

10,000
—
10,000
10,000
—
10,000

—
—
—
—
—
—

3,000
3,000
3,000
3,000
3,000
3,000



—
—
—
—
—
—

QCHW
QCHW
QCHW

C

15 – 70
15 – 100
15 – 100

1
2
2, 3

120/240
120/240
240

24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
—

14a
14a
14b

—
—
—

22,000
22,000
—

—
—
22,000

5,000
5,000
—



QHCX
QHCX
QHCX

C

15 – 70
15 – 100
15 – 100

1
2
3

120/240
120/240
240

24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

42,000
42,000
—

—
—
42,000

5,000
5,000
—



QHCW
QHCW
QHCW

C

15 – 30
15 – 30
15 – 20

1
2
3

120/240
120/240
240

24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
—

15a
15a
15b

—
—
—

65,000
65,000
—

—
—
65,000

5,000
5,000
—



QCGF
QCGF

C, GF

15 – 40
15 – 50

1
2

120
120/240

—
—

—
—

10,000
—

—
10,000

—
—

QCHGF
QCHGF

C, GF

15 – 30
15 – 30

1
2

120
120/240

—
—

—
—

22,000
—

—
22,000

QCGFEP
QCGFEP

C, GFEP

15 – 40
15 – 50

1
2

120
120/240

—
—

—
—

10,000
—

QCHGFEP
QCHGFEP

C, GFEP

15 – 30
15 – 30

1
2

120
120/240

—
—

—
—

22,000
—





Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

Two-pole dc interrupting ratings based on 2 poles connected in series.
62.5 Vac interrupting rating is 3800 AIC 10 – 50 amperes and 2500 AIC 55 – 100 amperes continuous.

20

dc 


ac Ratings Volts

3,000
3,000
2,000
3,000
3,000
5,000
—

—
5,000
—

21
22
23
24
25
26
27

—
5,000
—

28

5,000
—

—
5,000
—

29

—
—

—
—

—
—

—
—

—
—

—
—

—
—

—
10,000

—
—

—
—

—
—

—
—

—
22,000

—
—

—
—

—
—

—
—

5,000
—

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-12 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

Selection Data — QUICKLAG Industrial Breakers

20

January 2005
Sheet 0608

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

21
22
HQP, QPHW, QHPX

23

QHPW

QPGF, QPHGF,
QPGFEP, QPHGFEP

BAB, QBHW, HBAX

HBAW

Table 21.3-4. QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

24

Type of Breaker Mounting/Electrical Connections
Plug-on

25

Bolt-on

Thermal-Magnetic
HQP, QPHW, QHPX

Thermal-Magnetic
QHPW

Thermal-Magnetic
QPGF, QPHGF, QPGFEP,
QPHGFEP

Thermal-Magnetic
BAB, QBHW, HBAX

Thermal-Magnetic
HBAW

Circuit Breaker Ratings — Continuous Current Rating at 40°C and 0 – 95% Humidity (Noncondensing)

26

Amperes

Poles Volts

HQP

27

5 – 70
10 – 150
10 – 100

Amperes

Poles Volts

QHPW
1
2
2-3

120/240
120/240
240

1
2
2-3

120/240
120/240
240

15 – 30
15 – 30

1
2
2-3

120/240
120/240
240

15 – 40
15 – 50

15 – 30
15 – 20

1-2
3

120/240
240

QPHW

28
29

15 – 70
15 – 125
15 – 100

32

15 – 40
15 – 50

Amperes

Poles Volts

BAB
1
2

120
120/240

5 – 70
10 – 150
10 – 100

1
2

120
120/240

15 – 70
15 – 125
15 – 100

1
2

120
120/240

15 – 30
15 – 30

1
2

120
120/240

W

H

D

1.00
(25.4)

3.19
2.38
(81.0) (60.3)

Amperes

Poles Volts

HBAW
1
2
2-3

120/240
120/240
240

1
2
2-3

120/240
120/240
240

15 – 70
15 – 100
15 – 100

1
2
3

120/240
120/240
240

W

H

D

1.00
(25.4)

2.94
2.38
(74.6) (60.3)

15 – 30
15 – 20

1-2
3

120/240
240

W

H

D

1.00
(25.4)

2.94
2.38
(74.6) (60.3)

QBHW

QPGFEP

30
31

Poles Volts

QPHGF

QHPX
15 – 70
15 – 100
15 – 100

Amperes
QPGF

HBAX

QPHGFEP

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Per Single-Pole Breaker
W

H

1.00
(25.4)

2.94
2.38
(74.6) (60.3)

D

W

H

1.00
(25.4)

2.94
2.38
(74.6) (60.3)

D

ac Interrupting Ratings — UL Listed Interrupting Ratings Shown (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

33

Volts

Amps I.R. Volts

HQP
120/240, 240

34

Amps I.R. Volts

QHPW
10,000

Amps I.R. Volts

QPGF, QPGFEP

120/240, 240

65,000

QPHW

120, 120/240

10,000

QPHGF, QPHGFEP

120/240, 240

22,000

120, 120/240

36
37
38
39

Amps I.R.

HBAW

120/240, 240

10,000

120/240, 240

65,000

QBHW
22,000

QHPX

35

Amps I.R. Volts

BAB

120/240, 240

22,000

HBAX

120/240, 240

42,000

120/240, 240

42,000

dc Interrupting Ratings 

Volts

Poles Amps I.R. Volts

Poles Amps I.R. Volts

Poles Amps I.R. Volts

Poles Amps I.R. Volts

Poles Amps I.R.

48
62.5
80

1-2
1
2

1-2
1
2

—
—
—

1-2
1
2

1-2
1
2

5,000
2,500
5,000

48
62.5
80

5,000
2,500
5,000

—
—
—

—
—
—

48
62.5
80

5,000
2,500
5,000

48
62.5
80

5,000
2,500
5,000

Accessories and Modifications — See MCCB CD-ROM for Description and UL Installation Status
Moisture-Fungus Treatment
Handle Lock Devices
Shunt Trip
Special Calibration
Shock Tested
Dummy Breaker
Optional Terminals



Moisture-Fungus Treatment
Handle Lock Devices
Shunt Trip
Special Calibration
Shock Tested
Dummy Breaker
Optional Terminals

Moisture-Fungus Treatment
Bell Alarm Contacts
Auxiliary Switch Contacts

Moisture-Fungus Treatment
Handle Lock Devices
Shunt Trip
Special Calibration
Shock Tested
Panelboard Accessories
Dummy Breaker
Optional Terminals

Moisture-Fungus Treatment
Handle Lock Devices
Shunt Trip
Special Calibration
Shock Tested
Panelboard Accessories
Optional Terminals

Two-pole interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL listed.

40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0609

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

21.3-13

Selection Data — QUICKLAG Industrial Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

20
21
22

QBGF, QBHGF,
QBGFEP, QBHGFEP

QCR,QCF

QC, QCHW, QHCX

QHCW

QCGF, QCHGF,
QCGFEP, QCHGFEP

23

Table 21.3-5. QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers
Type of Breaker Mounting/Electrical Connections
Bolt-on

Cable-in/Cable-out

Thermal-Magnetic
QBGF, QBHGF, QBGFEP,
QBHGFEP

Thermal-Magnetic
QCR, QCF

24
Thermal-Magnetic
QC, QCHW, QHCX

Thermal-Magnetic
QCD

Thermal-Magnetic
QCGF, QCHGF, QCGFEP,
QCHGFEP

25

Circuit Breaker Ratings — Continuous Current Rating at 40°C and 0 – 95% Humidity (Noncondensing)
Amperes

Poles Volts

QBGF
15 – 40
15 – 50
—

1
2
—

120
120/240
—

Amperes Poles Volts

Amperes

QCR, QCF

QC

10 – 60
10 – 60
15 – 30

1
2
2-3

120
120/240
240

QBHGF
15 – 30
15 – 30
—

1
2
—

120
120/240
—

15 – 70
15 – 100
15 – 100

1
2
—

120
120/240
—

15 – 70
15 – 100
15 – 100

Poles Volts

1
2
2-3

120/240
120/240
240

10 – 100
10 – 100

1
2

120
120/240

15 – 30
15 – 20

Amperes Poles Volts
QCGF

1-2
3

120/240
240

15 – 40
15 – 50
—

1
2
—

120
120/240
—

1
2
—

120
120/240
—

1
2
—

120
120/240
—

1
2

120
120/240

W

H

D

1.00
(25.4)

3.75 2.44
(95.3) (61.9)

1
2
2-3

120/240
120/240
240

15 – 30
15 – 50
—

1
2
2-3

120/240
120/240
240

15 – 30
15 – 50
—

1-2
3

120/240
240

15 – 50
15 – 30

W

H

D

1.00
(25.4)

3.75 2.44
(95.3) (61.9)

QCHGFEP

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Per Single-Pole Breaker
H

1.00
(25.4)

3.19 2.38
(81.0) (60.3)

D

W

H

.50
(12.7)

3.94 2.63
(74.6) (66.7)

D

W

H

1.00
(25.4)

3.75 2.63
(95.3) (66.7)

D

ac Interrupting Ratings — UL Listed Interrupting Ratings Shown (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts

Amps I.R. Volts

QBGF, QBGFEP
120, 120/240

Amps I.R. Volts

QCR, QCF
10,000

10,000

QBHGF, QBHGFEP
120, 120/240

Amps I.R. Volts

QC

120/240

Amps I.R. Volts

QCD

120/240, 240

10,000

120/240, 240

10,000

120/240

10,000

22,000

120/240, 240

120

22,000

32
33
34

65,000

dc Interrupting Ratings 

Volts

Poles Amps I.R. Volts

Poles Amps I.R. Volts

Poles Amps I.R. Volts

Poles Amps I.R. Volts

Poles Amps I.R.

—
—
—

—
—
—

1
2
—

1-2
1
2

1-2
1
2

—
—
—

48
62.5
80

31

35

120/240, 240

3,000
3,000
—

30

42,000

QHCW

62.5
125
—

29

QCHGF, QCHGFEP

120/240, 240
QHCX

—
—
—

28

Amps I.R.

QCGF, QCGFEP

QCHW
22,000

27

QCGFEP

QHCW

W

26

QCHGF

QHCX

QBHGFEP
15 – 30
15 – 30

Amperes
QCD

QCHW

QBGFEP
15 – 40
15 – 50
—

5 – 70
10 – 125
10 – 100

Poles Volts

5,000
2,500
5,000

48
62.5
80

5,000
2,500
5,000

—
—
—

—
—
—

36
37

Accessories and Modifications — See MCCB CD-ROM for Description and UL Installation Status
Moisture-Fungus Treatment
Handle Lock Devices
Bell Alarm Contacts
Auxiliary Switch Contacts
Ring Terminals




Moisture-Fungus Treatment
Handle Lock Devices
QCR Mounting Clips
Ring Terminals
Quick Connect
Terminals
Shunt Trip
Shock Tested
DIN Rail Mounting Clip

Moisture-Fungus Treatment
Handle Lock Devices
Shunt Trip
Special Calibration
Shock Tested
Face Mounting Plate
Base Mounting Hardware
Optional Terminals
Dummy Breaker
DIN Rail Mounting Clip

Moisture-Fungus Treatment
Handle Lock Devices
Shunt Trip
Special Calibration
Shock Tested
Face Mounting Plate
Base Mounting Hardware
Optional Terminals
Dummy Breaker
DIN Rail Mounting Clip

Two-pole dc interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL listed.

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

Moisture-Fungus Treatment
Handle Lock Devices
Bell Alarm Contacts
Auxiliary Switch Contacts
DIN Rail Mounting Clip

38
39
40

21.3-14 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

Selection Data — QUICKLAG Industrial Breakers

20

January 2005
Sheet 0610

Table 21.3-7. Factory Modifications 


QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breaker
Catalog Numbering System

Type of
Modification

Breaker
Types

Catalog
Suffix

Shunt Trip (Requires 1 extra
pole space on right side)
120, 208, 240 Vac
12, 24, 48 Vac/dc
Draws 2.6A at 120 V
Draws 11A at 24 Vdc

QUICKLAG Types P, B and C
QUICKLAG Types P, B and C

S
S1

Special Calibration (50°C)
Shock Testing
Freeze Testing

QUICKLAG Types P, B and C
QUICKLAG Types P, B and C
QUICKLAG Types P, B and C

V
L
Y

Moisture-Fungus Treatment

QUICKLAG Types P, B, C and
Ground Fault
QUICKLAG Types P, B, C
QUICKLAG Types P, B, C
QUICKLAG Types P, B, C
QUICKLAG Types P, B, C

F

Table 21.3-6. Catalog Numbering System — QUICKLAG

21

HQP 1 070 V

22
Breaker
Type

23
24
25

Poles

Amperes

Modification
Suffix

1 = 1-Pole
120/240 Vac
2 = 2-Poles
120/240 Vac
240 Vac
– use suffix H
3 = 3-Poles
240 Vac
– use suffix H

S
S1
V
L
Y
F
H

Marine Duty
Naval Duty
400 Hz Calibration
Specific dc Ratings (Breaker
marked with a Maximum
Vdc rating)



26

H08
H09
G
Q thru Q9

Contact the Eaton factory for modifications available for QCR and
QCF breakers.

Table 21.3-8. Factory Installed Breaker Terminals
Breaker
Type

Continuous Standard Line Terminal
Ampere
Term Wire
Wire
Rating
Type
Type
Range (AWG)

Term
Type

Wire
Type

Wire
Range (AWG)

Line

Load

QUICKLAG Type P
HQP, QPHW,
QHPX, QHPW

10 to 30
35 to 50
55 to 125

Plug-on female clips which mate
with the bus stabs

1
2
3

Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al

14 – 4
14 – 4
8 – 1/0

N/A

3
3
—

QUICKLAG Ground Fault
QPGF, QPHGF,
QPGFEP, QPHGFEP

10 to 30

Plug-on female clips which mate
with the bus stabs

1 (1-pole)
4 (2-pole)
4

Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu

14 – 4
14 – 8
14 – 8

N/A

3
3
—

10 to 30
35 to 50
55 to 125

Extended tangs which bolt
directly to the bus

1 (1- and 2-pole)
2 (3-pole)
3

Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al

14 – 4
14 – 4
8 – 1/0

N/A

30

QUICKLAG Type B
BAB, QBHW,
HBAX, HBAW

3
3
—

10 to 30

Extended tangs which bolt
directly to the bus

1 (1-pole)
4 (2-pole)
4

Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu

14 – 4
14 – 8
14 – 8

N/A

N/A

31

QUICKLAG Ground Fault
QBGF, QBHGF,
QBGFEP, QBHGFEP
QUICKLAG Type C
QC, QCHW,
QHCX, QHCW

10 to 20
25 to 60
70 to 100

5
6
7

Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al

14 – 10
14 – 10
14 – 10

5
2
3

Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al

14 – 10
14 – 4
8 – 1/0

6, 7
5, 7
5

6, 7, 8
5, 6, 7, 8
5, 7, 8

QUICKLAG
QCR, QCF

10 to 55
60

1
1

Cu/Al
Cu

14 – 4
14 – 4

1
1

Cu/Al
Cu

14 – 4
14 – 4

N/A

N/A

QUICKLAG Ground Fault
10 to 20
QCGF, QCHGF, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP 25 to 50

5
6

Cu/Al
Cu/Al

14 – 10
14 – 10

1
1

Cu/Al
Cu/Al

14 – 4
14 – 4

6, 7
5, 7

5
5

27
28
29

32
33
34

1

40

40

2

Standard Load Terminal

3

Optional Terminals

4

35
Steel Box Lug

36

5

6

37



38

Steel Ring Type


Steel Box Lug

Steel Box Lug

7

Aluminum Box Lug

Aluminum Box Lug

8

Aluminum Box Lug

4-Prong Quick Connect
Catalog Suffix P

Clamp on line side only.

39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0611

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

Types BABR and BABRS
Solenoid-Operated,
Remote-Controlled

21.3-15

Selection Data — Solenoid-Operated
Product Features
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

Bolt-on line-side terminal.
Cable connected load-side terminal.
3- or 4-wire (BABR) control terminal.
Status switch.
Bi-metal assembly for thermal
overload protection.
Fast acting short circuit protection.
Arc-runner and arc-chute assembly
for fast acting arc extinction.
Three-position handle: OFF, TRIP
(Center), ON.

Handle permits manual switching
when control power is lost.
■ Mechanical trip indicator.
■ 15 and 20 ampere breakers SWD
(switching duty) rated.
■ HID ratings for HID (high intensity
discharge) lighting.
■

Note: For use in lighting control applications, see Pow-R-Command Section 28.

Table 21.3-9. BABR and BABRS UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings and Catalog Numbers
Circuit
Breaker
Type

Number
of Poles

BABR1015, BABRS1015
BABR1020, BABRS1020
BABR1025, BABRS1025
BABR1030, BABRS1030
BABR2015, BABRS2015
BABR2020, BABRS2020
BABR2025, BABRS2025
BABR2030, BABRS2030



20
21
22
23
24

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)
Ampere
Rating 


Volts ac (50/60 Hz)
120

120/240

1
1
1
1

15
20
25
30

10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000

—
—
—
—

2
2
2
2

15
20
25
30

—
—
—
—

10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000

25
26
27
28

Continuous current rating at 40°C.

Table 21.3-10. BABR Wire Harness

BABR Breaker

Description
BABR and BABRS circuit breakers
are bolt-on branch circuit breakers
designed for use in panelboards and
are ideally suited for lighting control
or energy management applications.
In addition to providing conventional
branch circuit protection, they include a
unique solenoid-operated mechanism
that provides for efficient breaker
pulse-on and pulse-off operation when
used with a suitable controller like
the Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Pow-RCommand lighting control system.
BABR and BABRS breakers can also
be operated by pushbuttons, relays
or PLCs. A breaker status feature is
included on the BABRS version.

Description

Catalog
Number

This 60-inch (1219.2 mm) wire pigtail provides a connection from a single
BABR or BABRS control plug to a customer’s pushbutton, relay or PLC. Each box
contains 12 pigtails. Wires are 22 AWG, 600 V. Order in multiples of 12.

SLBKRPTL1

Same as SLBKRPTL1 except 72 inches (1828.8 mm) long and connects up to four
SLBKRPTL4
BABR or BABRS breakers on the same pigtail. Each box contains 4 pigtails. Order in
multiples of 4.
Same as SLBKRPTL4 except it connects up to six BABR or BABRS breakers on the
same pigtail. Each box contains 4 pigtails. Order in multiples of 4.

29
30
31

SLBKRPTL6

32
33
34
35
36
37

Note: The BABR breaker has monitoring
only of the status of the remote controlled
contact, while the BABRS has monitoring
only of the status of the breaker contacts.

38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-16 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Selection Data — Solenoid-Operated

20

Types GHBS and GBHS
Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled

22
23

1-Pole

2-Pole

Description
GHBS and GBHS circuit breakers are bolt-on branch
circuit breakers designed for use in panelboards and are
ideally suited for lighting control or energy management
applications. In addition to providing conventional branch
circuit protection, they include a unique solenoid-operated
mechanism that provides for efficient breaker pulse-on and
pulse-off operation when used with a suitable controller like
the Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Pow-R-Command lighting
control system.
Table 21.3-11. GHBS UL 489 Interrupting Ratings
Circuit
Breaker
Type 


Number
of Poles

GHBS1015D
GHBS1020D
GHBS1030D
GHBS2015D
GHBS2020D
GHBS2030D

32





Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)
Ampere
Rating 

Volts ac (50/60 Hz)
120

240

277/480

1
1
1

15
20
30

65,000
65,000
65,000

—
—
—

14,000
14,000
14,000

2
2
2

15
20
30

—
—
—

65,000
65,000
65,000

14,000
14,000
14,000

30
31

Sheet 0612

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)
Ampere
Rating 

Volts ac (50/60 Hz)

GBHS1015D
GBHS1020D

1
1

15
20

10,000
10,000

GBHS2015D
GBHS2020D

2
2

15
20

10,000
10,000

347/600

Continuous current rating at 40°C.

Table 21.3-13. Terminal Type

25

29

>>

Number
of Poles

Item

Circuit
Breaker
Amperes

Terminal
Type

Screw
Head
Type

Wire
Type

AWG
Wire
Range

GHBS
GBHS
GHBS

15 – 20
15 – 20
30

Clamp
Clamp
Box

Slotted
Slotted
Slotted

Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al

14 – 10
14 – 10
14 – 2

GBHS
BABRS

30
15 – 30

Box
Box

Slotted
Slotted

Cu/Al
Cu/Al

14 – 2
14 – 6

24

28

<<

January 2005

Circuit
Breaker
Type



27

Index

Table 21.3-12. GBHS CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings

21

26

TOC

Note: For load-side. Terminals are UL listed as suitable for wire type
and size given below.

Table 21.3-14. Dimensions Per Pole in Inches (mm)
Item

Width

Height

Depth

GHBS

1.00 (25.4)

4.12 (104.8)

2.81 (71.4)

GBHS

1.00 (25.4)

4.12 (104.8)

2.81 (71.4)

BABR
BABRS

1.00 (25.4)

4.08 (104.8)

2.91 (74.0)

All UL listed circuit breakers are HID (High Intensity Discharge) rated.
Continuous current rating at 40°C.

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0613

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

21.3-17

Selection Data — Solenoid-Operated

Types GHBS, GBHS, BABR and BABRS Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled

20
BABR

1-Pole Circuit Breaker

21

Remote Contact
Load

Line
Breaker Contact

Solenoid

RM
b

23

28V AC

24

Remote
Status

OFF
Coil

ON
Coil

Blue

1/2 Cycle
Maximum
28V AC
Pulse Source

Yellow

Auxiliary

Red

AMP Inc.
Conductor
Plug

Solenoid

RM
a

Black

Common

22

a

25

Circuit Breaker
Open/Closed
Status

BABRS
Remote Contact
Load

Line

26

Breaker Contact

27

Solenoid

ON
Coil

Auxiliary
Switch

OFF
Coil

BKR
a

28
Blue

Red

Common

RM
a

Black

RM
b

Yellow

Conductor
Plug (As
Viewed From
End)

Breaker
Status

Figure 21.3-2. Typical GHBS or GBHS Single-Pole Circuit Breaker
Schematic Diagram and Conductor Plug Wiring Connections

Figure 21.3-3. Circuit Breaker Schematic Diagram for the BABR and
BABRS Breakers

Note: 2-pole breakers have two solenoids.

Note: 2-pole breakers have two solenoids.

Remote Control Operation

Breaker Solenoid and Operating Data

The remote-control capability of the breaker is “armed”
when the breaker handle is manually switched to the “ON”
position. Once armed, the breaker can be pulsed “ON” and
“OFF” by a controller device which provides an ac pulse of
specified magnitude and duration to the solenoid operated
mechanism. Control connections to the breaker are provided
through a conductor plug (supplied by others). A normally
open (a) auxiliary contact provides for “ON”/“OFF” status
indication to the remote controller and/or indicating lamp.

■
■
■
■
■

In the event the breaker automatically trips, the breaker
must be reset manually.

■
■
■
■

Ambient temperature: 0ºC – 40ºC.
Nominal pulse magnitude:
28 Vac rms, 24 Vac (BABR).
Tolerance: +10% to -15% of nominal voltage.
Pulse duration: 1/2 cycle (8 – 10 ms).
Minimum recommended pulse current at nominal voltage:
❑ GHBS
– 1-Pole: 4.9 amperes peak,
3.5 amperes rms
– 2-Pole: 7.84 amperes peak,
5.6 amperes rms
❑ BABR and BABRS
– 1-Pole: 1.0 amperes peak
– 2-Pole: 2.0 amperes peak
Breaker operating time: 20 – 40 ms.
Maximum breaker cycling: six operations per minute.
Humidity: 0 – 95% non-condensing.
The GHBS and GBHS are rated for 25,000 operations while
the BABR and BABRS are rated for 250,000 operations.

29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-18 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Selection Data — Industrial G-Frame

20

G-Frame, Thermal-Magnetic,
15 – 100 Amperes

Number
of Poles

Width

Height

Depth

1P G-Frame

1.00
(25.4)

4.00
(101.6)

2.81
(71.4)

2P G-Frame

2.00
(50.8)

4.00
(101.6)

2.81
(71.4)

3P G-Frame

3.00
(76.2)

4.00
(101.6)

2.81
(71.4)

GHCGFEP

2.00
(50.8)

4.88
(124.0)

2.81
(71.4)

GHBGFEP

2.00
(50.8)

4.00
(101.6)

2.81
(71.4)

22
23
24

Table 21.3-16. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

25
GHB Breaker

26

GHB, GHC

15, 20, 25, 30, 35,
40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80,
90, 100
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60

Number
of Poles

Type
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)
of Trip 
 Volts ac (50/60 Hz)
Volts dc
120

240

277

480

125

250 

GHB, GHC
GHB, GHC

1
2, 3

N.I.T.
N.I.T.

65,000
—

—
65,000

14,000
—

—
14,000

14,000 
—

—
14,000

GHCGFEP, GHBGFEP

1

—

—

65,000

14,000

—

—

—





30

Ratings



N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit.
Two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker.
Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum.

32
33

■
■

■
■

■
■

Circuit Breaker
Amperes

Terminal Body
Material 

Wire
Type

AWG Wire
Range

15 – 20
25 – 100

Clamp (Plated Steel)
Pressure (Aluminum Body)

Cu/Al
Cu/Al

(1) #14 – 10
(1) #10 – 1/0

15 – 20
25 – 60

Clamp
Pressure

Cu/Al
Cu/Al

(1) #14 – #10 AWG
(1) #10 – 1/0 AWG



>>

Sheet 0614

Application Notes

■

Table 21.3-18. Terminal Types

31

<<

January 2005

GHCGFEP, GHBGFEP
277 Volt 30 mA GF Breaker

Table 21.3-17. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

28
29

Frame

GHCGFEP, GHBGFEP

Circuit Breaker
Type

Index

Table 21.3-15. G-Frame —
Dimensions in Inches (mm)

21

27

TOC

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.

■

On all 3-phase Delta (240 V) Grounded
B phase applications, refer to Eaton.
480Y/277 V, circuit breakers
(Type GHB) not suitable for
3-phase Delta (480 V) Grounded
B phase applications.
All 2- and 3-pole circuit breakers
are of the common trip type.
Single-pole circuit breakers,
15 and 20 ampere. Switching
duty rated (SWD) for fluorescent
lighting applications.
Suitable for reverse feed applications.
HACR rated.
GHCGFEP and GHBGFEP are earth
leakage breakers, rated for 30 mA
ground fault protection.
Type GHB are bolt-on panelboard
breakers while type GHC is a cablein and cable-out breaker for standalone mounting typically in a control
panel or separate enclosure.

Terminals

34

Line side (on GHC) and load side (on
GHC and GHB) terminals are UL listed
as suitable for wire type and size listed
below. When used with aluminum
conductors, use joint compound .

35

Table 21.3-19. Terminals

36

Figure 21.3-4. Electrical Schematic


Do not ground neutral anywhere on load side of breaker.

Breaker
Amperes

Terminal
Type

Wire
Type

Wire
Range

15 – 20
25 – 60

Clamp
Pressure

Cu/Al
Cu/Al

#14 – #10 AWG
#10 – 1/0 AWG

37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0615

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

21.3-19

Selection Data — Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker/Frame Catalog Numbering System

20

Table 21.3-20. Catalog Numbering System — Molded Case Circuit Breakers

KD 3 400 T57 W

21
22

Circuit Breaker
Frame Type

Number
of Poles

GD
ED
EDH
EDC
EHD
FDB
FD
HFD
FDC
JDB
JD
HJD
JDC
DK
KDB
KD
CKD
HKD
CHDK
KDC
LDB
LD

1
2
3
4

CLD
HLD
CHLD
LDC
CLDC
MDLB
MDL
CMDL
HMDLB
HMDL
CHMDL
ND
CND
HND
CHND
NDC
CNDC
RD
CRD
RDC
CRDC

Circuit Breaker Frame
Ampere Rating
15
20
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100 (Max. G-Frame)
110
125
150 (Max. EHD-Frame)
175
200
225 (Max. ED&F-Frame)

250 (Max. J-Frame)
300
350
400 (Max. K-Frame)
450
500
600 (Max. L-Frame)
700
800 (Max. M-Frame)
900
1000
1200 (Max. N-Frame)
1250
1400
1500
1600
2000
2500 (Max. R-Frame)

Digitrip Trip Unit Type
T32 =
T33 =
T35 =
T36 =
T55 =
T56 =
T57 =
T76 =
T106 =
T107 =

Digitrip 310 LSI
Digitrip 310 LS
Digitrip 310 LSG
Digitrip 310 LSIG
OPTIM 550 LSI
OPTIM 550 LSIG
OPTIM 550 LSIA
OPTIM 1050 LSIG
OPTIM 1050 LSIG
OPTIM 1050 LSIA

Suffix
C =
E =
F =
K =
T =
V =
W=
X =

CU Terminals
Protected Neutral Pole
Frame Only
Molded Case Switch
Trip Unit Only
50°C Calibration
Without Terminals
Load Side Terminals
Only
Y = Line Side Terminals Only

23
24
25
26
27
28
29

Note: This chart is for interpretation of Cutler-Hammer catalog numbers and not for the creation of catalog numbers.

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-20 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Selection Data — G-Frame

20

G-Frame
Thermal-Magnetic
15 – 100 Amperes

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0616

Table 21.3-23. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

21

Circuit
Breaker
Type

Number
of Poles

GD

2, 3





22



Type
of
Trip 


Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)
120

240

277

480

125

250 

N.I.T.

—

65,000

—

22,000

—

10,000

Volts ac (50/60 Hz)

Volts dc

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit.
Two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker.
Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum.

Table 21.3-24. Line and Load Terminals

23
24

Circuit Breaker
Amperes

Terminal Body
Material 

Wire
Type

AWG Wire
Range

Metric Wire
Range (mm2) 

15 – 20
25 – 100

Clamp (Plated Steel)
Pressure (Aluminum Body)

Cu/Al
Cu/Al

(1) #14 – 10
(1) #10 – 1/0

2.5 – 4
4 – 50




25

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.
Not UL listed sizes.

26
G-Frame Breaker

27
28
29
30

Table 21.3-21. Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Number Width
of Poles

Height

2
3

4.88 (124.0) 2.81 (71.4)
4.88 (124.0) 2.81 (71.4)

2.00 (50.8)
3.00 (76.2)

Depth

Table 21.3-22. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings
Frame

Ratings

GD

15, 20, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50,
60, 70, 80, 90, 100

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0617

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

21.3-21

Selection Data — E125-Frame

EG-Frame
Thermal-Magnetic
15 – 125 Amperes

Table 21.3-27. UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Circuit
Breaker
Type

Number
of Poles

20

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Volts dc 

Volts ac (50/60 Hz)
120 220 – 240
Icu

Ics

277 347

380 – 415

Icu Ics Icu

Ics

480 600Y/347

250 

125

Icu Ics Icu Ics

EGB

1
2, 3, 4

35
—

25
25

25
25

18
—

—
—

—
—

—
18

—
18

—
18

—
—

10
—

10
—

—
10

—
10

EGE

2, 3, 4

—

35

35

—

—

—

25

25

25

18

—

—

10

10

EGS

1
2, 3, 4

100
—

85
85

43
43

35
—

22
—

22
—

—
40

—
30

—
35

—
22

35
—

35
—

—
35

—
35

EGH

1
2, 3, 4

200 100
—
100

50
50

65
—

30
—

30
—

—
70

—
35

—
65

—
25

42
—

42
—

—
42

—
42





dc ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker.
Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 42 kA.

Note: Contact Eaton for availability of E125 frame breakers in panelboards and switchboards.

21
22
23
24
25
26

E125-Frame Breaker

27

Table 21.3-25. Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Number Width
of Poles

Height

Depth

1
2

1.00 (25.4)
2.00 (50.8)

5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)

3
4

3.00 (76.2) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
4.00 (101.6) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)

28
29

Table 21.3-26. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings
Frame

Ratings

EG

15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50,
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125

EG 


16, 32, 63




30
31

Not UL listed.

32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-22 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Selection Data — F-Frame

20

F-Frame
Thermal-Magnetic
10 – 225 Amperes

22
23
24
25

2, 3
2, 3

N.I.T.

ED
EDH
EDC 

2, 3
2, 3
2, 3

EHD

1
2, 3

FDB

2, 3, 4

N.I.T.

18,000

14,000

14,000

—

10,000

FD

1
2, 3, 4

N.I.T.

—
65,000

35,000
—

—
35,000

—
18,000

10,000
—

—
10,000

HFD

1
2, 3, 4

N.I.T.

—
100,000

65,000
—.

—
65,000

—
25,000

10,000
—

—
22,000

FDC 

2, 3, 4

N.I.T.

200,000

—

100,000

35,000

—

22,000

HFDDC 

3

N.I.T.

—

—

—

—

—

42,000 



Table 21.3-28. Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Number Width
of Poles

Height

1
2

1.38 (34.8)
2.75 (69.9)

6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7)
6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7)

3
4

4.13 (104.8) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7)
5.50 (139.7) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7)

31
32

Frame

Sheet 0618

EDB
EDS



Depth

Table 21.3-29. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

30

>>

Number
of Poles



F-Frame Breaker

29

<<

January 2005

Circuit
Breaker
Type




26

28

Index

Table 21.3-30. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

21

27

TOC

Ratings

ED, EDH, EDC

100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225

EHD, FDB, FD,
HFD, FDC,
HFDDC

10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45,
50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110,
125, 150

FD, HFD, FDC

175, 200, 225




Type
of
Trip 


Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts ac (50/60 Hz)

Volts dc

277

480

600

125

250 

22,000
42,000

—
—

—
—

—
—

10,000
10,000

—
—

N.I.T.

65,000
100,000
200,000

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

10,000
10,000
10,000

—
—
—

N.I.T.

—
18,000

14,000
—

—
14,000

—
—

10,000
—

—
10,000

240

—

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit.
2-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker.
Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.
Current limiting.
HFDDC is UL only and is not tested to other standards.
Interrupting rating is 35,000 amperes at 600 Vdc with three poles in series, for ungrounded
systems only.

Table 21.3-31. Line and Load Terminals
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes

Terminal
Body
Material 

Wire
Type

AWG Wire
Range

Metric Wire
Range (mm2)

Catalog Number

Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al

(1) #14 – #10
(1) #14 – 1/0
(1) #4 – 4/0
(1) #4 – 4/0

2.5 – 4
2.5 – 50
25 – 95
25 – 95

3T20FB 
3T100FB
3TA150FB
3TA225FD

Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu
Cu/Al

(1) #14 – #4
2.5 – 16
(1) #14 – 1/0
2.5 – 50
(1) #4 – 4/0
25 – 95
(1) #6 – 300 kcmil 16 – 150

Package of
3 Terminals

Standard Pressure Type Terminals
20 (EHD)
100
150
225

Steel
Steel
Aluminum
Aluminum

Optional Pressure Terminals
50
100
150
225



Aluminum
Aluminum
Stainless Steel
Aluminum

3TA50FB 
3TA100FD
3T150FB
3TA225FDK

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.
Not for use with ED, EDH, EDC breakers.

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0619

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

21.3-23

Selection Data — J250-Frame

JG-Frame
Electronic RMS, 20 – 250 Amperes
Thermal-Magnetic, 63 – 250 Amperes

Table 21.3-35. UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Circuit
Breaker
Type

Number
of Poles

20

Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts dc 

Volts ac (50/60 Hz)
220 – 240

380 – 415

Icu

Icu

Ics

480

600

Ics

250 

690
Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

JGE

2, 3, 4

65

65

25

25

25

18

12

6

10

10

JGS

2, 3, 4

85

85

40

40

35

18

12

6

22

22

JGH

2, 3, 4

100

100

70

70

65

25

14

7

22

22

JGC

2, 3, 4

200

150

100

75

100

50

20

10

42

42





dc ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker.
Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.

Note: Contact Eaton for availability of J250 frame breakers in panelboards and switchboards.

21
22
23
24
25
26

JG250-Frame Breaker

Table 21.3-32. Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Number Width
of Poles

Height

27

Depth

2, 3

4.13 (104.9) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7)

4

5.34 (135.6) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7)

28
29

Table 21.3-33. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings
Frame Ratings
JG
JG



70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200,
225, 250



30

63, 160

Not UL listed.

31

Table 21.3-34. Digitrip 310 Electronic Trip Units
Frame Ratings
JG250

100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225, 250

JG160

63, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 160

JG100

40, 45, 50, 63, 70, 80, 90, 100

JG50

20, 25, 30, 32, 40, 45, 50

32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-24 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Selection Data — J-Frame

20

J-Frame
Thermal-Magnetic, 70 – 250 Amperes

21
22

Number
of Poles

JDB
JD
HJD

2, 3
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4

N.I.T.
I.T.
I.T.

65,000
65,000
100,000

JDC 
HJDDC

2, 3, 4
3

I.T.
I.T.

200,000
—







25

29
30

Sheet 0620

Type
of Trip 


Volts ac (50/60 Hz)
240

Volts dc
600

250 

600 

35,000
35,000
65,000

18,000
18,000
25,000

10,000
10,000
22,000

—
—
—

100,000
—

35,000
—

22,000
42,000 

—
35,000 

480

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip; I.T. is interchangeable trip.
2-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of 3-pole circuit breaker.
Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.
8 milliseconds time constant.
Current limiting.
Three poles in series.
Two poles in series.

Maximum
Breaker
Amperes

J-Frame Breaker

Table 21.3-36. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

28

>>

Table 21.3-39. Line and Load Terminals

26
27

<<

January 2005

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

Circuit
Breaker
Type



24

Index

Table 21.3-38. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings




23

TOC

Number
of Poles

Width

Height

Depth

2, 3

4.13
(104.8)

10.00
(254.0)

4.06
(103.2)

4

5.50
(139.7)

10.00
(254.0)

4.06
(103.2)

Terminal
Body
Material 

Wire
Type

AWG Wire
Range

Metric
Wire
Range (mm2)

Catalog
Number

Cu/Al
Cu

(1) #4 – 350 kcmil
(1) #4 – 350 kcmil

25 – 185
25 – 185

TA250KB
T250KB

Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals
250
250


Aluminum
Stainless Steel

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.

Table 21.3-37. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings
Frame

Ratings

JDB, JD, HJD
JDC, HJDDC

70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200,
225, 250

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0621

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

Selection Data — K-Frame

K-Frame
Electronic RMS, 70 – 400 Amperes
Thermal-Magnetic, 100 – 400 Amperes

Table 21.3-43. NEMA/UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Circuit
Breaker
Type

Number
of Poles

DK
KDB
KD

2, 3
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4

N.I.T.
N.I.T.
I.T.

HKD
KDC 
HKDDC

2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
3

CKD 
CHKD 

3
3







	


Table 21.3-40. Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Number
of Poles

Width

2, 3

5.50
(139.7)

10.13
(257.2)

4.06
(103.2)

4

7.22
(183.4)

10.13
(257.2)

4.06
(103.2)

Depth

Frame

Ratings

DK, FDB, KD,
100, 125, 150, 175, 200,
HKD,KDC, HKDDC, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
CKD,CHKD

Table 21.3-42. Digitrip 310 and OPTIM
Electronic Trip Unit Rating Plugs
Frame

Rating Plugs 


KD, HKD, KDC,
CKD, CHKD

70, 90, 100, 110, 125 , 150,
160, 175, 200, 225, 250 ,
300, 350, 400 



Volts ac (50/60 Hz)
480

600

250 

600 

65,000
65,000
65,000

—
35,000
35,000

—
25,000
25,000

10,000
10,000
10,000

—
—
—

I.T.
I.T.
I.T.

100,000
200,000
—

65,000
100,000
—

35,000
50,000
—

22,000
22,000
42,000	

—
—
35,000 

I.T.
I.T.

65,000
100,000

35,000
65,000

25,000
35,000

10,000
22,000

—
—

240

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip; I.T. is interchangeable trip.
2-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of 3-pole circuit breaker.
Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.
8 milliseconds time constant.
Current limiting.
100% rated.
Two poles in series.
Three poles in series.

Maximum
Breaker
Amperes

Terminal
Body
Material 

Wire
Type

20

Volts dc

21
22
23
24
25
26

AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors

Metric
Wire
Range (mm2)

Catalog
Number

(1) 3 – 350 kcmil
(1) 250 – 500 kcmil
(2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil

35 – 185
120 – 240
95 – 120

TA300K
TA350K
2TA400K – 2-Pole Kit 	
3TA400K – 3-Pole Kit 	
4TA400K – 4-Pole Kit 	

27

Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals

Table 21.3-41. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings




Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

Type
of Trip 

Table 21.3-44. Line and Load Terminals

K-Frame Breaker

Height

21.3-25

225
350
400

Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum

Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al

Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals
225
350
400

Copper
Copper
Copper

Cu
Cu
Cu

(1) 3 – 350 kcmil
(1) 250 – 500 kcmil
(2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil

35 – 185
120 – 240
95 – 120

400

Aluminum

Cu/Al

(2) 2/0 – 250 kcmil
or
(1) 2/0 – 500 kcmil

70 – 120
70 – 240
70 – 240


	

T300K
T350K
2T400K – 2-Pole Kit 	
3T400K – 3-Pole Kit 	
4T400K – 4-Pole Kit 	
2TA401K – 2-Pole Kit 	
3TA401K – 3-Pole Kit 	
4TA401K – 4-Pole Kit 	

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.
TA400K, T400K and TA401K terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.

28
29
30
31
32
33

160 ampere is only available on Digitrip 310.
Adjustable rating plug available on
Digitrip 310.

34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-26 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Selection Data — L-Frame

20

L-Frame
Electronic RMS, 70 – 600 Amperes
Thermal-Magnetic, 300 – 600 Amperes

21
22
23

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0622

Interrupting Capacity (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

Circuit
Breaker
Type

Number
of Poles

LDB
LD, CLD 
HLD

2, 3
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4

N.I.T.
I.T.
I.T.

65,000
65,000
100,000

CHLD 
LDC 
CLDC 
HLDDC

2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
3

I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.

100,000
200,000
200,000
—







25

Index

Table 21.3-49. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings




24

TOC



Type
of Trip 


Volts ac (50/60 Hz)
240

Volts dc
600

250 

600

35,000
35,000
65,000

25,000
25,000
35,000

22,000
22,000
25,000

—
—
—

65,000
100,000
100,000
—

35,000
50,000
50,000
—

25,000
30,000
30,000
42,000 

—
—
—
35,000 

480

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip; I.T. is interchangeable trip.
L/R = 8 milliseconds minimum.
2-pole circuit breaker or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Incorporating T/M trip unit only.
100% rated.
Current limiting.
2-poles in series.
3-poles in series.

Table 21.3-50. Line and Load Terminals

26

Maximum
Breaker
Amperes

L-Frame Breaker

27
28
29

Table 21.3-45. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

31
32
33
34
35
36

Wire
Type

AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors

Metric
Wire
Range (mm2)

Catalog
Number

Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals

Number
of Poles

Width

Height

Depth

400

Aluminum

Cu/Al (1) 4/0 – 600 kcmil

120 – 300

2TA401LDK – 2-Pole Kit 	
3TA401LDK – 3-Pole Kit 	
4TA401LDK – 4-Pole Kit 	

2, 3

8.25
(209.6)

10.75
(273.1)

4.06
(103.2)

500
600

Aluminum
Aluminum

Cu/Al (2) 250 – 350 kcmil
Cu/Al (2) 400 – 500 kcmil

120 – 150
185 – 240

4

11.00
(279.4)

10.75
(273.1)

4.06
(103.2)

TA602LD
2TA603LDK – 2-Pole Kit 	
3TA603LDK – 3-Pole Kit 	
4TA603LDK – 4-Pole Kit 	

120 – 150

T602LD

Optional Copper Pressure Type Terminals

Table 21.3-46. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

30

Terminal
Body
Material 

Frame

Ratings

LDB, LD, CLD,
HLD, CHLD,
LDC, CLDC,
HLDDC

300, 350, 400, 450,
500, 600

600

	

Copper

Cu

(2) 250 – 350 kcmil

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.
Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.

Table 21.3-47. Digitrip 310 Electronic Trip Unit
Rating Plugs
Frame

Rating Plugs

LDB, LD, CLD,
HLD, CHLD,
LDC, CLDC

300, 350, 400, 500, 600
300/600 Adjustable

Table 21.3-48. Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Trip
Unit Rating Plugs
Frame

Rating Plugs

LD, CLD, HLD,
CHLD, LDC,
CLDC

70, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175,
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400,
500, 600

37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0623

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

M-Frame
Electronic RMS, 400 – 800 Amperes
Thermal-Magnetic, 300 – 800 Amperes

21.3-27

Selection Data — M-Frame
Table 21.3-54. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Circuit
Breaker
Type

Number
of Poles

Type of
Trip 


MDL, CMDL 
HMDL, CHMDL 

2, 3
2, 3

N.I.T.
N.I.T.







Interrupting Capacity (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

20

Volts dc 

Volts ac (50/60 Hz)
240

480

600

250

65,000
100,000

50,000
65,000

25,000
35,000

22,000
25,000

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit.
Two poles or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only, MDL, HMDL
breakers with electronic trip unit are not dc rated.
Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.
100% rated. Not for use on dc.

21
22
23

Table 21.3-55. Line and Load Terminals
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes

Terminal
Body
Material 

Wire
Type

AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors

Catalog
Number

Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al

(2) #1 – 500 kcmil
(3) 3/0 – 400 kcmil
(2) 500 – 750 kcmil

TA700MA1
TA800MA2
TA801MA

(2) 2/0 – 500 kcmil
(3) 3/0 – 300 kcmil

T600MA1
T800MA1

Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals
600
800
800

Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum

Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals
M-Frame Breaker

Table 21.3-51. Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Width

Height

Depth

8.25 (209.6)

16.00 (406.4) 4.06 (103.2)

600
800


Copper
Copper

Cu
Cu

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.

24
25
26
27
28

Table 21.3-52. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings
Frame

Ratings

MDL

300, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800

29

Table 21.3-53. Digitrip 310 Electronic Trip Unit
Rating Plugs
Frame

Rating Plugs

MDL

400, 500, 600, 700, 800,
400/800 Adjustable

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-28 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Selection Data — N-Frame

20

N-Frame
Electronic RMS, 400 – 1200 Amperes

21
22

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0624

Table 21.3-59. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Circuit
Breaker
Type

Number
of Poles

Type
of
Trip 

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)
240

277

ND, CND 
HND
CHND 

2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4

N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.

65,000
100,000
100,000

—
—
—

50,000
65,000
65,000

25,000
35,000
35,000

NDC
CNDC 

2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4

N.I.T.
N.I.T.

200,000
200,000

—
—

100,000
100,000

50,000
50,000



23

TOC



Volts ac (50/60 Hz)
480

600

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit.
100% rated.

Table 21.3-60. Line and Load Terminals

24

Maximum
Breaker
Amperes

26

700
1000
1200
1200

N-Frame Breaker

Table 21.3-56. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

28
29
30

Number
of Poles

Width

Height

Depth

2, 3

8.25
(209.6)

16.00
(406.4)

5.50
(139.7)

4

11.13
(282.6)

16.00
(406.4)

5.50
(139.7)

32
33

AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors

Metric
Wire
Range (mm2)

Catalog
Number

Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum

Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al

(2) 1 – 500 kcmil
(3) 3/0 – 400 kcmil
(4) 4/0 – 500 kcmil
(3) 500 – 750 kcmil

50 – 300
95 – 185
120 – 300
300 – 400

TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
TA1201NB1

Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals
700
1000
1200


Copper
Copper
Copper

Cu
Cu
Cu

(2) 2/0 – 500 kcmil
(3) 3/0 – 500 kcmil
(4) 3/0 – 400 kcmil

70 – 300
95 – 300
95 – 185

T700NB1
T1000NB1
T1200NB3

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.

Table 21.3-57. Digitrip 310 Electronic Trip Unit
Rating Plugs
Frame
800
1200

31

Wire
Type

Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals

25

27

Terminal
Body
Material 




Rating Plugs
400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800 

600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100,1200 


Adjustable rating plug available.

Table 21.3-58. Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Trip
Unit Rating Plugs
Frame
800
1200

Ratings
400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 700, 800
600, 700, 800, 1000, 1200

34
35
36
37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0625

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

21.3-29

Selection Data — R-Frame

R-Frame
Electronic RMS, 800 – 2500 Amperes

Table 21.3-64. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

20

Circuit
Breaker
Frame

Number
of Poles

Type
of
Trip 

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)
240

277

480

600

RD
CRD 
RDC
CRDC 

3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4

N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.

125
125
200
200

—
—
—
—

65
65
100
100

50
50
65
65




Volts ac (50/60 Hz)

21
22

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit.
100% rated versions.

23

Table 21.3-65. Line and Load Terminals
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes

Terminal
Body
Material 

Wire
Type

Hardware

Aluminum
Copper
Aluminum

Cu/Al
Cu
Cu/Al

English
English
English

AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors

Metric
Wire
Range (mm2)

Catalog
Number

(4) 500 – 1000 kcmil
(4) 1 – 600 kcmil
(6) 2 – 600 kcmil

300 – 500
50 – 300
35 – 300

TA1600RD
T1600RD
TA2000RD

24

Wire Terminal
1600
1600
2000


R-Frame Breaker

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.

25
26

Table 21.3-61. Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Number
of Poles

Width

Height

Depth

3

15.50
(393.7)

16.00
(406.4)

9.75
(247.7)

4

20.00
(508.0)

16.00
(406.4)

9.75
(247.7)

27
28
29

Table 21.3-62. Digitrip 310 Electronic Trip Unit
Rating Plugs
Frame

Rating Plugs

1600

800, 1000, 1200, 1250,
1400, 1500, 1600 


2000

1000, 1200, 1250, 1400, 1600, 2000 


2500

1200, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500 





30
31

Adjustable rating plug available.

32

Table 21.3-63. Digitrip RMS and Digitrip
OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit Rating Plugs
Frame

Rating Plugs

1600
2000
2500

800, 1000, 1200, 1600
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
1600, 2000, 2500

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-30 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

Selection Data — Current Limiting

20

January 2005
Sheet 0626

Current Limiting FCL Frame 15 – 100 Amperes, LCL Frame 125 – 400 Amperes
LCL Frame

FCL Frame

21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

FCL Frame Breaker

LCL Frame Breaker

Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Table 21.3-66. FCL Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Table 21.3-68. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Volts ac
Type of Interrupting Capacity
(50/60 Hz) Trip 

(Symmetrical Amperes)

Frame

Number Width
of Poles

240
480

FCL

2, 3




N.I.T.
N.I.T.

200,000
150,000

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit.

LCL, LCLG  2, 3

Height Depth

4.13
8.75
3.50
(104.8) (222.3) (88.9)
8.25
16.00 4.00
(209.6) (406.4) (101.6)

Note: On all 3-phase Delta, Ground B
phase applications, refer to Eaton.



Terminals

Table 21.3-69. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

Breakers listed include line and load
terminals. Terminals are Underwriters
Laboratories listed for wire sizes and
types listed below. When used with
aluminum cable, use joint compound.
To order optional aluminum terminals,
add suffix “Z” to breaker catalog
number listed.
Wire
Type

Frame

Ratings

FCL

15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50,
60, 70, 80, 90, 100

Table 21.3-70. SELTRONIC Electronic Trip Unit
Rating Plug
Frame

Ratings

LCL, LCLG  125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250,
275, 300, 350, 400

Table 21.3-67. FCL Terminals
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes

Breaker with built-in ground fault protection.

AWG Wire
Range



Breaker with built-in ground fault protection.

35
36

Al/Cu

#14 – 1/0

Al/Cu
Al/Cu

Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Table 21.3-71. LCL Interrupting Capacity
Ratings
Volts ac
Type of Interrupting Capacity
(50/60 Hz) Trip 
(Symmetrical Amperes)
240
480
600


N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.

200,000
200,000
100,000

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit.

Note: On all 3-phase Delta, Ground B
phase applications, refer to Eaton.

Terminals
Two terminals are required per pole.
Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories
listed for wire type and range listed
below. When used with aluminum
cable, use joint compound.
Maximum AWG/kcmil
Breaker
Wire Range/Number
Amperes of Conductors

Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
50
100

Type LCL breakers are not defined in
Federal Specifications W-C-375-b.

Table 21.3-72. LCL Terminals

Standard Pressure Terminals
100

Listed with Underwriters Laboratories
Except as Noted

#14 – #4
#4 – 4/0

Terminal
Catalog
Number

Standard Copper Pressure Terminals
225
400

37

(1) #6 – 350 kcmil Cu
(1) #4 – 250 kcmil Cu,
plus
(1) 3/0 – 600 kcmil Cu

T225LA
T401LA

Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

38
39

225

(1) #6 – 350 kcmil Cu, or TA225LA1
(1) #4 – 350 kcmil Al

400

(1) #4 – 250 kcmil Al/Cu, TA400LA1
plus
(1) 3/0 – 600 kcmil Al/Cu

40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0627

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

21.3-31

Selection Data — Current Limiting

Current Limiting FB TRI-PAC 15-100 Amperes, LA TRI-PAC 70 – 400 Amperes

20

LA TRI-PAC

FB TRI-PAC

21
22
23
24
25

Listed with Underwriters Laboratories
Except as Noted
TRI-PAC FB breakers meet the
requirements for Class 16a, 16b, 17a
and 26a circuit breakers as defined
in Federal Specification W-C-375b.

Table 21.3-74. Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame Number
of Poles

Width

FB

2, 3

4.13
(104.8)

8.75
(222.3)

3.50
(88.9)

LA

2, 3

8.13
(206.4)

16.00
(406.4)

7.75
(196.9)

Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Underwriters Laboratories Listed
600 Vac maximum: 200,000 amperes
symmetrical.

Based on NEMA Test Procedures

26

LA TRI-PAC Breaker

FB TRI-PAC Breaker

Height

Depth

Table 21.3-75. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

Listed with Underwriters Laboratories
Except as Noted

27

TRI-PAC LA breakers meet the
requirements for Class 16a, 16b, 17a
and 26a circuit breakers as defined
in Federal Specification W-C-375b.

28

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

29

Underwriters Laboratories Listed

Frame

Ratings

FB TRI-PAC

15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 90, 100

600 Vac maximum: 200,000 amperes
symmetrical.

LA TRI-PAC

70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200,
225, 250, 300, 350, 400

Based on NEMA Test Procedures

250 Vdc maximum: 100,000 amperes.

250 Vdc maximum: 100,000 amperes.

Note: On all 3-phase Delta, Ground B
phase applications, refer to Eaton.

Note: On all 3-phase Delta, Grounded B
phase applications, refer to Eaton.

Terminals

Terminals

Breakers listed include line and load
terminals. Terminals are Underwriters
Laboratories listed for wire sizes and
types listed below. When used with
aluminum cable, use joint compound.
To order optional aluminum terminals,
add suffix “Z” to breaker catalog
number listed.

Two terminals are required per pole.
Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories
listed for wire size and type listed below.
When used with aluminum conductors,
use joint compound. To order optional
aluminum terminals, add suffix “Z” to
complete breaker catalog number.

Wire
Type

Maximum AWG/kcmil
Breaker
Wire Range/Number
Amperes of Conductors

AWG Wire
Range

Al/Cu

(1) #14 – 1/0

Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
50
100

CA08104001E

32
33
34
35

Terminal
Catalog
Number

36
37

Standard Copper Pressure Terminals

Standard Pressure Terminals
100

31

Table 21.3-76. LA TRI-PAC Terminals

Table 21.3-73. FB TRI-PAC Terminals
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes

30

Al/Cu
Al/Cu

(1) #14 – #4
(1) #4 – 4/0

225
225

(1) #6 – 350 kcmil Cu
(1) #6 – 250 kcmil Cu

T225LA
T225LBF

400

(1) #4 – 250 kcmil Cu,
plus
(1) 3/0 – 600 kcmil Cu

T401LA

38

Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

225

(1) #6 – 350 kcmil Cu, or TA225LA1
(1) #4 – 350 kcmil Al/Cu

39

400

(1) #4 – 250 kcmil Al/Cu, TA400LA1
plus
(1) 3/0 – 600 kcmil Al/Cu

40

21.3-32 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Selection Data — Current Limiting

20

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0628

Current Limiting NB TRI-PAC 300 – 800 Amperes, PB TRI-PAC 600 – 1600 Amperes
PB TRI-PAC

NB TRI-PAC

21
22
23
24
25
26
PB TRI-PAC Breaker

27

NB TRI-PAC Breaker

28

Listed with Underwriters Laboratories
Except as Noted

29

TRI-PAC NB breakers meet the
requirements for Class 16b, 17a and
26a circuit breakers as defined in
Federal Specification W-C-375b.

30

32
33
34
35
36

Frame Number Width
of Poles

Height

Depth

NB

2, 3

8.25
(209.6)

22.00
(558.8)

5.50
(139.7)

PB

2, 3

12.06
(306.4)

22.13
(562.0)

9.06
(230.2)

Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Underwriters Laboratories Listed

31

Table 21.3-78. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

600 Vac maximum: 200,000 amperes
symmetrical.

Based on NEMA Test Procedures

Table 21.3-79. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

Listed with Underwriters Laboratories
Except as Noted
TRI-PAC PB breakers meet the
requirements for Class 17a and 26a
circuit breakers as defined in Federal
Specification W-C-375b.

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Frame

Ratings

Underwriters Laboratories Listed

NB TRI-PAC

300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800

600 Vac maximum: 200,000 amperes
symmetrical.

PB TRI-PAC

600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1200,
1400, 1600

Based on NEMA Test Procedures

250 Vdc maximum: 100,000 amperes.

250 Vdc maximum: 100,000 amperes.

Note: On all 3-phase Delta, Grounded B
phase applications, refer to Eaton.

Note: On all 3-phase Delta, Ground B phase
applications, refer to Eaton.

Terminals

Bus Bar Connectors

Two terminals are required per pole.
Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories
listed for wire size and type listed below.
When used with aluminum conductors,
use joint compound. To order optional
aluminum terminals, add suffix “Z” to
complete breaker catalog number.

“T” Connector for Cu/Al Bus
Two required per pole. For rear bus
connection. Accepts up to four bus
bolts. May be rotated 90°.

Table 21.3-77. NB TRI-PAC Terminals

37

Maximum AWG/kcmil
Ampere
Wire Range/Number
Rating
of Conductors

Terminal
Catalog
Number

“T” Connector for Cu/Al Bus

Standard Copper Pressure Terminals

38
39
40

350
700
800

1 #1 – 600 kcmil Cu
2 2/0 – 500 kcmil Cu
3 3/0 – 500 kcmil Cu

Cable Connector (Optional)
T350NB
T700NB1
T1000NB1

For “T” Connector. Accepts four
600 kcmil copper cables.

Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
700
800
800

2 #1 – 500 kcmil Al/Cu TA700NB1
3 3/0 – 400 kcmil Al/Cu TA1000NB1
3 500 – 750 kcmil Al/Cu TA1201NB1

Optional Cable Connector

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0629

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

21.3-33

Selection Data — Earth Leakage

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers
F-, J- and K- Frame, ThermalMagnetic, 15 – 400 Amperes

Table 21.3-83. Standard Line and Load Terminals — Included with Breakers
Frame

Amperes

Terminal
Body
Material 

Wire
Type

AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors

Poles

F
F

15 – 100
110 – 150

Steel
Stainless Steel

Cu/Al
Cu/Al

(1) #14 – 1/0
(1) #4 – 4/0

3, 4
3, 4

J

100 – 250

Aluminum

Cu/Al

(1) #4 – 250 kcmil

3, 4

K
K

200 – 350
400

Aluminum
Aluminum

Cu/Al
Cu/Al

(1) 250 – 250 kcmil
(1) 3/0 – 250 kcmil

3, 4
3, 4



Table 21.3-80. Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame Width

Height

Depth

3-Pole
F
J
K

4.13 (105.0) 11.20 (284.5) 4.14 (105.2)
4.13 (105.0) 13.70 (348.0) 4.94 (125.5)
5.51 (140.0) 13.84 (351.5) 4.91 (124.7)

4-Pole
F
J
K

5.51 (140.0) 11.20 (284.5) 4.14 (105.2)
5.51 (140.0) 13.70 (348.0) 4.94 (125.5)
7.20 (183.0) 13.84 (351.5) 4.91 (124.7)

Note: All dimensions are provided for
guidance and should not be used for
construction purposes unless approved.

Table 21.3-81. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings
Frame

Ratings

F

15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80,
90, 100, 110, 125, 150

J

100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250

K

200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400

Table 21.3-82. UL 489 Interrupting
Capacity Ratings
Circuit
Breaker
Type

No.
Type Interrupting Capacity
(kA Symmetrical
of
of
Poles Trip 
 Amperes)
Volts ac (50/60 Hz)
240

480

3, 4
ELFD
3, 4
ELHFD
ELFDC  3, 4

N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.

65
100
200

25
65
100

3, 4
ELJD
3, 4
ELHJD
ELJDC  3, 4

N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.

65
100
200

35
65
100

3, 4
ELKD
3, 4
ELHKD

3, 4
ELKDC

N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.

65
100
200

35
65
100





Wire
Type

AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors

Number Kit
of Poles Quantity

Catalog
Number

Aluminum
Aluminum

Cu/Al
Cu/Al

(2) 250 kcmil
(1) 500 kcmil

3
3

2
2

3TA401K
3TA401K

Aluminum
Aluminum

Cu/Al
Cu/Al

(2) 250 kcmil
(1) 500 kcmil

4
4

2
2

4TA401K
4TA401K

Copper
Copper

Cu
Cu

(1) 3 – 350 kcmil
(1) 3 – 350 kcmil

3
4

6
8

T300K
T300K

Copper
Copper

Cu
Cu

(1) 250 – 500 kcmil
(1) 250 – 500 kcmil

3
4

6
8

T350K
T350K

Copper
Copper

Cu
Cu

(1) 3/0 – 250 kcmil
(1) 3/0 – 250 kcmil

3
4

2
2

3T400K
3T400K

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.

Application Notes
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Earth Leakage
Breakers offer superior Class 1 ground
fault protection and improved ground
fault coordination capability.
Earth leakage ground fault protection
differs from other types of systems in
its level of sensitivity. The sensitivity
of traditional devices is limited by the
cumulative error of the residual current
sensors and the placement of the phase
and neutral conductors inside the
current sensor.
Leakage breakers are zero sequence
sensing devices. They are factory supplied with a single sensor and ground
fault relay built-in. This technique allows
for protection sensitivities down to the
30 milliampere level.
Leakage breakers are provided with a
full complement of easy adjustments.
The ground fault pickup setting is
adjustable from .03 to 30 amperes in
eight steps, and the ground fault time
delay setting is adjustable from instantaneous to 2.0 seconds in six steps.
When the pickup is set to 30 mA, the
time delay setting defaults internally to
instantaneous only. Increased selectivity
provides for improved coordination
with upstream and downstream ground
fault devices, as well as the flexibility
to adjust for transient currents.

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and
breaker is factory sealed.
Current limiting.

CA08104001E

22
23

Terminal
Body
Material 



21

UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.

Table 21.3-84. Optional K-Frame Line and Load Terminals

Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker

20

Three-Phase, Four-Wire Loads
For 3-phase applications with
line-to-neutral loads, select 4-pole
earth leakage breakers and wire the
neutral through the fourth (right) pole.

24
25
26
27
28
29
30

Three-Phase, Three-Wire Loads
For applications with only 3-phase,
3-wire, line-to-line connected loads,
select 3-pole earth leakage breakers.

31

Single-Phase Loads

32

For single-phase, 2-wire or 3-wire
applications, use a 3-pole earth leakage
breaker and connect all conductors
through the breaker.

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-34 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors

20

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0630

Motor Circuit Protectors, 3 – 1200 Amperes

21
22
23
24
25
26

Motor Circuit Protectors 3 – 1200 Amperes

Catalog Numbering System

27

Note: This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers
for circuit breakers or trip units.

Table 21.3-85. Catalog Numbering System — HMCP

28

Table 21.3-86. Catalog Numbering System — GMCP/HMCPE

GMCP/HMCPE 003 A0 C

HMCP 003 A0 C

29
Motor Circuit
Protector Type

30

HMCP = 3-Pole
HM2P = 2-Pole 

HMCPS= 3-Pole

31

Continuous
Ampere
Rating

32

003 = 3
007 = 7
015 = 15
025 = 25
030 = 30
050 = 50
070 = 70
100 = 100
150 = 150
250 = 250
400 = 400
600 = 600
800 = 800
12 = 1200

33
34
35
36
37



38

Motor Circuit
Protector Type

Magnetic Trip Range/
NEMA Starter Size
A0 = 9 – 30/0
C0 = 21 – 70/0
E0 = 45 – 150/0
D0 = 40 – 60/0
H1 = 90 – 300/1
G2 = 80 – 120/2
K2 = 150 – 500/2
J2 = 115 – 170/2
M2 = 210 – 700/2
L3 = 160 – 240/3
R3 = 300 – 1000/3
T4 = 450 – 1500/4
U4 = 750 – 2500/4
A5 = 350 – 700/5
C5 = 450 – 900/5

Non-Aluminum Terminals
W/O Terminals
Load Terminals Only
Line Terminals Only
Stainless Steel Terms
(150 A Frame Only)
No Suffix = Standard Terminals on
Line and Load
(Electronic)

On J- and K-Frame HMCPs only.

=
=
=
=
=

GMCP = 3-Pole
HMCPE = 3-Pole

D5 = 500 – 1000/5
F5 = 625 – 1250/5
G5 = 750 – 1500/5
J5 = 875 – 1750/5
K5 = 1000 – 2000/5
L5 = 1125 – 2250/5
W5 = 1250 – 2500/5
N5 = 1500 – 3000/5
R5 = 1750 – 3500/5
X5 = 2000 – 4000/5
L6 = 1800 – 6000/6
X6 = 500 – 2500
Y6 = 1000 – 4000
X7 = 1600 – 6400
Y8 = 2400 – 9600
Suffix

C
W
X
Y
S

Continuous
Ampere
Rating
003 = 3
007 = 7
015 = 15
030 = 30
050 = 50
060 = 60
063 = 63
070 = 70
100 = 100

A0 =
C0 =
E0 =
H1 =
K2 =
J2 =
M2 =

15 – 30
35 – 70
75 – 150
150 – 300
250 – 500
300 – 600
320 – 630

HMCPE
A0 =
C0 =
E0 =
H1 =
K2 =
—
M2 =
R3 =
T3 =

9 – 33
21 – 77
45 – 165
90 – 330
150 – 550
210 – 770
300 – 1100
500 – 1500
Suffix

C = Non Aluminum
Terminals

Table 21.3-87. 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Minimum
Continuous Amperes MCP Trip Range (Amperes)

MCP Catalog Number

JG-Frame 

250

500 – 1000
625 – 1250
750 – 1500

HMCPJ250D5L
HMCPJ250F5L
HMCPJ250G5L

875 – 1750
1000 – 2000
1125 – 2250
1250 – 2500

HMCPJ250J5L
HMCPJ250K5L
HMCPJ250L5L
HMCPJ250W5L

1125 – 2250
1500 – 3000
1750 – 3500

HMCPL600L
HMCPL600N
HMCPL600R

2000 – 4000
2250 – 4500
2500 – 5000
3000 – 6000

HMCPL600X
HMCPL600Y
HMCPL600P
HMCPL600M

LG-Frame 

600

39
40

Magnetic Trip Range
GMCP





UL listed for use with Cutler-Hammer Motor Starters.
Equipped with an electronic trip device.

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0631

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors

General Information

Accessories

Designated as the Eaton’s CutlerHammer Types GMCP, HMCPE and
HMCP are instantaneous-only motor
circuit protectors. The GMCP and
HMCPE are 480V devices rated
between 3 – 100 amperes. The HMCP
is a 600V device available in four
frames and rated between 3 – 600
amperes. The MCP is designed to
comply with the applicable requirements of Underwriters Laboratories
Standard UL 489, Canadian Standards
Association Standard C22.2 No. 5, and
International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 157-1.

Termination Accessories

An innovative design of internal
components allows higher MCP-starter
combination interrupting ratings. The
MCP is marked to permit proper electrical application within the assigned
equipment ratings.
The MCP is a recognized component
(UL File E7819) and complies with the
applicable requirements of Underwriters
Laboratories Standard UL 489. It is also
designed to comply with the applicable
requirements of Canadian Standards
Association Standard C22.2 No. 5, and
International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 157-1. The
interrupting rating is defined on the
assembled equipment nameplate.

21.3-35

■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

Line and load terminals.
Keeper nut/plug nut.
Control wire terminal kit.
Base mounting hardware.
Terminal shields.
Terminal end covers.
Interphase barriers.
ELC current limiter.
Multiwire connector.

Internal Accessories
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

Only one internal accessory per
pole maximum.
Alarm lockout (Make/Break).
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break).
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B).
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B).
Auxiliary switch/alarm lockout.
Shunt Trip — standard.
Shunt Trip — low energy.
Undervoltage release mechanism.

External Accessories
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

Non-padlockable handle block.
Padlockable handle block.
Padlockable handle lock hasp.
Key interlock kit.
Sliding bar interlock — requires
two breakers.
Electrical (solenoid) operator.
Handle mechanism.
Door hardware/accessories.
DIN rail adapter (GMCP only).

Modifications
Moisture fungus treatment.
■ Freeze test.
■

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-36 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

Motor Protection
Note: These recommendations are based on
previous code interpretations. See the current
NEC for exact up-to-date information.

In line with NEC 430-6(a), circuit breaker,
HMCP and fuse rating selections are
based on full-load currents for induction
motors running at speeds normal for
belted motors and motors with normal
torque characteristics using data shown
taken from NEC table 430-150 (3-phase).
Actual motor nameplate ratings shall
be used for selecting motor running
overload protection. Motors built special
for low speeds, high torque characteristics, special starting conditions and
applications will require other considerations as defined in the application
section of the NEC.
Circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse ampere
rating selections are in line with maximum rules given in NEC 430-52 and
Table 430-152. Based on known characteristics of Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer
type breakers, specific units are recommended. The current ratings are no
more than the maximum limits set by
the NEC rules for motors with code letters F to V or without code letters.
Motors with lower code letters will
require further considerations.

30

In general, these selections were
based on:

31

1. Ambient — outside enclosure
not more than 40°C (104°F).

32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

2. Motor starting — infrequent
starting, stopping or reversing.
3. Motor accelerating time —
10 seconds or less.
4. Locked rotor — maximum six
times motor FLA.

For motor full load currents of 208 and
200 volts, increase the corresponding
230-volt motor values by 10 and 15%
respectively.

Sheet 0632

Table 21.3-88. Motor Circuit Protector (MCP), Circuit Breaker and Fusible Switch Selection Guide
Hp

Full Load
Amperes
(NEC) FLA

Fuse Size NEC 430-152
Maximum
Amperes 


Recommended Cutler-Hammer MCPs &
Circuit Breakers

Time Delay

Amperes

Non-Time Delay

Motor Circuit
Protector Type HMCP 

Circuit
Breaker 

Type Amperes

Adj. Range

230 Volts, 3-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3

3.6
5.2
6.8
9.6

10
10
15
20

15
20
25
30

15
15
15
20

HFD
HFD
HFD
HFD

7
7
15
15

21 – 70
21 – 70
45 – 150
45 – 150

5
7-1/2
10
15

15.2
22
28
42

30
40
50
80

50
70
90
150

30
50
60
90

HFD
HFD
HFD
HFD

30
30
50
70

90 – 300
90 – 300
150 – 500
210 – 700

20
25
30
40

54
68
80
104

100
125
150
200

175
225
250
350

100
125
150
150

HFD
HFD
HFD
HFD

100
100
150
150

300 – 1000
300 – 1000
450 – 1500
450 – 1500

50
60
75
100

130
154
192
248

250
300
350
450

400
500
600
800

200
225
300
400

HFD
HFD
HKD
HKD

150
250
400
600

750 – 2500
1250 – 2500
2000 – 4000
1800 – 6000

125
150
200

312
360
480

600
700
1000

1000
1200
1600

500
600
700

HLD
HLD
HND

600
—
—

1800 – 6000
—
—

460 Volts, 3-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3

1.8
2.6
3.4
4.8

6
6
6
10

6
10
15
15

15
15
15
15

HFD
HFD
HFD
HFD

3
7
7
7

9 – 30
21 – 70
21 – 70
21 – 70

5
7-1/2
10
15

7.6
11
14
21

15
20
25
40

25
35
45
70

15
25
35
45

HFD
HFD
HFD
HFD

15
15
30
30

45 – 150
45 – 150
90 – 300
90 – 300

20
25
30
40

27
34
40
52

50
60
70
100

90
110
125
175

50
70
70
100

HFD
HFD
HFD
HFD

50
50
70
100

150 – 500
150 – 500
210 – 700
300 – 1000

50
60
75
100

65
77
96
124

125
150
175
225

200
150
300
400

110
250
150
175

HFD
HFD
HJD
HJD

100
150
150
150

300 – 1000
450 – 1500
450 – 1500
750 – 2500

125
150
200

156
180
240

300
350
450

500
600
800

225
250
350

HJD
HJD
HKD

250
250
400

1250 – 2500
1250 – 2500
2000 – 4000

575 Volts, 3-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3

1.4
2.1
2.7
3.9

3
6
6
10

6
10
10
15

15
15
15
15

HFD
HFD
HFD
HFD

3
3
7
7

9 – 30
9 – 30
21 – 70
21 – 70

5
7-1/2
10
15

6.1
9
11
17

15
20
20
30

20
30
35
60

15
20
25
40

HFD
HFD
HFD
HFD

15
15
15
30

45 – 150
45 – 150
45 – 150
90 – 300

20
25
30
40

22
27
32
41

40
50
60
80

70
90
100
125

50
60
60
80

HFD
HFD
HFD
HFD

50
50
50
70

150 – 500
150 – 500
150 – 500
210 – 700

50
60
75
100

52
62
77
99

100
110
150
175

175
200
250
300

100
125
150
175

HFD
HFD
HFD
HJD

100
100
150
150

300 – 1000
300 – 1000
450 – 1500
450 – 1500

125
150
200

125
144
192

225
300
350

400
450
600

200
225
300

HJD
HJD
HKD

250
250
400

875 – 1750
1250 – 2500
2000 – 4000

5. Type HMCP motor circuit protector
may not set at more than 1300%
of the motor full-load current, to
comply with the NEC, Sec. 430-52.
(Except for new E rated motor
which can be set up to 1700%.)
Circuit breaker selections are based
on types with standard interrupting
ratings. Higher interrupting rating
types may be required to satisfy
specific system application
requirements.

January 2005






Consult fuse manufacturer’s catalog for smaller fuse ratings.
Types are for minimum interrupting capacity breakers. Ensure that the fault duty does not exceed
breakers I.C.
Designers should verify and specify motor inrush currents to fall within the magnetic pick-up
range, or use a higher range product.

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0633

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors

Motor Circuit Protector Catalog Numbers and Ranges
The following tables provide specific catalog numbers and
application ranges for the G-Frame (GMCP), E-Frame (HMCPE),
J-Frame (HMCP) and K-Frame (HMCP) motor circuit protectors.
Motor circuit protector models are available with earth leakage
ground fault protection. Models are also available for motor
starters provided with electronic overload relays rather than
thermal overload relays, such as the Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer
Advantage motor starter.
Similar tables for the selection of the settings are provided
with motor control products which use motor circuit protectors.
As required by the NEC, the HMCP setting is selected by using
the actual full load ampere data from the motor nameplate.
The corresponding trip settings provided are within 13 times
the minimum full load amperes of the motor as required by
the NEC. The NEC allows a higher setting for Design E motors.

Table 21.3-90. E-Frame
MCP
Catalog
Number

NEMA
Starter
Size

HMCPE003A0C

0

HMCPE007C0C

HMCPE015E0C

0

0

Continuous
Amperes

3

7

15

Table 21.3-89. G-Frame
MCP
Catalog
Number

NEMA
Starter
Size

GMCP003A0C

0, 1

Continuous
Amperes

Cam
Setting

Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes 


MCP
Trip
Setting
HMCPE030H1C

GMCP007C0C

GMCP015E0C

GMCP030H1C

GMCP050K2C

GMCP060J2C

GMCP063M2C




0, 1

0, 1

1

2

3

3

3

7

15

30

50

60

63

A
B
C

1.1 – 1.2
1.3 – 1.5
1.6 – 1.7

15
18
21

D
E
F

1.8 – 1.9
2.0 – 2.2
2.3 – 2.5

24
27
30

A
B
C

2.6 – 3.1
3.2 – 3.6
3.7 – 3.9

35
42
49

D
E
F

4.3 – 4.7
4.8 – 5.2
5.3 – 5.7

56
63
70

A
B
C

5.7 – 6.8
6.9 – 7.9
8.0 – 9.1

75
90
105

D
E
F

9.2 – 10.3
10.4 – 11.4
11.5 – 12.6

120
135
150

A
B
C

12.7 – 13.7
13.8 – 16.0
16.1 – 18.3

150
180
210

D
E
F

18.4 – 20.6
20.7 – 22.9
23.0 – 25.2

240
270
300

A
B
C

19.3 – 22.9
23.0 – 26.8
26.9 – 30.6

250
300
350

D
E
F

30.7 – 34.5
34.6 – 38.3
38.4 – 42.1

400
450
500

A
B
C

23.1 – 27.5
27.7 – 32.2
32.3 – 36.7

300
360
420

D
E
F

36.9 – 41.4
41.5 – 46.0
46.2 – 50.5

480
540
600

A
B
C

24.2 – 32.1
29.1 – 34.8
33.9 – 39.4

320
380
440

D
E
F

38.8 – 46.4
43.6 – 48.9
48.5 – 53.7

500
570
630

HMCPE050K2C

1

2

HMCPE070M2C 2

HMCPE100R3C

HMCPE100T3C






3

3

30

50

70

10
0

10
0

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

20

Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes 

MCP
Trip
Setting

A
B
C

.69 – .91
1.1 – 1.3
1.6 – 1.7

9
15
21

D
E
F

2.0 – 2.2
2.3 – 2.5
2.3 – 2.6

27
30
33

A
B
C

1.5 – 2.0
2.6 – 3.1
3.7 – 3.9

21
35
49

D
E
F

4.8 – 5.2
5.3 – 5.7
5.8 – 6.1

63
70
77

24

A
B
C

3.4 – 4.5
5.7 – 6.8
8.0 – 9.1

45
75
105

25

D
E
F

10.4 – 11.4
11.5 – 12.6
12.7 – 13.0

135
150
165

26

A
B
C

3.9 – 9.1
11.5 – 13.7
16.1 – 18.3

90
150
210

D
E
F

20.7 – 22.9
23.0 – 25.2
25.3 – 26.1

270
300
330

A
B
C

11.5 – 15.2
19.2 – 22.9
26.9 – 30.6

150
250
350

D
E
F

34.6 – 38.3
38.4 – 42.1
42.2 – 43.5

450
500
550

A
B
C

16.1 – 30.6
26.9 – 32.2
37.6 – 42.9

210
350
490

D
E
F

48.4 – 53.7
53.8 – 59.1
59.2 – 60.9

630
700
770

31

A
B
C

23.0 – 30.6
38.4 – 46.0
53.8 – 61.4

300
500
700

32

D
E
F

69.2 – 76.8
76.9 – 84.5
84.6 – 87.0

900
1000
1100

33

A
B
C

38.4 – 46.0
53.8 – 61.4
69.2 – 76.8

500
700
900

34

D
E
F

84.6 – 76.8

110
1300
1500

35

Cam
Setting






21

Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at
13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is
required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or
MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of
the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.
For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher
than values shown.
Settings above 10x In are for special applications. NEC Article 430-110(a)
requires the ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be no less
than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating.

Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at
13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is
required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or
MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of
the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.

CA08104001E

21.3-37

22
23

27
28
29
30

36
37
38
39
40

21.3-38 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors
Table 21.3-91. F-Frame (Also Available with Earth Leakage Ground Fault)

20

MCP
Trip
Setting 

MCP
Catalog
Number

NEMA Continuous
Starter Amperes
Size

Cam
Motor
Setting Full Load
Current
Amperes 


HMCP003A0

0, 1

A
B
C

.69 – .91
.92 – 1.0
1.1 – 1.2

9
12
15

D
E
F

1.3 – 1.5
1.6 – 1.7
1.8 – 1.9

G
H

24
25

21

January 2005
Sheet 0634

(Continued)
MCP
Catalog
Number

NEMA Continuous
Starter Amperes
Size

Cam
Motor
Setting Full Load
Current
Amperes 

MCP
Trip
Setting 

A
B
C

16.1 – 21.4
21.5 – 26.8
26.9 – 32.2

210
280
350

18
21
24

D
E
F

32.3 – 37.5
37.6 – 42.9
43.0 – 48.3

420
490
560

2.0 – 2.2
2.3 – 2.5

27
30

G
H

48.4 – 53.7
53.8 – 59.1

630
700

A
B
C

1.5 – 2.0
2.1 – 2.5
2.6 – 3.1

21
28
35

A
B
C

23.0 – 30.6
30.7 – 38.3
38.4 – 46.0

300
400
500

D
E
F

3.2 – 3.6
3.7 – 3.9
4.3 – 4.7

42
49
56

D
E
F

46.1 – 53.7
53.8 – 61.4
61.5 – 69.1

600
700
800

G
H

4.8 – 5.2
5.3 – 5.7

63
70

G
H

69.2 – 76.8
76.9 – 84.5

900
1000

A
B
C

3.4 – 4.5
4.6 – 5.6
5.7 – 6.8

45
60
75

A
B
C

34.6 – 46.0
46.1 – 57.5
57.6 – 69.1

450
600
750

27

D
E
F

6.9 – 7.9
8.0 – 9.1
9.2 – 10.3

90
105
120

D
E
F

69.2 – 80.6
80.7 – 92.2
92.3 – 103.7

900
1050
1200

28

G
H

10.4 – 11.4
11.5 – 12.6

135
150

G
H

103.8 – 115.2
115.3 – 126.7

1350
1500

A
B
C

6.9 – 9.1
9.2 – 11.4
11.5 – 13.7

90
120
150

A
B
C

57.0 – 75.0
76.0 – 95.0
96.0 – 114.0

750
1000
1250

D
E
F

13.8 – 16.0
16.1 – 18.3
18.4 – 20.6

180
210
240

D
E
F

115.0 – 130.7



1500
1750
2000

G
H

20.7 – 22.9
23.0 – 25.2

270
300

G
H




2250
2500

A
B
C

11.5 – 15.2
15.3 – 19.1
19.2 – 22.9

150
200
250

D
E
F

23.0 – 26.8
26.9 – 30.6
30.7 – 34.5

300
350
400

G
H

34.6 – 38.3
38.4 – 42.1

450
500

3

22
23
HMCP007C0

26

HMCP015E0

HMCP030H1

0, 1

0, 1

1

7

15

30

29
30
31

HMCP050K2

32
33




34


35

2

50

HMCP070M2 2

HMCP100R3

HMCP150T4

3

4

HMCP150U4 4





70

100

150

150

Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at
13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is
required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or
MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of
the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.
For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher
than values shown.

Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at
13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is
required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or
MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of
the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.
For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher
than values shown.

36
37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0635

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors

Table 21.3-92. MCPs for Application with Motor Starters Equipped
with Electronic Overload Relays (Also available with Earth Leakage
Ground Fault)

20

(Continued)

MCP
Catalog
Number

MCP
NEMA Continuous Cam
Motor
Trip
Starter Amperes
Setting Full Load
Setting 
Size
Current


Amperes

MCP
Catalog
Number

HMCPS003A0

0, 1

HMCPS050K2C 2

HMCPS007C0

HMCPS015E0C

0, 1

0, 1

HMCPS030H1C 1






3

7

15

30

21.3-39

A
B
C

.69 – .91
.92 – 1.0
1.1 – 1.2

9
12
15

D
E
F

1.3 – 1.5
1.6 – 1.7
1.8 – 1.9

G
H

NEMA Continuous Cam
Motor
Starter Amperes
Setting Full Load
Size
Current
Amperes 

21



A
B
C

11.5 – 15.2
15.3 – 19.1
19.2 – 22.9

150
200
250

18
21
24

D
E
F

23.0 – 26.8
26.9 – 30.6
30.7 – 34.5

300
350
400

2.0 – 2.2
2.3 – 2.5

27
30

G
H

34.6 – 38.3
38.4 – 42.1

450
500

A
B
C

1.5 – 2.0
2.1 – 2.5
2.6 – 3.1

21
28
35

A
B
C

23.0 – 30.6
30.7 – 38.3
38.4 – 46.0

300
400
500

D
E
F

3.2 – 3.6
3.7 – 3.9
4.3 – 4.7

42
49
56

D
E
F

46.1 – 53.7
53.8 – 61.4
61.5 – 69.1

600
700
800

G
H

4.8 – 5.2
5.3 – 5.7

63
70

G
H

69.2 – 76.8
76.9 – 84.5

900
1000

A
B
C

3.4 – 4.5
4.6 – 5.6
5.7 – 6.8

45
60
75

A
B
C

34.6 – 46.0
46.1 – 57.5
57.6 – 69.1

450
600
750

27

D
E
F

6.9 – 7.9
90
8.0 – 9.1 105
9.2 – 10.3 120

D
E
F

69.2 – 80.6
900
80.7 – 92.2 1050
92.3 – 103.7 1200

28

G
H

10.4 – 11.4 135
11.5 – 12.6 150

G
H

103.8 – 115.2 1350
115.3 – 126.7 1500

A
B
C

6.9 – 9.1
90
9.2 – 11.4 120
11.5 – 13.7 150

A
B
C

57.0 – 75.0
750
76.0 – 95.0 1000
96.0 – 114.0 1250

29

D
E
F

13.8 – 16.0 180
16.1 – 18.3 210
18.4 – 20.6 240

D
E
F

115.0 – 130.7 1500

1750

2000

30

G
H

20.7 – 22.9 270
23.0 – 25.2 300

G
H




Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at
13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is
required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or
MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of
the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.
For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher
than values shown.

HMCPS100R3C 3

HMCP150T4C

HMCP150U4C






4

4

50

MCP
Trip
Setting

100

150

150

2250
2500

Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at
13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is
required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or
MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of
the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.
For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher
than values shown.
Settings above 130 amperes are for special applications. NEC Article
430-110(a) requires the ampere rating of the disconnecting means to
be not less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating.

22
23
24
25
26

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-40 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors

20

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0636

Table 21.3-93. J-Frame (Also available with Earth Leakage Ground Fault)

(Continued)

MCP
Catalog
Number 


NEMA Continuous Cam
Motor
Starter Amperes
Setting Full Load
Size
Current
Amperes 

MCP
Catalog
Number 

NEMA
Starter
Size

Continuous
Amperes

Cam
Setting

HMCP250A5

4
4
4

HMCP250J5

5
5
5

250

A
B
C

67.4 – 75.3
75.4 – 83.8
83.9 – 92.3

875
980
1090

21
22
23
24

TOC

HMCP250C5

MCP
Trip
Setting 

Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes 

A
B
C

27.0 – 30.7
30.8 – 33.8
33.9 – 36.9

350
400
440

5
5
5

D
E
F

37.0 – 40.3
40.4 – 43.8
43.9 – 46.9

480
525
570

5
5
5

D
E
F

92.4 – 100.7
100.8 – 109.2
109.3 – 117.6

1200
1310
1420

5
5
5

G
H
I

47.0 – 50.7
50.8 – 53.8
53.9 – 57.2

610
660
700

5
5
5

G
H
I

117.7 – 126.1
126.2 – 134.6
134.7 – 142.8

1530
1640
1750

A
B
C

34.7 – 38.8
38.9 – 43.4
43.5 – 47.6

450
505
565

A
B
C

77.0 – 86.5
86.6 – 96.1
96.2 – 105.7

1000
1125
1250

5
5
5

250

MCP
Trip
Setting 

250

HMCP250K5

5
5
5

250

25

5
5
5

D
E
F

47.7 – 52.2
52.3 – 56.5
56.6 – 60.7

620
680
735

5
5
5

D
E
F

105.8 – 115.3
115.4 – 124.9
125.0 – 134.6

1375
1500
1625

26

5
5
5

G
H
I

60.8 – 64.9
65.0 – 69.2
69.3 – 73.5

790
845
900

5
5
5

G
H
I

134.7 – 144.2
144.3 – 153.8
153.9 – 163.3

1750
1875
2000

A
B
C

38.5 – 43.4
43.5 – 48.0
48.1 – 53.0

500
565
625

A
B
C

86.6 – 97.3
97.4 – 108.4
108.5 – 118.8

1125
1265
1410

HMCP250D5

27

5
5
5

28

5
5
5

D
E
F

53.1 – 57.6
57.7 – 62.3
62.4 – 67.3

690
750
810

5
5
5

D
E
F

118.9 – 129.9
130.0 – 140.7
140.8 – 151.5

1545
1690
1830

5
5
5

G
H
I

67.4 – 71.9
72.0 – 76.9
77.0 – 81.6

875
935
1000

5
5
5

G
H
I

151.6 – 162.3
162.4 – 173.0
173.1 – 183.6

1970
2110
2250

A
B
C

48.1 – 53.8
53.9 – 59.9
60.0 – 66.1

625
700
780

A
B
C

96.2 – 108.0
108.1 – 119.9
120.0 – 132.3

1250
1405
1560

5
5
5

D
E
F

66.2 – 72.3
72.4 – 78.4
78.5 – 83.8

860
940
1020

5
5
5

D
E
F

132.4 – 144.2
144.3 – 156.1
156.2 – 168.0

1720
1875
2030

31

5
5
5

G
H
I

83.9 – 89.9
90.0 – 96.1
96.2 – 102.0

1090
1170
1250

5
5
5

G
H
I

168.1 – 179.9
180.0 – 192.3
192.4 – 204.0

2185
2340
2500

32

HMCP250G5 5
5
5

A
B
C

57.7 – 64.6
64.7 – 71.9
72.0 – 79.2

750
840
935

33

5
5
5

D
E
F

79.3 – 86.5
86.6 – 93.8
93.9 – 101.1

1030
1125
1220

5
5
5

G
H
I

101.2 – 108.4
108.5 – 115.3
115.4 – 122.4

1315
1410
1500

29

HMCP250F5

30

34



35



36


5
5
5

250

250

250

Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin
with “HM2P” in place of “HMCP.”
Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at
13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is
required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or
MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of
the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.
For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher
than values shown.

HMCP250L5

HMCP250W5






5
5
5

250

250

Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin
with “HM2P” in place of “HMCP.”
Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at
13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is
required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or
MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of
the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.
For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher
than values shown.

Table 21.3-94. JG-Frame 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Minimum 
Continuous
Amperes
250

37


38

5
5
5

MCP Trip Range
(Amperes)
500 – 1000
625 – 1250
750 – 1500

MCP
Catalog Number
HMCPJ250D5L
HMCPJ250F5L
HMCPJ250G5L

875 – 1750
HMCPJ250J5L
1000 – 2000
HMCPJ250K5L
1125 – 2250
HMCPJ250L5L
1250 – 2500
HMCPJ250W5L
UL listed for use with Cutler-Hammer Motor Starters.

39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0637

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors

Table 21.3-95. K-Frame

(Continued)

MCP
Catalog
Number 


NEMA Continuous
Starter Amperes
Size

HMCP400D5

5
5
5

HMCP400F5

HMCP400G5

HMCP400J5

HMCP400K5

HMCP400L5







21.3-41

Cam
Motor
Setting Full Load
Current
Amperes 

MCP
Trip
Setting 

MCP
Catalog
Number 

NEMA
Starter
Size

Continuous Cam
Amperes
Setting

Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes 

MCP
Trip
Setting 

HMCP400W5

5
5
5

400

A
B
C

96.2 – 108.0 1250
108.1 – 119.9 1405
120.0 – 132.3 1560

20
21

A
B
C

38.5 – 43.4
43.5 – 48.0
48.1 – 53.0

500
565
625

5
5
5

D
E
F

53.1 – 57.6
57.7 – 62.3
62.4 – 67.3

690
750
810

5
5
5

D
E
F

132.4 – 144.2 1720
144.3 – 156.1 1875
156.2 – 168.0 2030

5
5
5

G
H
I

67.4 – 71.9
72.0 – 76.9
77.0 – 81.6

875
935
1000

5
5
5

G
H
I

168.1 – 179.9 2185
180.0 – 192.3 2340
192.4 – 204.0 2500

A
B
C

48.1 – 53.8
53.9 – 59.9
60.0 – 66.1

625
700
780

A
B
C

115.4 – 129.9 1500
130.0 – 144.2 1690
144.3 – 158.4 1875

24

5
5
5

D
E
F

66.2 – 72.3
72.4 – 78.4
78.5 – 83.8

860
940
1020

5
5
5

D
E
F

158.5 – 173.0 2060
173.1 – 187.6 2250
187.7 – 201.9 2440

25

5
5
5

G
H
I

83.9 – 89.9
90.0 – 96.1
96.2 – 102.0

1090
1170
1250

5
5
5

G
H
I

202.0 – 216.1 2625
216.2 – 230.7 2810
230.8 – 244.9 3000

26

A
B
C

57.7 – 64.6
64.7 – 71.9
72.0 – 79.2

750
840
935

A
B
C

134.7 – 151.5 1750
151.6 – 168.4 1970
168.5 – 185.3 2190

5
5
5

D
E
F

79.3 – 86.5
86.6 – 93.8
93.9 – 101.1

1030
1125
1220

5
5
5

D
E
F

185.4 – 201.9 2410
202.0 – 218.8 2625
218.9 – 235.7 2845

5
5
5

G
H
I

101.2 – 108.4
108.5 – 115.3
115.4 – 122.4

1315
1410
1500

5
5
5

G
H
I

235.8 – 252.6 3065
252.7 – 269.2 3285
269.3 – 285.7 3500

A
B
C

67.4 – 75.3
75.4 – 83.8
83.9 – 92.3

875
980
1090

A
B
C

153.9 – 173.0 2000
173.1 – 192.3 2250
192.4 – 211.5 2500

5
5
5

D
E
F

92.4 – 100.7
100.8 – 109.2
109.3 – 117.6

1200
1310
1420

5
5
5

D
E
F

211.6 – 230.7 2750
230.8 – 249.9 3000
250.0 – 269.2 3250

5
5
5

G
H
I

117.7 – 126.1
126.2 – 134.6
134.7 – 142.8

1530
1640
1750

5
5
5

G
H
I

269.3 – 288.4 3500
288.5 – 307.6 3750
307.7 – 326.9 4000

A
B
C

77.0 – 86.5
86.6 – 96.1
96.2 – 105.7

1000
1125
1250

5
5
5

D
E
F

105.8 – 115.3
115.4 – 124.9
125.0 – 134.6

1375
1500
1625

5
5
5

G
H
I

134.7 – 144.2
144.3 – 153.8
153.9 – 163.3

1750
1875
2000

A
B
C

86.6 – 97.3
97.4 – 108.4
108.5 – 118.8

1125
1265
1410

5
5
5

D
E
F

118.9 – 129.9
130.0 – 140.7
140.8 – 151.5

1545
1690
1830

5
5
5

G
H
I

151.6 – 162.3
162.4 – 173.0
173.1 – 183.6

1970
2110
2250

5
5
5

5
5
5

5
5
5

5
5
5

5
5
5

400

400

400

400

400

400

HMCP400N5

HMCP400R5

HMCP400X5






5
5
5

5
5
5

5
5
5

400

400

400

Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin
with “HM2P” in place of “HMCP.”
Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at
13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is
required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or
MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of the
NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.
For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher
than values shown.

Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin
with “HM2P” in place of “HMCP.”
Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at
13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is
required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or
MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of the
NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.
For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher
than values shown.

22
23

27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-42 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors
Table 21.3-96. L-Frame 


20
21

MCP
Catalog
Number

600

Cam
Motor Full
Setting Load Current
Amperes 

MCP
Trip
Setting

MCP
Catalog
Number

A
B
C

138.5 – 184.5
184.6 – 230.7
230.8 – 276.8

1800
2400
3000

HMCP800X7W 7
7
7
7
7
7

22

6
6
6

D
E
F

276.9 – 323.0
323.1 – 369.1
369.2 – 415.3

3600
4200
4800

23

6
6

G
H

415.4 – 461.4
461.5 – 507.7

5400
6000

A
B
C

138.5 – 184.5
184.6 – 230.7
230.8 – 276.8

1800
2400
3000

6
6
6

D
E
F

276.9 – 323.0
323.1 – 369.1
369.2 – 415.3

3600
4200
4800

6
6

G
H

415.4 – 461.4
461.5 – 507.7

5400
6000

A
B
C

38.5 – 46.1
46.2 – 61.4
61.5 – 76.8

500
600
800

24

HMCP600L6W 6
6
6

25

600

26

HMCP600X6W 6
6
6

27

6
6
6

D
E
F

76.9 – 96.1
96.2 – 115.3
115.4 – 153.7

1000
1250
1500

6
6

G
H

153.8 – 192.2
192.3 – 230.7

2000
2500

A
B
C

76.9 – 96.1
96.2 – 115.3
115.4 – 153.7

1000
1250
1500

6
6
6

D
E
F

153.8 – 192.2
192.3 – 230.7
230.8 – 269.1

2000
2500
3000

6
6

G
H

269.2 – 307.6
307.7 – 346.1

3500
4000

28

HMCP600Y6W 6
6
6

29
30



31
32



Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0638

Table 21.3-97. N-Frame 

NEMA Continuous
Starter Amperes
Size

HMCP600L6W 6
6
6

TOC

600

600

Equipped with electronic trip device.
Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at
13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is
required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or
MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of
the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors.

NEMA Continuous
Starter Amperes
Size
800

7
HMCP12Y8W




Cam
Motor Full
Setting Load Current
Amperes 

MCP
Trip
Setting

A
B
C

123.1 – 184.5
184.6 – 246.1
246.2 – 307.6

1600
2400
3200

D
E
F

307.7 – 369.1
369.2 – 430.7
430.8 – 492.2

4000
4800
5600

G

492.3 – 553.7

6400

A
B
C

184.6 – 276.8
276.9 – 369.1
369.2 – 461.4

2400
3600
4800

7
7
7

D
E
F

461.5 – 553.7
553.8 – 646.1
646.2 – 738.4

6000
7200
8400

7

G

738.5 – 830.7

9600

7
7
7

1200

Equipped with electronic trip device.
Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at
13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is
required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or
MCP ratings should be used.

Table 21.3-98. LG-Frame 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Minimum 
Continuous
Amperes

MCP Trip Range
(Amperes)

MCP
Catalog Number

250

1125 – 2250
1500 – 3000
1750 – 3500

HMCPL600L
HMCPL600N
HMCPL600R

2000 – 4000
2250 – 4500
2500 – 5000
3000 – 6000

HMCPL600X
HMCPL600Y
HMCPL600P
HMCPL600M




UL listed for use with Cutler-Hammer Motor Starters.
Equipped with an electronic trip device.

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0639

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

21.3-43

Selection Data — Trip Units

Electronic RMS Trip Unit

Electronic trip units are applied to
distribution systems when high standards of protection and coordination
are called for. In addition, electronic
trip units can provide further enhanced
features such as alarming, diagnostics,
system monitoring and communications.

General
Eaton offers the most comprehensive
range of electronic trip units in the
industry for Molded Case Circuit
Breakers. All electronic trip units are
rms sensing and can be applied from
70 amperes up through 2500 amperes.
Eaton offers electronic trip units as
standard for circuit breakers rated
800 amperes and above and offers
electronic trip units as optional for
circuit breakers 70 amperes up
through 600 amperes.

Cutler-Hammer rms sensing trip
units fall into two main categories:
Front adjustable trip units
(Digitrip RMS 310, 310+, 510, 610,
810 and 910).
■ Programmable trip units
(Digitrip OPTIM 550 and 1050).
■

Digitrip electronic trip units are ac
devices that employ microprocessorbased technology that provides a true
rms current sensing means for proper
correlation with thermal characteristics
of conductors and equipment. The primary function of the Digitrip electronic
trip unit is to provide circuit protection.
This is achieved by analyzing the secondary current signals received from
the circuit breaker current sensors and
initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker
shunt trip when pre-set current levels
and time delay settings are exceeded.

Front Adjustable Trip Units
Front adjustable trip units are electronic trip units that have up to nine
time-current setting options that are
set by switches mounted on the front
of the trip unit. The application for
front adjustable trip units would be
distribution systems that can be coordinated within the range of settings
available and that do not require
sophisticated coordination strategies
to be applied down through the distribution system to small rated breakers.

Programmable Trip Units (OPTIM)
Programmable trip units are electronic
trip units that have up to ten timecurrent setting options that are programmed electronically by the use of a
programming device. The application
for programmable trip units would be
high integrity distribution systems that
require superior levels of system coordination coupled with system alarming,
diagnostics and monitoring.

Rating Plugs
Rating plugs provide a means to establish
the breaker’s continuous current rating.
Rating plugs are color-coded and interchangeable to make it easy to match
the correct rating plug with the correct
trip unit. The same rating plug can be
applied to both 50 and 60 Hz distribution
systems. In general, most rating plugs
are of the fixed ampere rating type.
Eaton does offer an adjustable rating
plug as an option for the Digitrip RMS
310 trip unit.

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

Table 21.3-99. The Digitrip Family of Low Voltage Electronic Trip Units
RMS 310

RMS 310+

RMS 510

OPTIM 550

RMS 610

RMS 810

RMS 910

OPTIM 1050

30
31
32
33

rms Sensing
—
5 Functions
—
Front Adjustable




rms Sensing
—
6 Functions
—
Front Adjustable

rms Sensing
—
9 Functions
—
Front Adjustable
—
Zone Selective
Interlocking

rms Sensing
—
10 Functions
—
Programmable
—
Load Monitoring
—
Diagnostics
—
Zone Selective
Interlocking 

—
Communications 


rms Sensing
—
9 Functions
—
Front Adjustable
—
Zone Selective
Interlocking
—
Load Monitoring
—
Diagnostics

rms Sensing
—
9 Functions
—
Front Adjustable
—
Zone Selective
Interlocking
—
Load Monitoring
—
Diagnostics
—
Communications
—
Power and Energy
Monitoring

rms Sensing
—
9 Functions
—
Front Adjustable
—
Zone Selective
Interlocking
—
Load Monitoring
—
Diagnostics
—
Communications
—
Power and Energy
Monitoring
—
Harmonics

rms Sensing
—
10 Functions
—
Programmable
—
Zone Selective
Interlocking
—
Load Monitoring
—
Diagnostics
—
Communications
—
Power and Energy
Monitoring
—
Harmonics

34
35
36
37
38

Optional features.

39
40
CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-44 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

Selection Data — Electronic Trip Units

20
21
22

January 2005
Sheet 0640

Molded Case Circuit Breaker Digitrip Selection Guide
Table 21.3-100. Molded Case Circuit Breaker Digitrip Selection Guide
Trip Unit
Type

Digitrip
RMS 310

Digitrip
RMS 310+

Digitrip
RMS 510

Digitrip
OPTIM 550

Digitrip
RMS 610

Digitrip
RMS 810

Digitrip
RMS 910

Digitrip
OPTIM 1050

rms Sensing

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

JG, LG
20 – 600 A
35, 65, 100 (kA)

R
800 – 2500 A
65, 100 (kA)

K, L, N
70 – 2500 A
35, 65, 100 (kA)

R
800 – 2500 A
65, 100 (kA)

R
800 – 2500 A
65, 100 (kA)

R
800 – 2500 A
65, 100 (kA)

K, L, N, R
70 – 2500 A
35, 65, 100 (kA)

LS LSI
LSG LSIG

LI, LS, LSI, LIG,
LSG, LSIG

LSI, LSI(A),
LSIG

LI, LS, LSI,
LSG, LSIG

LI, LS, LSI, LIG,
LSG, LSIG

LI, LS, LSI, LIG,
LSG, LSIG

LSI(A), LISG

No
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Breaker Type
Frame
K, L, N, R
Ampere Range
70 – 2500 A
Interrupting Rating at 480 V 35, 65, 100 (kA)

23

Protection
Ordering Options

LS
LSG

24

Fixed Rated Plug (In)
Overtemperature Trip

Yes
Yes

LSI
LSIG

Long Delay Protection (L)

25

Adjustable Rating Plug (In) Yes
Long Delay Pickup
0.5 – 1.0(In) 

Long Delay Time I2t
12 Seconds

No
No
40 – 100% Frame 0.5 – 1.0 x (In)
2 – 24 Seconds
2 – 24 Seconds

No
0.4 – 1.0 x (In)
2 – 24 Seconds

No
0.5 – 1.0 x (In)
2 – 24 Seconds

No
0.5 – 1.0 x (In)
2 – 24 Seconds

No
0.5 – 1.0 x (In)
2 – 24 Seconds

No
0.4 – 1.0 x (In)
2 – 24 Seconds

26

Long Delay Time I4t
Long Delay
Thermal Memory
High Load Alarm

No
Yes

No
Yes

No
Yes

1 – 5 Seconds
Yes

No
Yes

No
Yes

No
Yes

1 – 5 Seconds
Yes

No

Yes

No

0.5 – 1.0 x Ir

0.85 x Ir

0.85 x Ir

0.85 x Ir

0.5 – 1.0 x Ir

Short Delay Pickup

200 – 800% x (In)

—

200 – 600%
S1&S2 x (Ir)

200 – 600%
S1&S2 x (Ir)

200 – 600%
S1&S2 x (Ir)

200 – 600%
S1&S2 x (Ir)

Short Delay Time I2t
Short Delay Time Flat

100 ms No
Yes No
100 – 500 ms
No
Inst – 300 ms No Inst – 300 ms 100 – 500 ms

150 – 800%
x (Ir)
100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms

100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms

100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms

100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms

150 – 800%
x (Ir)
100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms

Short Delay Time Z.S.I.

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

200 – 600%
M1&M2 x (In)

20 – 600%
M1&M2 x (In)

200 – 800%
x (In)

Yes 
Yes

Yes 
Yes

Yes
Yes

Short Delay Protection (S)

27
28

No

Yes

Optional 

No

200 – 600%
M1&M2 x (In)

200 – 800% x (In) 200 – 600%
M1&M2 x (In)

Yes 
Yes

Yes
Yes

Instantaneous Protection (I)

29
30
31
32
33

Instantaneous Pickup

No

200 – 800%
x (In)

Discriminator
Instantaneous Override

No
Yes

No
Yes

Ground Fault Alarm
Ground Fault Pickup
Ground Fault Delay I2t

No
var/Frame 
No

No
No
20/25 – 100%  No
No
No
20/25 – 100% 
20 – 100% Frame 25 – 100% x In  20/25 – 100% 
25 – 100% x In  25 – 100% x In  25 – 100% x In  20/25 – 100% 
No
100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms

Ground Fault Delay Flat
Ground Fault Z.S.I.
Ground Fault
Thermal Memory

Ins – 500 ms
No
Yes

—
No
Yes

100 – 500 ms
Yes
Yes

100 – 500 ms
Optional 
Yes

100 – 500 ms
Yes
Yes

100 – 500 ms
Yes
Yes

100 – 500 ms
Yes
Yes

100 – 500 ms
Yes
Yes

No
No

No
No

Yes
No

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

No

No

No

Optional 

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes 
Yes
No

Yes 
Yes

Ground Fault Protection (G)

System Diagnostics
Cause of Trip LEDs
Magnitude of Trip
Information
Remote Signal Contacts
System Monitoring

34

Digital Display
Current
Voltage

No
No
No

No
No
No

No
No
No

Yes 
Yes
No

Yes
Yes
No

Yes
Yes
No

35

Power and Energy
Power Quality-Harmonics
Power Factor

No 
No
No

No
No
No

No
No
No

No
No
No

No
No
No

Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes (Over
Yes
PowerNet Only)

Yes
Yes
Yes

36

Communications
No

No

No

Optional 

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Test Set

Test Kit

Integral

Integral
OPTIMizer,
BIM, PowerNet 

Integral

Integral

OPTIMizer,
BIM, PowerNet

PowerNet
Testing

37

Testing Method



38






39




Adjust by rating plug.
Must install as field upgrade, or factory option.
LS/LSG only.
Not to exceed 1200 amperes.
L and N Frames *20-100% x Is. R Frame *25-100% x In.
By OPTIMizer/BIM.
Yes with addition of Energy Sentinel.

BIM
Is
In
Ir
(A)

=
=
=
=
=

Breaker Interface Module
Sensor Rating
Rating Plug
LDPU Setting x In
GF Alarm

40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0641

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

Internal Accessories
Note: Some UL listings pending: refer
to Eaton.

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Accessories and Modifications
Alarm (Signal)/Lockout Switch
Make
Break

All internal accessories are of the plug-in
type and are listed for field installation
under UL File E64983. Internal accessories for sealed circuit breakers are
listed under UL File E7819 for factory
installation only. The available plug-in
accessories include the following:
■
■
■
■
■

21.3-45

Alarm (Signal)/Lockout Switch

Alarm (signal)/lockout switch.
Auxiliary switch.
Shunt trip.
Low energy shunt trip.
Undervoltage release mechanism.

The alarm (signal)/lockout switch
monitors circuit breaker trip status and
provides remote signaling and interlocking capabilities when the circuit
breaker trips. For 2-, 3- and 4-pole circuit
breakers, the alarm (signal)/lockout
switch consists of one or two SPDT
switches assembled to a plug-in module
mounted in retaining slots in the top of
the trip unit. The SPDT switch contacts
are identified as make and break contacts. When the circuit breaker trips,
the make contact closes and the break
contact opens.

Auxiliary Switch

Auxiliary Switch

The auxiliary switch provides circuit
breaker contact status information by
monitoring the position of the molded
crossbar containing the moving contact arms. The auxiliary switch is used
for remote signaling and interlocking
purposes, and consists of one or two
SPDT switches assembled to a plug-in
module mounted in retaining slots in
the top of the trip unit. Each SPDT
switch has one “a” and one “b” contact.
When the circuit breaker contacts are
open, the ”a“ contact is open and the
“b” contact is closed.

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

Shunt Trip
The shunt trip provides remote controlled
tripping of the circuit breaker. The shunt
trip consists of an intermittent rated
solenoid with a tripping plunger and
a cutoff switch assembled to a plug-in
module. When required for ground
fault protection applications, certain ac
rated shunt trips are suitable for operation at 55% of rated voltage.

ST

a

Typical Internal Plug-in Accessory Installed
in K-Frame Circuit Breaker

Different accessory wiring options are
available to satisfy most circuit breaker
mounting applications. The standard
wiring configuration is pigtail leads exiting the rear of the base directly behind
the accessory. Optional configurations
include a terminal block mounted on the
same side of the base as the accessory,
leads exiting the side of the base where
the accessory is mounted, and leads
exiting the rear of the base on the side
opposite the accessory. If accessory
leads longer than 18 inches (457.2) are
required, side-mounted terminal blocks
should be used.

Available in most ac and dc voltages.
Shunt Trip
Note: Approximate unlatching time —
6 milliseconds. Approximate total circuit
breaker contact opening time — 18 milliseconds. Endurance — 4000 electrical operations
plus 1000 mechanical operations. Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices.
Marking label included with accessory kits.

PowerNet Communications Kit
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer PowerNet
Communications Kit provides the
option to field install PowerNet communications into a K-, L- or N-Frame
OPTIM 550 breaker.

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

PowerNet Communications Kit

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-46 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Accessories and Modifications

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0642

Low Energy Shunt Trip

20

ST
LE

21
22
23
24

Low energy shunt trip devices are
designed to operate from low energy
output signals from dedicated current
sensors typically applied in ground fault
protection schemes. However, with a
proper control voltage source, they may
be applied in place of conventional trip
devices for special applications. Flux
paths surrounding permanent magnets
used in the shunt trip assembly hold
a charged spring poised in readiness
to operate the circuit breaker trip

mechanism. When a 100 microfarad
capacitor charged to 28 Vdc is discharged
through the shunt trip coil, the resultant
flux opposes the permanent magnet flux
field, which releases the stored energy in
the spring to trip the circuit breaker. As
the circuit breaker resets, the reset arm
is actuated by the circuit breaker handle,
resetting the shunt trip. The plug-in module
is mounted in retaining slots in the top of
the trip unit. Coil is intermittent-rated only.
Cutoff provisions required in control circuit.

Undervoltage Release Mechanism
The undervoltage release mechanism
monitors a voltage (typically a line voltage)
and trips the circuit breaker when the
voltage falls to between 70 and 35% of
the solenoid coil rating.

The tab on the tripping lever resets
the undervoltage release mechanism
when normal voltage has been restored
and the circuit breaker handle is moved
to the reset (OFF) position.

26

Note: Undervoltage release mechanism
accessories are not designed for, and
should not be used as, circuit interlocks.

27

The undervoltage release mechanism
consists of a continuous rated solenoid
with a plunger and tripping lever
assembled to a plug-in module.

With no voltage applied to the undervoltage release mechanism, the circuit
breaker contacts will not touch when a
closing operation is attempted.

UV

25

28

Non-Padlockable Handle Block

30

The nonlockable handle block secures
the circuit breaker handle in either the
ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation
allows the circuit breaker to trip when the
handle block holds the circuit breaker

31

Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp

29

32
33
34
35
36

The padlockable handle lock hasp allows
the handle to be locked in the ON or OFF
position. (Trip-free operation allows the
circuit breaker to trip when the handle
lock holds the circuit breaker handle in
the ON position.) The hasp mounts on
the circuit breaker cover within the

handle in the ON position.) The device
is positioned over the circuit breaker
handle and secured by a setscrew to
deter accidental operation of the circuit
breaker handle. (Field installation only.)

trimline. The cover is predrilled on both
sides of the operating handle so that the
hasp can be mounted on either side of the
handle. The hasp will accommodate up
to three padlocks with 1/4-inch (6.4 mm)
shackles. One per circuit breaker. (Field
installation only.)

Key Interlock Kit (Lock Not Included)
The key interlock is used to externally
lock the circuit breaker handle in the OFF
position. When the key interlock is
locked, an extended deadbolt blocks
movement of the circuit breaker handle.
Uniquely coded keys are removable only
with the deadbolt extended. Each coded
key controls a group of circuit breakers
for a given specific customer installation.

37

The key interlock assembly consists of
a mounting kit and a purchaser supplied
deadbolt lock. The mounting kit comprises a mounting plate, which is
secured to the circuit breaker cover in
either the left- or right-pole position;
key interlock mounting hardware; and
a wire seal. Specific mounting kits are
required for individual key interlock types.
(Field installation only.)

Padlockable Handle Block

38
39

The device is positioned in the cover
opening to prevent handle movement.
Will accommodate one 5/16-inch
(8.0 mm) padlock.

40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0643

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

21.3-47

Accessories and Modifications

Table 21.3-101. Breaker Accessories and Modifications
Breaker Frame

G

F

J

K

L

M

N

20

R

Termination Accessories
●

●

Plug Nut

●

●

Control Wire Terminal Kit

●

●

Line and Load Terminals

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Interphase Barriers

●

●

●

●

Multiwire Connectors

●

●

●

●

●

●


●

●

●

●

Alarm Lockout (2 Make/2 Break)
Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B)

●

●

Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B)

●

●

Auxiliary Switch (3A, 3B)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
●

●

●

●

●

●

●

23
●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

26

●

●

Auxiliary Switch (3A, 3B)/Alarm Lockout
●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Cylinder Lock

●

●

●

Key Interlock Kit

●

●

●

●

●

●

Sliding Bar Interlock 

●

●

●

●

●

●

Walking Beam Interlock 

●

●

●

●

●

Electrical (Solenoid) Operator

●

●

●

●

●

●

IQ Energy Sentinel

●

●

●

LFD Current Limiter

●

Plug-in Adapters

●

●

●

●

●

●

Rear Connecting Studs

●

●

●

●

●

●

Panelboard Connecting Straps

●

●

●

●

●

●
●

●

Low Energy Shunt Trip
Undervoltage Release Mechanism

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Padlockable Handle Block
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp

●

●

●

●
●

Door Hardware/Accessories

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Handle Extension

34

Special Calibration

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Moisture Fungus Treatment

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Marine Application

●

●

●

●

●

●

●



31

33

Modifications 



30

32

●

Solid-State (Electronic) Test Kit




29

●

Drawout Cassette

Handle Mechanisms

●

●

Electrical (Motor) Operator

27
28

External Accessories
Non-Padlockable Handle Block

25

●

Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B)/Alarm Lockout
Standard Shunt Trip

24

●

Auxiliary Switch (4A, 4B)
Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B)/Alarm Lockout

22

●

Internal Accessories
Alarm Lockout (1 Make/1 Break)

21

●

Terminal Shields

Base Mounting Hardware

●

●

35
36
37

Make only (one pole).
Requires two breakers.
Refer to the Eaton.

38
39
40
CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-48 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

Accessories and Modifications

20
21

Sheet 0644

EG-Frame Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the
circuit breaker.
Table 21.3-102. Accessories
Description

22

January 2005

1-Pole

2-Pole

Center

Left

3-Pole
Right

Left

4-Pole
Center

Right

Left

Center

Right

Neu.

Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole)
Alarm Lockout Switch (Make Only)

23
24
25

Alarm Lockout (Make/Break)

■

■

■

Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break)

■

■

■

Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B)

■

■

■

Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B)

■

■

■

Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination

■

■

■

Shunt Trip — Standard

■

■

Shunt Trip — Low Energy

■

■

Undervoltage Release Mechanism

■

■

External Accessories

26
27
28
29

●

●

●

Control Wire Terminal Kit

●

●

●

●

Multiwire Connectors

●

●

●

●

Base Mounting Hardware

●

●

●

●

Terminal Shields

●

●

●

●

End Cap Kit

●

Terminal End Covers
●

Interphase Barriers
Non-padlockable Handle Block

■

■

Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp

■

■

●

Plug-In Adapters
Rear Connecting Studs

●

❏

32

❏

❏
●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Moisture Fungus Treatment

●

●

●

●

Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers

●

●

●

●

Marine Application

●

●

●

■ Applicable in indicated pole position

33

■
❏

●

Handle Mechanisms

31

■

■
■

Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
Walking Beam Interlock — Requires Two Breakers

30

●

■

❏ May be mounted on left or right pole —
not both

●
● Accessory available/Modification available

34
35
36
37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0645

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

21.3-49

Accessories and Modifications

JG-Frame Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the
circuit breaker.

21

Table 21.3-103. Accessories
Description

20

2- and 3-Pole
Left

4-Pole
Center

Right

Left

Center

Right

Neu.

Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole)
Alarm Lockout (Make/Break)

■

■

Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B)

■

■

Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B)

■

■

■

Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
■

■

Shunt Trip — Low Energy

■

■

Undervoltage Release Mechanism

■

■

24
25

External Accessories
End Cap Kit

●

●

Plug Nut

●

●

Control Wire Terminal Kit

●

●

Multiwire Connectors

●

●

Base Mounting Hardware

●

●

Terminal Shields

●

●

Interphase Barriers

●

●

Non-padlockable Handle Block

■

Padlockable Handle Block

■

26
27

■

28

■

❏

❏

Cylinder Lock

❏

❏

Key Interlock Kit

❏

❏

23

■

Shunt Trip — Standard

Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp

22

❏

❏

❏

❏

Sliding Bar Interlock — Requires Two Breakers

●

Electrical Operator

●

●

Plug-In Adapters

●

●

Rear Connecting Studs

●

●

Panelboard Connecting Straps

●

●

Handle Mechanisms

●

●

Handle Extension

●

●

IQ Energy Sentinel

●

29
30
31
32

Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Special Calibration

●

●

Moisture Fungus Treatment

●

●

Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers

●

●

Marine/Naval Application

●

●

■ Applicable in indicated pole position

❏ May be mounted on left or right pole —
not both

33
● Accessory available/Modification available

34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-50 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Application Information

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35

Circuit Voltage

Circuit Frequency

Molded case circuit breakers are rated
by voltage class and should be applied
only to system voltages within their
rating. The voltage rating is determined
by the maximum voltage that can be
applied across its terminals, the type
of distribution system and how the
breaker is applied in the system.

The tripping characteristics of most
molded case circuit breakers remain
virtually constant when applied to
frequencies of 50 and 60 hertz. On higher
frequency applications, molded case
circuit breakers must usually be specially
calibrated and/or derated. The amount
of derating depends upon the frame
size and ampere rating as well as the
current frequency. In general, the higher
the ampere rating in a given frame
size, the greater the derating required.

Circuit breakers listed for use at 120/240
volts may be applied on 120/240 volt
grounded systems. For applications
on 240 volt ungrounded systems apply
only circuit breakers rated 240 volts
(with no “slash” rating) or higher.
Circuit breakers rated 277/480 volts are
suitable for application on 277/480 volt
grounded wye systems and are not for
application on 480 volt ungrounded
delta systems. Apply circuit breakers
rated 480 volts (with no “slash” rating)
or higher on 480 volt ungrounded
delta systems.
UL 489 provides standards for testing
the individual poles of 2-pole and
3-pole MCCBs. The test current is
generally lower than the interrupting
rating of the MCCB. This capability
is necessary for breakers applied on
corner-grounded delta systems where
single line-to-ground faults may be
interrupted by only a single pole of
a circuit breaker with full line-to-line
voltage across that single interrupting
pole. MCCBs should not be used on
circuits where the available fault current
exceeds the level at which individual
poles were short circuit tested at
line-to-line voltage.
Note: On all three-phase Delta, grounded
B Phase applications, refer to Eaton.

Thermal-magnetic molded case circuit
breakers applied at frequencies above
60 hertz could require that individual
consideration be given to thermal
performance, magnetic performance
and interrupting capabilities.
Electronic trip units are usually
calibrated for 50/60 hertz, although
operation at higher frequencies is
achievable with the use of special
derating factors and specially sized
cable or bus.
Avoid making circuit breaker performance assumptions on applications
above 60 hertz. Consult Eaton for any
Cutler-Hammer molded case circuit
breaker above 60 hertz.

Continuous Ampere Rating
Molded case circuit breakers are rated
in rms amperes at a specific ambient.
This ampere rating is the continuous
current they will carry in the ambient
temperature for which they are
calibrated. Cutler-Hammer thermalmagnetic breakers are calibrated for
an ambient temperature 40°C (104°F)
which is the average temperature within
an enclosure; thus, they minimize the
need for derating. If the enclosure
ambient is known to exceed 40°C, the
breaker used should either be especially
calibrated for that ambient, or be
derated accordingly.

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0646

The selection of a specific ampere
rating for a given application is dependent upon the type of load and duty
cycle, and is governed by the National
Electrical Code. In general, the NEC
requires overcurrent protection at the
supply and at points where wire sizes
are reduced. It further states that the
conductors be protected in accordance
with their current carrying capacity,
but lists exceptions for applications
such as motor circuits where a larger
rating is often required to override
motor inrush currents.

Cable Selection
UL listed circuit breakers rated 125 A
or less shall be marked as being
suitable for 60°C (140°F), 75°C (167°F)
only or 60/75°C (140/167°F) wire. All
Cutler-Hammer listed breakers rated
125 A or less are marked 60/75°C. All
UL listed circuit breakers rated over
125 A are suitable for 75°C conductors.
Conductors rated for higher temperatures may be used, but must not be
loaded to carry more current than the
75°C ampacity of that size conductor for
equipment marked or rated 75°C or the
60°C ampacity of that size conductor
for equipment marked or rated 60°C.
However, the full 90°C (194ºF) ampacity
may be used when applying derated
factors, so long as the actual load does
not exceed the lower of the derated
ampacity or the 75°C or 60°C ampacity
that applies.

36
37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0647

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

Circuit Breaker Sizing
Considerations
The following paragraphs outline
pertinent information from the NEC
according to the type of load and
duty cycle.

A. Service
A service includes the conductors and
equipment for delivering electrical
energy from the supply system to the
wiring system of the premises served.
NEC Article 230 contains the many
requirements for services of 600 volts or
less including the sizing, location and
overcurrent protection of conductors,
disconnect means, permissible number
of disconnects, grounding of conductors,
and ground fault protection requirements of service equipment.

B. Feeder Circuits
A feeder is composed of the conductors
of a wiring system between the service
equipment or the generator switchboard
of an isolated plant and the branch
circuit overcurrent device.

NEC Article 220: Where a feeder supplies
continuous loads or any combination of
continuous and noncontinuous loads,
the rating of the overcurrent device shall
not be less than the noncontinuous
load plus 125% of the continuous load.
Exception: Where the assembly including the overcurrent devices protecting
the feeder(s) are listed for operation at
100% of their rating, neither the ampere
rating of the overcurrent device nor the
ampacity of the feeder conductors shall
be less than the sum of the continuous
load plus the noncontinuous load.
Only breakers listed for 100% application, and so labeled, can be applied
under the exception (for example, type
CKD). Breakers without 100% application listing and label are applied under
(B) above, or at 80% of rating.
NEC Article 430: Breakers for feeders
having mixed loads; i.e., heating
(lighting and heat appliances) and
motors, should have ratings suitable
for carrying the heating loads plus the
capacity required by the motor loads.
NEC Article 430: Breakers for motor
feeders shall have a rating not greater
than the sum of the highest breaker
rating of any of its branches and the
full load currents of all other motors
served by the feeder.

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

21.3-51

Application Information
C. Branch Circuits
A branch circuit is the portion of a wiring
system extending beyond the final
overcurrent device protecting the circuit.
(1) Lighting Circuits (NEC Article 310)
These are protected in accordance
with the conductor ratings as given.
High wattage incandescent lamp loads
may result in abnormally high inrush
currents that must be taken into
account to avoid nuisance tripping.
The lamp manufacturer should be
consulted for data relative to the
inrush currents.
(2) Motor Circuits (NEC Article 430)
Breakers are primarily intended for the
protection of conductors, motor control
apparatus and motors against short
circuits and ground fault conditions.
On motor overloads, the motor overcurrent device will open the circuit
before the correctly applied breaker.
Currents higher than the locked rotor
value will be interrupted by the breakers,
protecting the circuit from these heavy
fault currents. The breaker must not
trip on normal starting.

While breakers may be applied for motor
running overcurrent protection when
the requirements of Article 430 of the
NEC are met, these applications are
not recommended for Eaton’s CutlerHammer breakers and, therefore, this
discussion is confined to the use of a
breaker as a circuit protector.
For many applications, particularly
those where starting behavior of the
motor is unknown, the NEC maximum
rules are followed. Usually, lower
rated breakers can be used successfully. This is further discussed under
motor circuit application and motor
application tables.
Motor Circuit Application (NEC
Article 430): The breaker must have a
continuous rating of not less than 115%
of the motor full load current. Before
applying a breaker, one should check
to determine the effect of any of the
following conditions: High ambient
temperature, heating within breaker
enclosure due to grouping of current
consuming devices, frequent motor
starting, and lengthy motor
acceleration period.

Breaker Rating or Setting (NEC
Article 430): The motor branch circuit
overcurrent device shall be capable of
the motor. The required protection shall
be considered as being obtained when
the overcurrent device has a rating or
setting not exceeding the values given
in Table 21.3-104, reference NEC
Article 430).
An instantaneous trip circuit breaker
(without time delay) shall be used only
if adjustable and if part of a combination controller having overcurrent
protection in each conductor and the
combination is especially approved
for the purpose. In the event a breaker
chosen on this basis still does not
allow motor starting, a higher rating is
permitted by the code. See Exceptions
listed with Table 21.3-104.
Due to the infinite number of motorand-load combinations and because
comparable breakers of different
manufacture have different tripping
characteristics, NEC motor circuit
breaker rules are of a general nature
and are set up as maximum boundaries.
Protection is considered satisfactory if
the breaker rating does not exceed the
figure allowed by the NEC requirements.
Although Cutler-Hammer breakers rated
less than the NEC maximum values
may be applied in most cases. Many
operating engineers select breakers on
the basis of the NEC maximum rules
simply because consideration of other
factors is not usually necessary, or to
ensure motor starting when the starting
behavior of the motor is not known.
Tables 21.3-104 and 21.3-105 are
adapted from Article 430 of NEC.
When a certain motor is standard for
a given job, as on a volume produced
machine tool, it is practical (and often
more economical) to select a breaker
for closer protection than one chosen
on the basis of NEC maximum rules.

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-52 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Application Information

20

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0648

Percent of Full Load Current 

Instantaneous
Trip Breaker

21

23

Index

Table 21.3-104. Maximum Rating or Setting of Motor Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit and
Ground Fault Protective Devices — NEC Table 430-152
Type of
Motor

22

TOC

Single-Phase Motors
ac Polyphase Motors other than Wound Rotor
Squirrel Cage:
Other than Design E
Design E
Synchronous
Wound Rotor
Direct-Current (Constant Voltage)



24
25

Inverse Time
Breaker

800

250

800
1100
800
800
250

250
250
250
150
150

For certain exceptions to the values specified, see Sections 430-52 through 430-54. The values
given in the last column also cover the ratings of nonadjustable inverse time types of circuit
breakers that may be modified as in Section 430-52. Synchronous motors of the low-torque,
low-speed type (usually 450 rpm or lower), such as are used to drive reciprocating compressors,
pumps, etc., that start unloaded, do not require a fuse rating or circuit breaker setting in excess of
200 percent of full load current.

Table 21.3-105. Full-Load Current Three-Phase Alternating-Current Motors — NEC Table 430-150 

26

Hp

Induction Type Squirrel-Cage
and Wound-Rotor
Amperes
115
Volts

Synchronous Type
Unity Power Factor 
Amperes

200
Volts

208
Volts

230
Volts

460
Volts

575
Volts

2300
Volts

230
Volts

460
Volts

575
Volts

2300
Volts

4.4
6.4
8.4

2.5
3.7
4.8

2.4
3.5
4.6

2.2
3.2
4.2

1.1
1.6
2.1

0.9
1.3
1.7

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

1-1/2 12.0
2
13.6
3
—

6.9
7.8
11.0

6.6
7.5
10.6

6.0
6.8
9.6

3.0
3.4
4.8

2.4
2.7
3.9

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

5
—
7-1⁄2 —
10
—

17.5
25.3
32.2

16.7
24.2
30.8

15.2
22
28

7.6
11
14

6.1
9
11

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

15
20
25

—
—
—

48.3
62.1
78.2

46.2
59.4
74.8

42
54
68

21
27
34

17
22
27

—
—
—

—
—
53

—
—
26

—
—
21

—
—
—

30
40
50

—
—
—

92
120
150

88
114
143

80
104
130

40
52
65

32
41
52

—
—
—

63
83
104

32
41
52

26
33
42

—
—
—

32

60
75
100

—
—
—

177
221
285

169
211
273

154
192
248

77
96
124

62
77
99

16
20
26

123
155
202

61
78
101

49
62
81

12
15
20

33

125
150
200

—
—
—

359
414
552

343
396
528

312
360
480

156
180
240

125
144
192

31
37
49

253
302
400

126
151
201

101
121
161

25
30
40

34

250
300
350

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

302
361
414

242
289
336

60
72
83

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

400
450
500

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

477
515
590

382
412
472

95
103
118

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

35

27
1/2
3/4
1

28
29
30
31



36
37



The following values of full load currents are typical for motors running at speeds usual for belted
motors and motors with normal torque characteristics. Motors built for low speeds (1200 RPM
or less) or high torques may require more running current, and multispeed motors will have
full-load current varying with speed. In these cases the nameplate current rating shall be used.
The voltages listed are rated motor voltages. The currents listed shall be permitted for system
voltage ranges of 110 to 120, 220 to 240, 440 to 480, and 550 to 600 volts.
For 90 and 80 percent power factor, the above figures shall be multiplied by
1.1 and 1.25 respectively.

38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0649

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

C. Capacitor Protection (NEC Article 460)
In normal applications, breakers rated
about 150% of capacitor rated currents
are recommended. This factor allows
for switching surges, and possible
overcurrent due to overvoltage and
harmonic currents. Such selection
fully meets the NEC requirements in
460-8 for a conductor and disconnect
to be rated not less than 135% capacitor rating. Where the operating currents exceed 135% of rated current
due to harmonic components, service
conditions may require the selection of
a breaker with a higher current rating.

Application Information — Capacitor Protection
Table 21.3-106. Recommended Switching Devices Enclosed 

Capacitor Rating

Amperes

Volts

Capacitor Rating
Current

240

For application in ambients higher
than the rated ambient of the breaker,
the breaker derating table should be
checked to determine the rating of the
breaker required to meet the minimum
of 135% capacitor rating.
Circuit breakers and switches for use
with capacitor must have a current rating
in excess of rated capacitor current to
provide for overcurrent from overvoltages at fundamental frequency and
harmonic currents. The following
percent of the capacitor-rated current
should be used:
Fused and unfused switches . . . 165%

21.3-53

480

Enclosed Molded Case Circuit Breaker
(Includes additional de-rating for
enclosures) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150%
Air circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . 135%
Contactors:
Open type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135%
Enclosed type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150%




kvar
2-1/2
5
7-1/2

20
Safety Switch
Fuse Rating

MCCB
Trip Rating

Air Breaker
Trip Rating

21

6
12
18

15
20
30

15
20
30

15
20
30

10
15
20

24.1
36.1
48.1

40
60
80

40
70
90

40
50
70

25
30
45

60
72.2
108

100
125
200

100
125
175

90
100
150

50
60
75

120
144
180

200
250
300

200
225
275

175
200
250

24

90
100
120

217
240
289

400
400
500

350
400
500

300
350
400

25

125
135
150

301
325
361

500
600
600

500
500
600

450
500
500

26

180
200
225

433
480
541

800
800
900

700
800
900

600
700
800

240
250
270

578
602
650

1000
1000
1200

900
900
1000

800
900
1000

300
360
375

720
866
903

1200
1600
1500

—
—
—

1200
1200
1200

2
5
7-1/2

2.41
6.01
9

15
15
15

15
15
15

15
15
15

22
23

27
28
29

10
15
20

12
18
24

20
30
40

20
30
40

20
30
40

30

25
30
35

30
36.1
42

50
60
70

50
70
70

50
50
60

31

40
45
5

48.1
54
60.1

80
90
10

100
100
100

70
80
90

32

60
75
80

72.2
90.2
96.2

125
150
175

125
150
150

100
125
150

33

90
100

108
120

200
200

175
200

150
175

120
125
150

144
150
180

250
250
300

225
225
300

200
200
25

160
180
200

192
216
241

350
400
400

300
350
400

300
300
350

35

225
240
250

271
289
301

500
500
500

500
500
500

400
400
400

36

300
320
360

361
385
433

600
700
800

600
600
700

500
600
600

37

375
400
450

451
481
541

800
800
900

700
800
900

600
800
800

38

Switching device ratings are based on percentage of capacitor-rated current as indicated.
The interrupting rating of the switch must be selected to match the system fault current available
at the point of capacitor application. Whenever a capacitor bank is purchased with less than the
ultimate kvar capacity of the rack or enclosure, the switch rating should be selected based on the
ultimate kvar capacity — not the initial installed capacity.

34

39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-54 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Application Information — Transformer Protection

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

E. Transformer Protection
(NEC Article 450) Primary
Each transformer 600 volts or less
shall be protected by an individual
overcurrent device on the primary
side. Rated or set at not more than
125% of the rated primary current
of the transformer.
Exception No. 1: Where the rated
primary currents of a transformer is
9 amperes or more and 125% of this
current does not correspond to a standard rating of a fuse or nonadjustable
circuit breaker, the next higher standard rating described in Section 240
shall be permitted. Where the rated
primary current is less than 9 amperes,
an overcurrent device rated or set at
not more than 167% of the primary
current shall be permitted.
Where the rated primary current is less
than 2 amperes, an overcurrent device
rated or set at not more than 300%
shall be permitted.
Exception No. 2: An individual overcurrent device shall not be required
where the primary circuit overcurrent
device provides the protection specified
in this Section.

A transformer 600 volts or less having
an overcurrent device on the secondary side rated or set at not more than
125% of the rated secondary current
on the transformer shall not be
required to have an individual overcurrent device on the primary side if the
primary feeder overcurrent device is
rated or set at a current value not more
than 250% of the rated primary current
of the transformer.
A transformer 600 volts or less,
equipped with coordinated thermal
overload protection by the manufacturer and arranged to interrupt the
primary current, shall not be required
to have an individual overcurrent
device on the primary side if the
primary feeder overcurrent device is
rated or set at a current value not more
than 6 times the rated current of the
transformer for transformers having
more than 6% impedance and not
more than 4 times the rated current
of the transformer for transformers
having more than 6 but not more
than 10% impedance.

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0650

Where the rated secondary current is
less than 9 amperes, an overcurrent
device rated or set at not more than
167% of the rated secondary current
shall be permitted. Closer protection
can be provided by breakers having
shunt trips actuated by a temperature
sensing device imbedded in transformer windings.

Exception 4: Where the rated secondary
current of a transformer is 9 amperes
or more and 125% of this current does
not correspond to a standard rating of a
fuse or nonadjustable circuit breaker, the
next higher standard rating described
in Section 240 shall be permitted.

Table 21.3-107. Single-Phase Primary Protection When Secondary Protection Provided
kVA

208 V
FLA

240 V

277 V

Breaker FLA
Trip

Breaker FLA
Trip

480 V
Breaker FLA
Trip

600 V
Breaker FLA
Trip

Breaker
Trip

2
3
5

10
14
24

20
30
50

8
13
21

20
30
50

7
11
18

15
20
40

5
6
10

10
15
20

4
5
8

7.5
10
15

36
48
72

70
100
150

31
42
63

60
80
125

27
36
54

50
70
100

16
21
31

30
40
60

13
17
25

30
40
50

25
37.5
50

120
180
240

225
350
450

104
156
208

200
300
400

90
135
181

175
250
350

52
78
104

100
150
200

42
63
83

100
150
150

75
100
167

361
481
803

700
1000
1600

313
417
696

600
800
1200

271
361
603

500
700
1200

156
208
348

300
400
700

125
167
278

250
350
600

250
333
500

1202
1601
2404

2000
3000
3200

1042
1388
2083

1600
2000
3000

903
1202
1805

1600
2000
2500

521
694
1042

800
1200
1600

417
555
833

800
800
1200

—
10
20

Table 21.3-108. Single-Phase Secondary Protection When Primary Protection Provided
kVA

Exception No. 3: As provided in (b)
(2) below.
(2) Primary and Secondary

TOC

208 V
FLA

240 V
Breaker
Trip

FLA

277 V
Breaker
Trip

2
3
5

10
14
24

15
20
30

8
13
21

15
20
30

7.5
10
15

36
48
72

45
60
90

31
42
63

25
37.5
50

120
180
240

150
225
300

75
100
167

361
481
803

250
333
500

1202
1601
2404

480 V

FLA

Breaker
Trip

FLA

Breaker
Trip

—

—

—
—

—
—

11
18

15
25

10

15

40
60
80

27
36
54

35
50
70

16
21
31

20
30
40

104
156
208

150
200
300

90
135
181

150
175
225

52
78
104

70
100
150

450
600
1000

313
417
696

400
600
900

271
361
603

350
450
800

156
208
348

200
300
450

1600
2000
3000

1042
1388
2083

1400
1800
3000

903
1202
1805

1200
1600
2500

521
694
1042

700
900
1400

40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0651

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

Application Information

Interrupting Rating

Table 21.3-109. Three-Phase Primary Protection When Secondary Protection Provided
kVA

240 V

480 V

FLA

Breaker
Trip

3
6
9

7
14
22

15
30
40

15
30
37.5

36
72
90

45
50
75
112.5
150
225
300
500
7550
1000

21.3-55

600 V

FLA

Breaker
Trip

FLA

Breaker
Trip

—

—

—

—

7
11

15
25

6
9

15
20

70
150
200

18
36
45

40
70
90

14
29
36

30
60
70

108
120
180

200
225
350

54
60
90

110
120
200

43
48
72

90
100
150

271
361
541

500
700
1000

135
180
271

250
350
500

108
144
217

200
300
400

722
1203
1804
2406

1000
2000
2500
4000

361
601
902
1203

600
800
1200
2000

289
481
722
962

500
700
1000
1600

The maximum amount of fault current
supplied by a system can be calculated
at any point in that system. One rule
must be followed for applying the
correct circuit breaker.
The interrupting rating of the breaker
must be equal to or greater than the
amount of fault current that can be
delivered at that point in the system
where the breaker is applied.
The interrupting rating of the breaker
is the maximum amount of fault current
it can safely interrupt without damaging
itself. A breaker’s interrupting rating
always decreases as the voltage
increases. Interrupting rating is one of
the most critical factors in the breaker
selection process.

Table 21.3-110. Three-Phase Secondary Protection When Primary Protection Provided
kVA

208 V
FLA

240 V
Breaker
Trip

FLA

480 V
Breaker
Trip

3
6
9

8
17
25

10
20
35

7
14
22

10
20
30

15
30
37.5

42
83
104

60
110
150

36
72
90

45
50
75

125
139
208

175
175
300

112.5
150
225

312
416
652
833
1388
2082
2776

300
500
750
1000

20
21
22
23
24
25
26

Number of Poles

600 V

FLA

Breaker
Trip

FLA

Breaker
Trip

—

—

—
—

—
—

7
11

10
15

9

10

45
100
125

18
36
45

25
45
60

14
29
36

20
40
50

108
120
180

150
175
225

54
60
90

70
80
125

43
48
72

60
60
90

400
600
800

271
361
541

350
500
700

135
180
271

175
225
350

108
144
217

150
200
300

1200
1800
3000
3500

722
1203
1804
2406

900
1500
2500
3000

361
601
902
1203

500
800
1200
1600

289
481
722
962

400
600
900
1200

The number of poles in the breaker is
determined by the type of distribution
system. A pole is required for each
hot conductor, but usually not for the
neutral conductor, except in certain
special applications.

27

In general, a 1-pole breaker may be
used on grounded neutral systems
for single-phase applications and a
3-pole breaker on 3-phase applications.
There are instances, however, where
2-pole breakers are necessary on singlephase systems and 4-pole breakers on
3-phase systems to interrupt the neutral.
Certain dc voltage applications also
use special multi-pole configurations.

29

Fixed or Interchangeable Trip Unit
Reverse Feed Applications
(Power Supply to Load Side)
Often due to physical equipment
arrangements in panelboards and
switchboards, it is desirable to reverse
feed a molded case circuit breaker.
For this application, circuit breakers
must be tested and listed accordingly.
For safety reasons, thermal-magnetic
circuit breakers having interchangeable trip units are not acceptable for
this application, and are, therefore,
marked “Line” and “Load” on the
cover. Where circuit breakers are so
marked, the power source conductors
must be connected to the “Line” end
terminations.
Circuit breakers suitable for reverse
feed application generally have sealed
covers and not marked “Line” and
“Load” and are UL listed.

28

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-56 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Application Information — Unusual Operating Conditions

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

Unusual Operating Conditions
Trip Unit Temperatures
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Thermalmagnetic circuit breakers are temperature sensitive. At ambient temperatures
below 40°C (104ºF), circuit breakers
carry more current than their continuous current rating. Nuisance tripping is
not a problem under these lower temperature conditions, although consideration should be given to closer
protection coordination to compensate
for the additional current carrying
capability. In addition, the actual
mechanical operation of the breaker
could be affected if the ambient
temperature is significantly below
the 40°C standard.

36
37
38
39
40

Breaker Ampere
Rating at 40°C

25°C
(77°F)

50°C
(122°F)

60°C
(140°F)

15
20
25

17
22
32

13
18
21

11
16
16

30
35
40

33
41
45

27
32
34

24
27
29

50
60
70

55
66
77

46
56
65

42
52
60

90
100
125
150

99
110
137
165

84
94
116
138

78
87
105
125

70
90
100

79
102
115

63
81
89

55
71
76

125
150
175

140
171
200

114
134
156

102
116
134

200
225
250

230
252
281

178
205
227

153
183
201

100
125
150

121
145
188

90
116
132

79
106
111

175
200
225

210
243
255

159
180
212

141
157
198

250
300
350
400

294
364
412
471

230
270
322
368

208
236
291
333

300
350
400

330
385
440

276
325
372

252
301
340

500
600

550
660

468
564

435
525

300
350
400

332
388
444

277
322
368

252
292
334

450
500
600

495
550
660

418
468
564

383
435
525

700
800

770
880

658
754

613
704

J-Frame/J250-Frame

Electronic trip units are insensitive to
ambient temperatures within a certain
temperature range. The temperature
range for most Cutler-Hammer electronic trip units is -20°C to +55°C
(-4ºF to 131ºF). However, at very low
ambient temperatures, the mechanical
parts of the breaker could require
special treatment, such as the use of
special lubricants. If the ambient temperature exceeds 40°C significantly,
damage to the electronic circuitry and
other components could result. Eaton
includes temperature protective circuits
in its designs to initiate a tripping operation and provide self-protection, should
the internal temperature rise to an
unsafe level.

K-Frame

The temperature of the air surrounding a circuit breaker is the ambient
temperature. For some years, all molded
case circuit breakers were calibrated
for 25°C (77°F). This ambient temperature was not very representative of the
conditions in which most molded case
circuit breakers were applied, namely
in an enclosure. In the mid-1960s,
industry standards were changed to
make all standard breakers calibrated
to a 40°C ambient temperature. For any
ambient temperature application above
or below 40°C, it is recommended that
the breaker manufacturer be consulted
as to any possible rerating, recalibration or special procedures, before the
circuit breaker is selected and applied.

Ampere Rating

F-Frame/E125-Frame

For ambient temperatures above
40°C, breakers will carry less current
than their continuous current rating.
This condition promotes nuisance
tripping and can create unacceptable
temperature conditions at the terminals.
Under this condition, the circuit breaker
should be recalibrated for the higher
ambient temperature.

Circuit Breaker Temperatures

35

Table 21.3-111. Derating Chart for NonCompensated Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Calibrated for 40°C

L-Frame

M-Frame

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0652

Moisture — Corrosion
High moisture content and/or the presence of corrosive elements can result
in damage to key operating components and/or severely compromise the
breaker’s operational integrity. As is
the case with all electrical equipment,
this type of condition or environment
should be avoided. Good electrical
practice dictates that electrical equipment always be applied in a clean
environment, free of moisture and
corrosion. If such operating conditions
cannot be avoided, special treatment
of the circuit breaker should be considered to minimize the possibility of
operational problems. Most CutlerHammer molded case circuit breaker
cases are molded from glass polyester
which does not support the growth of
fungus. In addition, a special moisture
and fungus-resisting treatment is
recommended for any parts that are
susceptible to the growth of fungus.
In areas where daily temperature
changes have a tendency to cause
condensation, the inclusion of space
heaters in the enclosure is the best
preventative measure. The manufacturer should be consulted if either one
of these operational environments is
likely to exist. Consider the addition of
a Cutler-Hammer C799 series oxidation
inhibiting capsule in the assembly.

Altitude
Low voltage circuit breakers must
be progressively derated for voltage,
current carrying and interrupting
rating at altitudes above 6,000 feet
(1,829 m). The thinner air at higher
altitudes reduces cooling and dielectric characteristics compared to the
denser air found at lower altitudes.
Refer to Eaton for additional application
details.

Shock/Vibration
Where high shock is an anticipated
condition, hi-shock Navy type breakers
are recommended. Molded case circuit
breakers can be supplied to meet the
following marine specifications: U.S.
Coast Guard CFR 46, ABS – American
Bureau of Shipping, IEEE 45, UL 489
Supplement SA Marine, and UL 489
Supplemental SB Naval.

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0653

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

Special Applications
Molded Case Breakers for Application on
Resistance Welding Circuits
Short circuit protection for resistance
welding devices can be obtained by
properly applying instantaneous trip
molded case circuit breakers.
Note: Instantaneous only breakers for welding application are intended for application
within the welding equipment not as feeder
breakers to welding machines.

These breakers permit normally high
welding currents, but trip instantaneously if a short circuit develops.
These breakers include standard
molded case circuit breaker features
such as trip-free operation, deadfront
and single-phase protection. Because
the breakers are resettable after tipping,
replacement costs and downtime
are minimized.
Duty Cycle is based on the one minute
averaging time of the breaker, and can
be determined as follows:
Weld Time × 100
Duty Cycle = ---------------------------------------------------------Weld Time + Off Time
“During-weld” amperes can be
obtained from the welder manufacturer,
or as follows:
During-weld × 1000
kVA
During-weld = --------------------------------------------------Amperes
Voltage

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

21.3-57

Application Information — Special Applications
Mining Service Circuit Breakers

Application and Replacement of Breakers

The full line of mining service circuit
breakers includes Standard ”Classic”
Mining Service, Series C and E2G Mining
Breaker, including 1000Y/577 Vac ratings.
Mining breakers are available with a
full line of accessories. These special
purpose circuit breakers are designed
specifically for underground trailing
cable application per MSHA 30 CFR 75.

Apply and replace breakers prudently,
within the design and operating
parameters of the power system.
Use the following tables to select the
size and type of Series C
 Circuit
Breaker needed to fit virtually any
application in series connected and
other protective systems. Series C
Breakers are highly compatible across
ratings, capacities and characteristic;
prudent replacements are as important
as initial selection.

20

Unusual Mounting Configurations

24

Engine Generator Circuit Breakers
Engine generator molded case circuit
breakers are designed specifically for
application on diesel engine powered
standby generators where high
interrupting circuit breakers are not
required. Engine generator circuit
breakers conform to UL 489, CSA
and IEC 947-2.

Molded Case Switches
The molded case switch is used when
a compact, high capacity disconnect
switch is required. It provides no overcurrent protection, overload or low
level fault. The MCS is equipped with a
high instantaneous magnetic fixed trip
unit. The fixed magnetic trip is factory
preset to interrupt high fault currents
at or above its preset level. MCS is self
protecting within its withstand rating.
The molded case switch accepts the
same accessories as the equivalent
thermal-magnetic circuit breaker.
See Table 21.3-112.

Generally, circuit breakers may be
mounted in any position, up or down,
horizontal or vertical, without affecting
the tripping characteristics or interrupting
rating. However, mounting circuit
breakers in a vertical position with the
“ON” position other than “UP” will be
in violation of Article 240-81 of the
National Electrical Code.

21
22
23

25
26
27
28
29
30
31

Interrupting capacity of the breaker
should be within the maximum available at the point of application. Refer
to Eaton for additional application
details.

32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-58 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Application Information — Molded Case Switch Ratings

20
21

Table 21.3-112. Molded Case Switch Short Circuit Current Ratings at
60 Hz Only (Maximum Fault Current at Which Device can be Applied
in kAIC)
MCS
Catalog Number

Short Circuit Current Rating
240 V

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0654

(Continued)

600 V

250 Vdc

MCS
Catalog Number

Short Circuit Current Rating

480 V

240 V

480 V

600 V

250 Vdc

GD3060K
GD3100K
EHD2100K

65
65
18

22
22
14

—
—
—

10
10
10

KDB4400KW
HKD2400KW
HKDB2400KW

65
100
100

35
65
65

25
35
35

10
22
22

EHD3100K
FD2100KL
FD2150KL

18
65
65

14
25
25

—
18
18

10
10
10

HKD3400KW
HKDB3400KW
HKD4400KW

100
100
100

65
65
65

35
35
35

22
22
22

FD3100KL
FD3150KL
FD4100KL

65
65
65

25
25
25

18
18
18

10
10
10

HKDB4400KW
LD2600WK
LDB2600WK

100
65
65

65
35
35

35
25
25

22
10
10

FD4150KL
HFD2100KL
HFD2150KL

65
100
100

25
65
65

18
25
25

10
22
22

LD3600WK
LDB3600WK
LD4600WK

65
65
65

35
35
35

25
25
25

10
10
10

25

HFD3100KL
HFD3150KL
HFD4100KL

100
100
100

65
65
65

25
25
25

22
22
22

LDB4600WK
HLD2600WK
HLDB2600WK

65
100
100

35
65
65

25
35
35

10
25
25

26

HFD4150KL
JD2250KW
JDB2250KW

100
65
65

65
25
25

25
18
18

22
10
10

HLD3600WK
HLDB3600WK
HLD4600WK

100
100
100

65
65
65

35
35
35

25
25
25

JD3250KW
JDB3250KW
JD4250KW

65
65
65

25
25
25

18
18
18

10
10
10

HLDB4600WK
MDL2800WK
MDL3800WK

100
42
42

65
35
35

35
22
22

25
20
20

28

JDB4250KW
HJD2250KW
HJDB2250KW

65
100
100

25
65
65

18
25
25

10
22
22

MDLS2800WK
MDLS3800WK
ND3800WK

42
42
65

35
35
50

22
22
25

20
20
—

29

HJD3250KW
HJDB3250KW
HJD4250KW

100
100
100

65
65
65

25
25
25

22
22
22

ND4800WK
HND3800WK
HND4800WK

65
100
100

50
65
65

25
35
35

—
—
—

HJDB4250KW
DK2400KW
DK3400KW

100
65
65

65
—
—

25
—
—

22
10
10

ND312WK
ND412WK
HND312WK

65
65
100

50
50
65

25
25
35

—
—
—

KD2400KW
KDB2400KW
KD3400KW

65
65
65

35
35
35

25
25
25

10
10
10

HND412WK
RD316WK
RD320WK

100
125
125

65
65
65

35
50
50

—
—
—

KDB3400KW
KD4400KW

65
65

35
35

25
25

10
10

RD420WK
—

125
125

65
65

50
50

—
—

22
23
24

27

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0655

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

Application Information — DC Circuit Breakers

DC Circuit Breakers

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

UL listed Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer DC
Molded Case Circuit Breakers are for
use in general dc circuits. They are
also used in ungrounded battery
supply circuits of UPS systems which
provide continuous reliable ac power
to computer-controlled applications
for financial institutions and telecommunications. These devices are an
excellent alternative to molded case
switches and fuses because they are
easier to install and require less
maintenance.

Table 21.3-113. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

All DC breakers are designed specifically
for use in ungrounded dc circuits. The
various dc voltage ratings are obtained
by connecting one, two, three, or four
poles in series as noted. Connection
diagrams are shown on the breaker
nameplate. The DC breakers use the
same internal and external accessories
as the standard breakers for ac application. Shorting straps for series
connecting poles are available.



Molded case circuit breakers for
transportation application requiring
750 Vdc are available 15 through
2500 amperes with 20 kA interrupting
capacity at 750 Vdc. Breakers require
4 poles in series for 750 Vdc application. However, 750 V is not a UL rating.
Dimensions are the same as the standard thermal-magnetic equivalent.

21.3-59

Circuit
Breaker
Type

Frame

HFDDC
HJDDC
HKDDC
HLDDC
NBDC
PBDC






20

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical kA)
Volts dc 

125 

250 

600 

750 

150
250
400

42
42
42

42
42
42

35
35
35

42
20
20

600
1200
2500

42
42
42

42
50
75

35
50
75

20
20
20

dc ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. 8 millisecond time constant.
1-pole in series.
2-poles in series.
3-poles in series.
4 poles in series. Not a UL listed voltage rating.

21
22
23
24
25

3-Poles in Series for dc (Typical)

4-Poles in Series

26

LOAD

27
28
29
LOAD
LOAD

Figure 21.3-5. Series Connection Diagrams for 600 Volts dc Application

30
31

Note: Use rated cable per NEC. Connect to terminals as per breaker nameplate.

32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-60 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

Application Information — 400 – 415 Hz

20
21
22
23
24
25

Application of Cutler-Hammer
Molded Case Circuit Breakers to
400 – 415 Hz Systems
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer molded case
circuit breakers, including breakers
with electronic trip units, can be
applied for overcurrent protection on
400 – 415 Hz systems. Commonly used
to power computer installations, 400 –
415 Hz systems are also employed in
conjunction with certain aircraft, military and other specialty equipment.

This publication contains guidelines to
applying Cutler-Hammer molded case
circuit breakers on 400 – 415 Hz systems.

Circuit Breaker Derating Required
Table 21.3-114, lists the maximum
continuous current carrying capacity
at 400 – 415 Hz of Cutler-Hammer
molded case circuit breakers. Due to
the increased resistance of the copper
sections resulting from the skin effect
produced by eddy currents at 400 –
415 Hz, circuit breakers in many
cases require derating.

Sheet 0656

The thermal derating on these devices
is based upon 100%, 3-phase application in open air in a maximum of 40°C
(104ºF) with 4 feet (1.2 m) of the specified cable 75°C (167ºF) of bus at the
line and load side. Additional derating
of not less than 20% will be required if
the circuit breaker is to be utilized in an
enclosure. Further derating may be
required if the enclosure contains
other heat generating devices or if the
ambient temperatures exceed 40°C.

Table 21.3-114. Continuous Current of 400 Hz Breakers
Breaker Frame
Series

EHD, FDB, FD

Maximum Continuous
Amperes at 60 Hz

400 – 415 Hz Application 

Maximum Continuous
Amperes

Cable/Bus Bar
(Per Phase)

Terminals (Fixed Front)
Catalog or Style Number

26

15
20
25

15
20
25

1 #12 Cu
1 #12 Cu
1 #12 Cu

624B100G02
624B100G02
624B100G02

27

30
35
40

30
35
40

1 #10 Cu
1 #10 Cu
1 #8 Cu

624B100G02
624B100G02
624B100G02

50
70
90

45
65
85

1 #6 Cu
1 #4 Cu
1 #2 Cu

624B100G02
624B100G02
624B100G02

100
125 
150 

95
115
135

1 #1 Cu
1 – 1/0 Cu
1 – 1/0 Cu

624B100G17
624B100G17
624B100G17

1 #4 Cu
1 #2 Cu
1 #1 Cu

T250KB
T250KB
T250KB

28
29

January 2005

70
90
100

60
80
90

30

125
150
175

100
125
150

1 – 1/0 Cu
1 – 1/0 Cu
1 – 2/0 Cu

T250KB
T250KB
T250KB

31

200
225
250

160
200
200

1 – 3/0 Cu
1 – 4/0 Cu
1 – 250 kcmil Cu

T250KB
T250KB
T250KB

125
150
175

100
125
150

1 – 1/0 Cu
1 – 1/0 Cu
1 – 2/0 Cu

T300K
T300K
T300K

33

200
225
250

160
180
200

1 – 3/0 Cu
1 – 4/0 Cu
1 – 250 kcmil Cu

T300K
T300K
T300K

34

300
350
400

225
275
300

1 – 350 kcmil Cu
1 – 500 kcmil Cu
2 – 3/0 Cu

T300K
T350K
T400K

250
300
350

210
240
275

1 – 250 kcmil Cu
1 – 350 kcmil Cu
1 – 500 kcmil Cu

T600LA
T600LA
T600LA

400
500
600

310
370
425

2 – 250 kcmil Cu
2 – 350 kcmil Cu
2 – 500 kcmil Cu

T600LA
T600LA
T600LA

LD with Digitrip RMS 310

300
600

300
500

2 – 250 kcmil Cu
2 – 350 kcmil Cu

T401LA
T401LA

MD with Digitrip RMS 310

400
500
600

340
405
470

2 – 3/0 Cu
2 – 300 kcmil Cu
2 – 350 kcmil Cu

601MA
T601MA
T601MA

700
800

355
400

2 – 4/0 Cu
2 – 300 kcmil Cu

T601MA
T601MA

ND with Digitrip RMS 310

1200

700
750
85

3 – 300 kcmil Cu
3 – 350 kcmil Cu
4 – 350 kcmil Cu

T1000 NBI
T1000 NBI
T1200 NBI

RD with Digitrip RMS 310

2000

1500

4-1/2 x 4 Cu

Rear Connected Cu T-Bar

32

JDB, JD, HJD

KDB, KD, HKD

LDB, LD, HLD

35
36
37
38
39




40



The calibration of these breakers and the tolerance percentages of the time-current curves are the same as at 60 Hz.
FD and HFD only.

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0657

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

Application Information — 400 – 415 Hz

Cable and Bus Sizing

400 – 415 Hz Breakers

The cable and bus sizes to be utilized at
400 – 415 Hz are not based on standard
National Electrical Code tables for 60 Hz
application. Larger cross sections are
necessary at 400 – 415 Hz to avoid
exceeding component temperature
limits. All bus bars specified are based
upon mounting the bars in the vertical
plane to allow maximum air flow. All
bus bars are spaced at a minimum of
1/4-inch (6.35 mm) apart. Mounting of
bus bars in the horizontal plane will
necessitate additional drafting. Edgewise
orientation of the bus may change the
maximum ratings indicated. If additional information is required for other
connections of cable or bus, contact
the Eaton Customer Support Center.

When required, molded case circuit
breakers may be factory calibrated
for 400 – 415 Hz application. These
breakers are specially labeled for
400 – 415 Hz usage and their nameplate current rating will include the
necessary derating factor. The highest
“Maximum Continuous Amperes”
rating at 400 – 415 Hz found in Tables

A and B is approximately equal to the
highest specially calibrated 400 – 415
Hz nameplate amperes rating available
for a given frame size. The EHD, FDB
and FD frames have style numbers designated for breakers calibrated at 400 –
415 Hz. Contact Eaton for ordering
information on other Cutler-Hammer
breakers to be applied in 400 – 415 Hz
systems.

Breaker Frame
Series

240 V

480 V

600 V

Thermal Magnetic
2,800
2,800
5,000

—
2,800
3,600

Interrupting Capacity

JDB, JD
HJD
KDB, KD, HKD

8,000
14,000
21,000

7,000
10,000
11,000

7,000
7,000
8,000

400 – 415 Hz interrupting capacities of
the Cutler-Hammer molded case circuit
breakers found in Table 21.3-115.

LDB, LD
HLD
MD

14,000
21,000
14,000

10,000
11,000
10,000

7,000
8,000
7,000

Electronic Trip Units
LD, MD, ND
HLD

14,000
21,000

10,000
11,000

7,000
8,000

HND
RD

21,000
40,000

16,000
33,000

8,000
33,000






21
22

Estimated 400 – 415 Hz Interrupting Capacities 
 (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

3,600
3,600
13,000

It is recommended that thermal
indicating devices such as “tempi
plates” be placed on the line and load
terminals or T-connectors of the center
pole. These are usually the hottest
terminals with a balanced load. A
maximum temperature of 90°C (50°C
over a maximum ambient of 40°C)
would verify the maximum rating for
the particular application. Temperature
profiles taken on these breakers can be
correlated to insure that the hottest
points within the breaker care are
within the required temperature limits.
A thermal cutoff switch can also be
used to actuate a shunt trip to open
the breaker if the thermal limits are
exceeded. Consult the Customer
Support Center for further information
on special applications.

20

23

Table 21.3-115. Interrupting Capacities of 400 Hz Breakers

EHD
FDB
FD

Application Recommendations

21.3-61

The above interrupting ratings are estimates based on the design parameters and operating
characteristics of each breaker as well as on the limited amount of test data thus far available
for circuit breakers applied to 400 – 415 Hz systems.
Not UL listed.

24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-62 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Application Information — 100% Rated Circuit Breakers

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33

100% Rated Circuit Breakers

The NEC

The amount of protection designed
into a distribution system is often based
on economics. However, each project
should be furnished with a reliable distribution system that delivers the most
effective protection possible for each
investment dollar.

The rules and intent of the National
Electrical Code governing the use of
standard or 100% rated breakers must
be understood before recommending
or applying such devices.

Reliable and economic system design
can be usually achieved with Eaton’s
Cutler-Hammer circuit breakers that
are UL listed for application at 100%
of their ratings — instead of standard
breakers that in actual use are applied
at 80% of their frame ratings in
an enclosure.
The concept between a system design
using standard breakers and that using
100% rated breakers is uncomplicated
— but there are no shortcut methods
for determining which design (and
devices) is the best choice for a given
system. Good engineering practice
requires a careful system analysis
beginning with the lowest feeder
and concluding with the main device.
Also included in the system analysis
must be all present and future factors
that could affect the size and/or quantity of the breakers and associated
hardware, such as switchboard bus,
busway, cable and conduit. Other
factors to consider are loads (continuous and noncontinuous) and system
expansions and transformers with
provisions for forced air cooling.

Section 220-10(b) Continuous and
Noncontinuous Loads of the National
Electrical Code addresses differences
between applications of standard rated
breakers and 100% rated breakers.
(Significant sections are in bold
face type.)
“Where a feeder supplies continuous loads or any combination of
continuous and noncontinuous
loads, the rating of the overcurrent device shall not be less than
the noncontinuous load plus
125% of the continuous load.”
The minimum circuit conductor
size without the application of any
ampacity adjustment or correction
factors shall have an allowable
ampacity equal to or greater than
the noncontinuous load plus
125% of the continuous load.
“Exception: Where the assembly
including the overcurrent devices
protecting the feeder(s) are listed
for operation at 100% of their
rating, neither the ampere rating
of the overcurrent device nor the
ampacity of the feeder conductors
shall be less than the sum of
the continuous load plus the
noncontinuous load.”

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0658

Section 220-10(b) covers standard
breakers, and the exception 100%
rated breakers. NEC Section 220-10(b)
and the Section 220-10(b) exception
can be expressed by these formulas:
Standard 80% Rated Design
Noncontinuous Load +
125% of the Continuous Load
= Total Minimum Load
Special 100% Rated Design
Noncontinuous Load +
Continuous Load
= Total Minimum Load
The necessity for these NEC requirements results from circuit breaker
testing procedures.
A molded case circuit breaker is tested
in open air to verify its nameplate
ampere rating. The nameplate specifies a value of current the circuit
breaker is rated to carry continuously
without tripping within specific operating temperature guidelines.
In most instances, a breaker is applied
in an enclosure and performance could
be adversely affected by slow heat
dissipation and temperature rise. These
factors must be considered regarding
the ability of the breaker to comply
with its nameplate ampere rating.

Breaker
Nameplate
Example

Figure 21.3-7. NEC Reference

34
35
36
37
38
39

100%
Application–
enclosure
and
wire ampacity
requirements.

Figure 21.3-6. Breaker Nameplate
A 100% rated breaker receives its UL listing
based on tests conducted in a minimum
size enclosure with minimum ventilation
(if required) and minimum cable sizes,
as stated on this nameplate example.
All Cutler-Hammer 100% rated breakers
have standard electronic trip units.

40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0659

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

Testing Conditions and Operating Conditions
There are distinct differences between
these conditions that are addressed in
the NEC Section 220-10(b) by introducing an overcurrent device and associated hardware sizing factor. The sizing
factor ensures reliable equipment performance under realistic conditions.
Section 220-10(b) is the key to making
the best system design choice.
For feeders, Section 220-20(b)
addresses the rating of all overcurrent
devices that have been tested in open
air but are applied in an enclosure. The
thermal response of an overcurrent
device applied in an enclosure will
usually be faster than in open air,
thus dictating the 125% requirement.
The exception allows for properly tested
and listed overcurrent devices to be
applied at 100% of their nameplate rating.

There is a Difference Between 100% Rated
Breakers and 100% Rated Assemblies
Special attention should be given
to the word “assembly” in the NEC
Exception. Normally, an assembly
is listed for 100% operation only
after being successfully tested as
an assembly per UL requirements.
For an assembly to receive a 100%
rated UL listing, it must be tested
separately by UL project engineers.
Panelboards are tested to UL 67,
switchboards tested to UL 891.
Installing 100% rated breakers in
an assembly does not automatically
make it acceptable for a 100% rating.
90°C Wire

21.3-63

Application Information — 100% Rated Circuit Breakers
Table 21.3-116. The Application — These Examples Illustrate the Cost Savings when the 100%
Rated Approach is Utilized 


20

A visual comparison of breaker, bus and cable sizes in the Three-Phase Distribution System
examples (line diagrams) reveals how a 100% rated system design can provide cost savings.
Load

Feeder #1

Feeder #2

Feeder #3

Main

Description

Continuous

400 A

800 A

0

1200 A

Noncontinuous

200 A

0

1000 A

1200 A

Three-Phase Distribution
System Line Diagrams




Selection of either a 100% rated design or standard design must result from a system analysis
beginning with the lowest feeder and concluding with the system’s main device. For these system
examples, assume that all assembly testing has been successfully completed and either the 100%
rated design or standard design can be selected. Each system is hypothetical and either approach
will meet safety requirements. Loads were arbitrarily selected. The load table includes the calculations for minimum total loads in conformance with NEC Section 22-10(b).

22
23
24

Table 21.3-117. Available 100% Rated Circuit Breakers
Frames

21

Rating
at 480 V

Trip
Units

25

K-Frame 125/250/400 A
Minimum Enclosure Size
24 x 15 x 6-inches (609.6 x 381.0 x 152.4 mm)

CKD 35 kA
CHKD 65 kA

Digitrip 310

L-Frame 125/250/400/600 A
Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation
24 x 15 x 6-inches (609.6 x 381.0 x 152.4 mm)

CLD 35 kA
CHLD 65 kA
CLDC 100 kA

Digitrip OPTIM

26

L-Frame 600 A
Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation
24 x 15 x 6-inches (609.6 x 381.0 x 152.4 mm)

CLD 35 kA
CHLD 65 kA
CLDC 100 kA

Digitrip 310

27

CMDL 50 kA
CHMDL 65 kA

Digitrip 310

28

M-Frame 800 A
Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation
42 x 18 x 7.5-inches (1066.8 x 457.2 x 190.5 mm)
N-Frame 800/1200 A
Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation
42 x 22.75 x 11.5-inches (1066.8 x 577.9 x 292.1 mm)

CND 50 kA
CHND 65 kA
CNDC 100 kA

Digitrip OPTIM

N-Frame 800/1200 A
Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation
42 x 22.75 x 11.5-inches (1066.8 x 577.9 x 292.1 mm)

CND 50 kA
CHND 65 kA
CNDC 100 kA

Digitrip 310

R-Frame 1600/2000 A
Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation
21.5 x 18 x 13-inches (546.1 x 457.2 x 330.2 mm) 

CRD 65 kA
CRDC 100 kA

Digitrip OPTIM

R-Frame 1600/2000 A
Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation
21.5 x 18 x 13-inches (546.1 x 457.2 x 330.2 mm) 

CRD 65 kA
CRDC 100 kA

Digitrip 510/610/810/910

R-Frame 1600/2000 A
Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation
21.5 x 18 x 13-inches (546.1 x 457.2 x 330.2 mm) 

CRD 65 kA
CRDC 100 kA

Digitrip 310



Use with 9-inch (228.6 mm) Tee connector.

29
30
31
32
33
34

The NEC allows
the breaker to be
rated at 100% of
its frame size in
an assembly,
provided that
90°C wire is
applied at the
75°C ampacity.
All 100% rated
circuit breakers
have electronic
trip units.

35
36
37
38

90°C Wire

39

Figure 21.3-8. Conductor Requirements

40
CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-64 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Application Information — 100% Rated Circuit Breakers

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0660

Table 21.3-118. Standard 80% Rated Design

20
21

Noncontinuous Load + 125% of the Continuous Load = Total Minimum Load
0 + (1.25) (800)
=1000 A

1000 + 0 = 1000 A

Line Diagram
2700 A




Calculation
per NEC
of Minimum
Total Load 


200 + (1.25) (400)
=700 A

Breaker
Frame (F)
Trip (T)
Rating

(F) (T)
800 A /700 A

(F) (T)
1200 A /1000 A

(F) (T)
1200A /1000 A

(F) (T)
3000 A /3000 A

Bus/Cable
Rating

800 A 

1000 A

1000 A

3000 A 

3000A F
3000A T
3000A Bus

22
23

2-500 kcmil,
Cu per phase

24

MCC 800A Bus
3-400 kcmil,
Cu per phase

3-400 kcmil,
Cu per phase
Swbd. 1000A Bus

1000A Busway




25

Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
#1
#2
#3
1200A F
1200A F
800A F
1000A T
1000A T
700A T



(Noncontinuous Load) + (125%) (Continuous Load) per NEC Section 220-10(b).
Nearest standard size, not less than calculated value.

Table 21.3-119. Standard 100% Rated Design

26
27

Noncontinuous Load + Continuous Load = Total Minimum Load
Calculation
per NEC
of Minimum
Total Load 

200 + 400 = 600 A

Breaker
Frame (F)
Trip (T)
Rating

(F) (T)
600 A/600 A

0 + 800 = 800 A

Line Diagram

1000 + 0 = 1000 A

2400 A 
2500A F
2500A T
2500A Bus

28
29

Bus/Cable
Rating

(F) (T)
800 A/800 A

(F) (T)
1200 A /1000 A

(F) (T)
2500 A /2500 A

Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
#1
#2
#3
800A F
1200A F
600A F
800A T
1000A T
600A T
2-350 kcmil,
Cu per phase

600 A

800 A

1000 A

2500 A



MCC 600A Bus
2-600 kcmil,
Cu per phase

30

32
33




(Noncontinuous Load) + (Continuous Load) per NEC Section 220-10(b) Exception.
Sum of all NEC calculated minimum feeder loads.
Nearest standard size, not less than calculated value.

Table 21.3-120. The Result — Savings in Both Switchboard and Cable Costs
Design

Minimum Total Load
(Amperes)

Standard

700

1000

1000

2700

600

800

1000

2400

100% Rated
Results

34
35
36

Swbd. 1000A Bus

800A Busway



31

3-400 kcmil,
Cu per phase

Rated
Breaker

100% Rated Breaker
Systems Save Money:
Significant economic
The standard design
Dramatic economic
Calculations indicate The 100% approach proadvantages — in lower rated
requires higher rated,
advantages are
either approach
vides significant economic and sized breakers, less cable,
more expensive breaker achieved by using
results in the same
advantages. It not only
and significant reductions in
and bus. Although the
the 100% rated
size breaker and hard- permits use of the smaller equipment floor and wall
minimum total load is
design. Substantial
ware. A 100% rated
size 2500 ampere breaker
space — can be realized when
700 amperes, most
savings result from
breaker would be
(nearest standard size)
the results of a systems
breakers and hardware
using an 800 ampere more expensive
and main bus. Eaton offers analysis favor the 100% rated
are available only in stan- busway and signifialthough the final
a 2500 ampere frame
design approach.
dard sizes requiring even cant savings are also decision could rest
breaker which further
more expensive “nearest provided by the
on whether or not
enhances the economic
standard size” breakers
smaller breaker frame future load growth
value of the 100% rated
and hardware.
and cable size.
is anticipated.
design.

37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0661

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

21.3-65

Application Information — Series Rated System

Series Rated Systems

Evaluating the Protection Systems

General Discussion

Under most circumstances, selection
of a series rated system will reduce
initial cost and size, since downstream
breakers are not fully rated for the
prospective short circuit fault current
at their point of application. The interrupting rating of the upstream breaker
must always be equal to or greater
than the available fault current at its
line terminals. In addition, downstream
breakers must have been tested in
combination with the upstream breaker
and shown to be protected by the
upstream breaker at the assigned series
rated interrupting rating. The net result
is that the system can be assigned a
“series rated” or “integrated” rating
higher than the rating of the downstream
breaker when it is tested or applied
alone. Design of the system and selection
of breakers is based on short circuit
interruption test specified and
witnessed by UL.

Designed properly, all three systems
protect electrical equipment with
equal effectiveness. But initial cost
and continuity of service can vary
widely depending on the inherent
characteristics of the system, and
on the design philosophy adopted.

Available Short Circuit Current.
Service equipment shall be suitable
for the short circuit current available
at its supply terminal.

Because of their blow-open design,
most molded case circuit breakers are
current limiting to some degree. In a
series rated application and in the event
of a major fault, both upstream and
downstream breakers open, protecting
the lower-rated downstream devices
by limiting the let-through current.
To develop a series rated protective
system, it is suggested that the
design engineer, after completing
preliminary steps:
Define available fault current at
the line side terminals of the
upstream breaker.
■ Select an upstream breaker with an
interrupting rating equal to or greater
than the available fault current.
■ Verify the series tested interrupting
ratings of the selected combination
of breakers by referring to the tables
in this section.
■ Confirm, during installation, that the
correct breakers have been selected
by checking the nameplates appearing
on the end-use equipment.
■

Fully Rated System
A fully rated system is typically less
costly than a selectively coordinated
system and more costly than a series
rated system. All breakers are rated
for full fault current at their point of
application in accordance with the
National Electrical Code. The continuity
of service provided by the system is
less than with a selectively coordinated
system, and can be more than a series
rated system.

Selectively Coordinated System
A selectively coordinated system is the
most costly of the three. All breakers
are fully rated and upstream breakers
must have adequate short-time delay
adjusting capabilities. Continuity of
service is the highest possible.

Series Rated System
A series rated system is the least
costly. The upstream breaker is always
fully rated, but the interrupting ratings
of downstream breakers are normally
lower. Service continuity can be
acceptable after initial start-up, since
the lower-level arcing faults most
likely occur after that time can be
cleared by the downstream breaker
alone. However, under high fault
conditions, both the upstream and
downstream breakers would open,
eliminating service to the affected
portion of the system.

National Electrical Code Requirements
Requirements of the National Electrical
Code for short circuit ratings may now
be met by equipment that is marked
with ratings adequate for the available
fault current at their point of application
in the electrical system. Refer to the
current NEC for specific requirements.

Approval. The conductors and equipment
required or permitted by the Code
shall be acceptable only if approved.
See Examination of Equipment for
Safety and Examination, Identification,
Installation and Use of Equipment. See
definitions of “Approved,” “Identified,”
“Labeled” and “Listed.”

Examination, Identification, Installation
and Use of Equipment
1. Examination: In judging equipment, considerations such as the
following should be evaluated.
a. Suitability for installation
and use in conformity with
the provisions of this Code.
Suitability of equipment use
may be identified by a description marked on or provided
with a product to identify the
suitability of the product for a
specific purpose, environment
or application. Suitability of
equipment may be evidenced
by listing or labeling.
b. Mechanical strength and
durability, including, for parts
designed to enclose and protect
other equipment, the adequacy
of the protection thus provided.
c. Wire-ending and
connection space.
d. Electrical insulation.
e. Heating effects under normal
conditions of use and also
under abnormal conditions
likely to arise in service.
f. Arcing effects.
g. Classification by type, size,
voltage, current capacity
and specific use.
h. Other factors which contribute
to the practical safeguarding of
persons using or likely to come
in contact with the equipment.
2. Installation and Use: Listed or
labeled equipment shall be used
or installed in accordance with
any instructions included in the
listing or labeling.

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-66 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Application Information — Series Rated System
Interrupting Rating

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28

Equipment intended to break current
at fault levels shall have an interrupting rating sufficient for the system
voltage and the current which is available at the terminals of the equipment.
Equipment intended to break current
at other than fault levels shall have an
interrupting rating at system voltage
sufficient for the current that must
be interrupted.

Circuit Impedance and Other
Characteristics
The overcurrent protective devices,
the total impedance, the component
short circuit withstanding ratings, and
other characteristics of the circuit to
be protected shall be so selected and
coordinated as to permit the circuit
protective devices used to clear a fault
without the occurrence of extensive
damage to the electrical components
of the circuit. This fault shall be
assumed to be either two or more of
the circuit conductors, or between any
circuit conductor and the grounding
conductor or enclosing metal raceway.

Motor Contribution

29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

The fault current contribution of
motors connected between series
rated breakers must be considered.
Article 240-86(b) in the 1999 edition of
the National Electrical Code states that
for series ratings the sum of the motor,
full-load currents cannot exceed 1% of
the interrupting rating of the lowerrated circuit breaker. The actual fault
current contribution from induction
motors is about 4 times their full-load
current (impedance value of 25%).
For example, if the downstream branch
circuit breakers used in a series rated
combination have an interrupting rating of 14,000 amperes rms symmetrical
for a 480 volt system, the maximum
full-load current of motors connected
to that panel from the branch circuit
breakers is 140 amperes (1%). For typical induction motors this is equivalent
to a total horsepower at 480 volts of
approximately 115 horsepower.

Design/Test Considerations for Series
Coordinated Circuit Breakers
Test Procedures for all Cutler-Hammer
molded case circuit breakers intended
for application in series connected
systems are in full compliance with
all applicable paragraphs of the latest
edition of UL 489.

The entire system is tested, since such
tests are the only way to correctly verify the performance of overcurrent
devices under short circuit conditions.
Calibration, interruption, trip-out
and dielectric withstand tests are performed. Breakers in their as-received
condition are used for the interrupting
and intermediate interrupting capability
tests. If agreeable to concerned parties,
previously tested samples may be
used. The interrupting rating of the
line-side circuit breaker is equal to or
greater than the maximum available
fault current on the distribution system
at its point of intended application.
Tests comply also with the intent of the
proposed revisions to applicable IEC
documents.
Tests are completed in a well-defined
sequence:
Interrupting tests.
■ Intermediate interrupting tests.
■ Trip-out tests.
■ Dielectric voltage-withstand tests.
■

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Series C Circuit
Breakers intended for application in
series rated systems are subjected, in
the following sequence, to interrupting
ability, intermediate interrupting
ability, trip-out, and dielectric
voltage-withstand tests.
During testing of the series rated circuit
breakers, each breaker is mounted in
the smallest enclosure in which it is
to be used; openings in the enclosure
do not exceed 10% of its total external
area, and there are no openings
directly opposite a vent in a circuit
breaker case. The two enclosures are
connected by a 12-inch (304.8 mm)
conduit of any diameter. Each lead
from test terminals to the line-side
breaker is less than 4 feet (1.2 m) per
breaker(s), and each load shorting the
load-side breaker(s) is sized based on
the rating of the load-side breaker. The
combined length of the lead from the
line-side overcurrent protective device
of the load-side breaker and from the
load-side breaker to the shorting point,
is less than 4 feet (1.2 m) per pole.

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0662

Exception: the breakers may be
mounted in the end-use equipment
that will contain them and is marked
for use with the series combination.
The load-side breaker is positioned
as close as possible to the line-side
breaker(s). Line and load leads are
less than 4 feet (1.2 m).
A fuse is connected between the
enclosure and line terminal of the pole
least likely to arc to the enclosure, or
the neutral, if the breaker is rated 120/
240 or 480Y/277 Vac. The connection
to the load-side of the limiting impedance is #10 AWG copper wire less than
6 feet (1.8 m) long. The fuse is a 30 A
non-renewable type acceptable for
branch circuit protection; its voltage
rating is not less than the rating of the
device, and its interrupting rating is
not less than the available current.
1. Interrupting tests:
a. The test circuit is closed on
the series combination with
all breakers fully closed; and
b. The load-side breaker is closed
on the circuit while the line-side
breaker is fully closed.
Note: Random closing is used in all 3-phase
tests. When the circuit is closed on the
combination, closing is controlled in singlephase tests so that closing occurs within ten
electrical degrees of the zero-point of the
supply voltage wave.

2. Intermediate interrupting tests at
the specified available current and
maximum voltage. Procedures are
identical to those described in 1a
and 1b (above) but at the maximum
current level that causes the loadside breaker to open, but not the
line-side breaker. If the line-side
breaker is current-limiting, the series
combination shall be evaluated in
the region below its current- limiting
threshold. (There is no need for
these tests if the current is less
than the interrupting rating on
the load-side breaker.)
3. Trip-out tests of the load-side
breaker at 250% of the marked
ampere rating.
4. Dielectric voltage-withstand tests
verify that the breaker can withstand, without breakdown, a 60
(48 – 62) Hz essentially sinusoidal
potential for one minute.

Note: For further information, see IEEE
Standards 141, 242 and 446.

40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

Sheet 0663

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

Circuit Breaker Identification

Marking of Panelboards

Marking of all Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer
circuit breakers is clear for easy identification of type, rating and operating
status. Nameplates are color-coded for
immediate identification of rating, and
a color-coded bar identifies the type
and interrupting rating at common
application voltages. Operating status is
indicated clearly by the position of the
handle and color-coded flags. On and
off positions are identified by English
words and international symbols.

Marking of panelboards conforms to
the latest edition of UL 67. Markings
are clear and understandable, and
include the short circuit rating in rms
amperes; maximum voltage rating for
each short circuit rating; a statement
indicating that additional or replacement devices shall be of the same type
and of equal or greater interrupting
capacity; and, when applicable, the
identity of combinations of integral
and branch circuit overcurrent devices
that are required when applying the
marked short circuit current rating.

Scientists and engineers at the Eaton
Testing Laboratory ensure that CutlerHammer circuit breakers are the most
reliable and develop new concepts and
improvements in breaker design.
Designs and reliability are verified,
products are improved continuously
and qualified to meet UL, NEMA and
other standards. In addition, engineers
from any breaker or panelboard manufacturer can work along-side their
peers from Eaton to test their products
in the lab.
The consolidated nameplate on all
breakers provides complete identification and rating information in a format
that is easy to read and understand.
The interrupting rating of the series
combination is never permitted to be
marked on the downstream breaker.
However, the series rating may be
marked on panelboards in which the
combination has been tested and
listed if:
The upstream breaker is installed in
the panelboard as a main breaker.
■ The panelboard is a main-lug-only
type and is specifically marked to
indicate the type and rating of the
upstream listed series tested breaker
that must be applied with the
panelboard.
■

21.3-67

Application Information — Series Rated System

Fuses
Fuses can be used instead of circuit
breakers in fully rated, selectively
coordinated and series connected
protection systems. See the tables
in the back of this brochure for fuse
breakout data applied to series
connected designs.
Don’t apply fuses using the up-overdown method, which has been recommended by some fuse manufacturers
for sizing a current-limiting fuse that
protects a downstream molded case
circuit breaker with a specified rms
symmetrical interrupting rating. The
method can lead to erroneous and unsafe
conclusions, and should not be used.
Example: Assume a specific type of
current-limiting fuse rated 2000 A.
Then using the figure below:
1. Draw a vertical line from the prospective short circuit current of
200 kA to intersect the “typical
peak let-through curve at “A.”
2. Draw a horizontal line left
from Point “A” to intersect the
“prospective peak” curve at “B.”
3. Drop a vertical line from “B” to
intersect the horizontal axis and
read the recommended rating,
65 kA rms, concluding that a circuit
breaker with a 65 kA interrupting
capacity will be protected by
a specified 2000 A currentlimiting fuse.

This conclusion is wrong when the
downstream service has a blow-open
contact assembly, as does a molded
case circuit breaker or similar device. It
may be valid when the current-limiting
fuse is sized to protect a passive bus
bar system.
The reason: The up-over-down method
ignores dynamic impedance (the inherent
current-limiting of the downstream
molded case circuit breaker). Such
impedance is developed directly by the
forces of the let-through current created
when the contacts are blown open.
For proper application of currentlimiting fuses, always refer to recommendations by the manufacturer of
the circuit breaker, which are based
on actual test data.

20
21
22
23
24
25
26

Up-over-down method.
Asymmetrical
Prospective
Peak Curve
at 15%
Power
Factor

460,000
Prospective Peak Let-Through
Current in Amperes

January 2005

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

150,000

B

27
28

A
2000A
Current
Limiter
Fuse Curve

29
30

65,000
200,000
Prospective Short-Circuit rms Amperes
Do Not Use This Method

31

Figure 21.3-9. Up-Over-Down Misapplication

Application and Replacement of Breakers
Apply and replace breakers prudently,
within the design and operating
parameters of the power system. Use
the following tables to select the size
and type of circuit breaker needed to
fit virtually any application in series
rated and other protective systems.
Breakers are highly-compatible across
ratings, capacities and characteristic;
prudent replacements are as important
as initial selection.

32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-68 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

January 2005
Sheet 0664

Table 21.3-121. Index for Series Rating Tables

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

Devices –
Upstream/Downstream

System
Voltage

Pages

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker

600 V
480 V
480Y/277 V
240 V
120/240 V

21.3-68, 21.3-69
21.3-70, 21.3-71
21.3-72, 21.3-73
21.3-74 to 21.3-76
21.3-77 to 21.3-80

Fuse/Circuit Breaker

600, 480, 480/277
240, 120/240 V

21.3-81, 21.3-82

Series Connected Ratings: Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers
A wide range of breakers and combinations in the Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer
line is available that has been tested in
accordance with UL procedures for
series connected ratings: individually

applications with other undefined
distribution equipment where series
application ratings can be an advantage.

Table 21.3-122. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations 
 — 600 Volt System
Upstream
Breaker

Type

FD, FDB, HFD

Amperes, Maximum

150

Limiter Type

FD, FDB, HFD
70

LCL

LCL

KDC

KDC

HLD, HLDB

HKD

JDC

400

250

400

400

600

400

250

—

—

—

—

—

LFD3150R

LFD3070R

—

—

System kA

200

200

100

100

50

42

35

35

35

System Volts

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

Downstream
Breaker

Range
Amperes

Poles

FDB

15 – 70

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

●

FD

15 – 70

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

●

HFD

15 – 70

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

●

FDC

15 – 70

2, 3

●

●

●

FDB

80 – 150

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

●

FD

80 – 150

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

●

HFD

80 – 150

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

●

FDC

80 – 150

2, 3

●

●

●

JD

70 – 250

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

JDB

70 – 250

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

HJD

70 – 250

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

JDC

70 – 250

2, 3

●

KD

100 – 400

2, 3

●

●

●
●

KDB

100 – 400

2, 3

●

●

HKD

100 – 400

2, 3

●

●

KDC

100 – 400

2, 3

●

LD, LDB

300 – 600

2, 3

LC, LCG, LCA, LCGA

75 – 400

2, 3

●

●

●

HLC, HLCG, HLCA, HLCGA

75 – 400

2, 3

●

●

●




38

enclosed breakers in series with main
lug panelboards, main breakers integral
with branch breakers in panelboards,
in switchboards, and in meter centers.
You can rely on the enclosed data for



●

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory
(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”
Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book
or contact Eaton.

39

● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column
provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in
parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.

40

The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for
applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0665

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

21.3-69

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

Table 21.3-122. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations 
 — 600 Volt System (Continued)
Upstream
Breaker

FDC

FDC

HLD,
HLDB

KD, KDB HJD

HFD

HFD

JD, JDB FD

FD

Amperes, Maximum

225

150

600

400

250

225

150

250

225

150

Limiter Type

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

System kA
System Volts
Downstream
Breaker

Range
Amperes

35

25

25

25

25

25

18

18

18

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

Poles

15 – 70

2, 3

●

●

FD

15 – 70

2, 3

●

●

HFD

15 – 70

2, 3

FDC

15 – 70

2, 3

FDB

80 – 150

2, 3

●

●

FD

80 – 150

2, 3

●

●

HFD

80 – 150

2, 3

FDC

80 – 150

2, 3

JD

70 – 250

2, 3

●

●

●

JDB

70 – 250

2, 3

●

●

●

HJD

70 – 250

2, 3

JDC

70 – 250

2, 3

KD

100 – 400

2, 3

KDB

100 – 400

2, 3

HKD

100 – 400

2, 3

KDC

100 – 400

2, 3

LD, LDB

300 – 600

2, 3

LC, LCG, LCA, LCGA

75 – 400

2, 3

HLC, HLCG, HLCA, HLCGA

75 – 400

2, 3



21

35

FDB




20

Type

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

22
23
24

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

25
26
27
28
29
30

●

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory
(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”
Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book
or contact Eaton.

● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column
provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in
parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.
The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for
applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-70 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

January 2005
Sheet 0666

Table 21.3-123. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations 
 — 480 Volt System

20

Upstream
Breaker

Type

FDB, FD,
HFD

Amperes, Maximum 150

21

Limiter Type
System kA

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35

System Volts
Downstream
Breaker

Range
Amperes

FDB, FD,
HFD
70

LCL

LCL

FCL

NB
TRI-PAC

NB
TRI-PAC

KDC

JDC

LA
TRI-PAC
400

400

250

100

800

500

400

250

LFD3150R

LFD3070R

—

—

—

P20

P12

—

—

P10

200

200

150

150

150

100

100

100

100

100

480

480

480

480

480

480

480

480

480

480

Poles

EHD

15 – 100

2, 3

●
(80 – 100)

●
(15 – 70)

●

●

●

●

●

FDB

15 – 150

2, 3

●
(80 – 150)

●
(15 – 70)

●

●

●
(15 – 100)

●

●

FD

15 – 150

2, 3

●
(80 – 150)

●
(15 – 70)

●

●

●
(15 – 100)

●

●

HFD

15 – 150

2, 3

●
(80 – 150)

●
(15 – 70)

●

●

●
(15 – 100)

●

●

FDC

15 – 150

2, 3

●
(80 – 150)

●
(15 – 70)

●

●

JD, JDB

70 – 250

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

●

HJD

70 – 250

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

●

KD, KDB

100 – 400

2, 3

●

●

●

●

HKD

100 – 400

2, 3

●

●

●

●

LD, LDB

300 – 600

2, 3

LC, LCG, LCA,
LCGA

75 – 600

2, 3

●
(75 – 400)

●
(75 – 500)

●
(75 – 400)

HLC, HLCG, HLCA,
HLCGA

75 – 600

2, 3

●
(75 – 400)

LA, LAB, HLA

125 – 600

2, 3

●

●
(125 – 500)

MA

125 – 800

2, 3

●

●
(125 – 500)

MC, MCA, MCG,
MCGA

400 – 800

2, 3

●

●
(400 – 500)

NB

700 – 800

2, 3

●





●

●
(75 – 400)

●

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory
(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”
Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book
or contact Eaton.

● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column
provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in
parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.
The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for
applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

36
37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0667

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

21.3-71

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

Table 21.3-123. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations 
 — 480 Volt System (Continued)
Upstream
Breaker

Type

LA
TRI-PAC

FDC

FDC

FB
TRI-PAC

HLD,
HLDB

Amperes, Maximum

200

225

150

100

600

400

250

225

150

400

250

225

150

Limiter Type

P08

—

—

P06

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

100

100

100

100

65

65

65

65

65

35

25

25

25

480

480

480

480

480

480

480

480

480

480

480

480

480

System kA
System Volts
Downstream
Breaker

Range
Amperes

HKD

HJD

HFD

HFD

KD,
KDB

JD,
JDB

FD

FD

Poles

EHD

15 – 100

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

FDB

15 – 150

2, 3

●
(15 – 100)

●

●

●
(15 – 100)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

FD

15 – 150

2, 3

●
(15 – 100)

●

●
(15 – 100)

●

●

●

●

HFD

15 – 150

2, 3

●
(15 – 100)

●

●
(15 – 100)

FDC

15 – 150

2, 3

JD, JDB

70 – 250

2, 3

●
(70 – 200)

HJD

70 – 250

2, 3

●
(70 – 200)

KD, KDB

100 – 400

2, 3

HKD

100 – 400

2, 3

LD, LDB

300 – 600

2, 3

LC, LCG, LCA,
LCGA

75 – 600

2, 3

HLC, HLCG, HLCA,
HLCGA

75 – 600

2, 3

LA, LAB, HLA

125 – 600

2, 3

MA

125 – 800

2, 3

MC, MCA, MCG,
MCGA

400 – 800

2, 3

NB

700 – 800

2, 3





20
21
22
23
24
25

●

●

26
27

●

28
●
●
(75 – 400)

●
(75 – 400)

●
(125 – 400)

29
30
31
32

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory
(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”
Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book
or contact Eaton.

● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column
provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in
parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.
The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for
applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-72 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0668

Table 21.3-124. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations 
 — 480Y/277 Volt System

20

Upstream
Breaker

21
22
23
24
25
26
27

Type

FD, FDB, HFD FD, FDB, HFD LCL

LCL

FCL

KDC

JDC

FDC

FDC

LA
TRI-PAC

Amperes,
Maximum

150

250

100

400

250

225

150

200

Limiter Type

LFD3150R

LFD3070R

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

P08

200

200

150

150

150

100

100

100

100

100

System Volts

480Y/277

480Y/277

480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277

Downstream Range
Breaker
Amperes

Poles

EHD

15 – 100

1

EHD

15 – 100

2, 3

●
(80 – 100)

FDB

15 – 150

2, 3

●
(80 – 150)

FD

15 – 150

1

FD

15 – 150

2, 3

HFD

15 – 150

1

HFD

15 – 150

2, 3

GHB, GHC

15 – 100

1

GHB, GHC

15 – 100

2, 3





30
31
32

400

System kA

28
29

70

●
(80 – 150)

●
(80 – 150)

●
(80 – 100)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
(15 – 70)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
(15 – 70)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
(15 – 100)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
(15 – 100)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
(15 – 100)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
(15 – 100)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
(15 – 100)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
(15 – 50)

●
(15 – 50)

●

●

●
(15 – 70)

●
(15 – 70)

●
(15 – 70)

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory
(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”
Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book
or contact Eaton.

● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column
provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in
parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.
The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for
applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0669

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

21.3-73

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

Table 21.3-124. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations 
 — 480Y/277 Volt System (Continued)
Upstream
Breaker

Type

FB
TRI-PAC

HKD

HJD

HFD

HFD

KD,
KDB

KDC

HKD

JDC

HJD

JD,
JDB

FD

FD

KD,
KDB

JD,
JDB

Amperes,
Maximum

100

400

250

225

150

400

400

400

250

250

250

225

150

400

250

Limiter Type

P06

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

System kA

100

65

65

System Volts

480Y/
277

480Y/
277

480Y/
277

65

65

35

480Y/ 480Y/ 480Y/
277
277
277

25

25

25

25

25

480Y/ 480Y/ 480Y/ 480Y/ 480Y/
277
277
277
277
277

25

25

22

22
23

EHD

15 – 100

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

EHD

15 – 100

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

FDB

15 – 150

2, 3

●
(15 – 100)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

FD

15 – 150

1

●
(15 – 100)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

FD

15 – 150

2, 3

●
(15 – 100)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

HFD

15 – 150

1

●
(15 – 100)

●

HFD

15 – 150

2, 3

●
(15 – 100)

●

GHB, GHC

15 – 100

1

GHB, GHC

15 – 100

2, 3



21

22

480Y/ 480Y/ 480Y/ 480Y/
277
277
277
277

Downstream Range
Poles
Breaker
Amperes




20

●

●

●
●
(15 – 50) (15 – 50)

24
25
26
27

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
(15 – 50)

●

●

●

●

●
(15 – 50)

●

●

●

●

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory
(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”
Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book
or contact Eaton.

● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column
provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in
parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.
The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for
applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-74 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0670

Table 21.3-125. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations 
 — 240 Volt System

20

Upstream
Breaker

Type

LCL

KDC

LCL

JDC

FDC

FCL

FD, FDB, HFD FD, FDB, HFD HLD, HLDB

Amperes, Maximum

400

400

250

250

150

100

150

Limiter Type

—

—

—

—

—

—

LFD
3150R

LFD
3070R

—

System kA

200

200

200

200

200

200

200

200

100

System Volts

240

240

240

240

240

240

240

240

240

21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

Downstream
Breaker

600

Poles

BA, BR, HQP, QC

15 – 100

2, 3

●

●

●

●
(80 – 100)

●
(15 – 70)

QBHW, BRH, QPHW, QCHW

15 – 100

2, 3

●

●

●

●
(80 – 100)

●
(15 – 70)

HBAX, QHPX, QHCX

15 – 100

3

●

●

●

●
(80 – 100)

●
(15 – 70)

HBAW, QHPW, QHCW

15 – 20

3

●

●

●

GB, GHB

15 – 100

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
(80 – 100)

●
(15 – 70)

●

GC, GHC

15 – 100

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
(80 – 100)

●
(15 – 70)

●

CA, CAH, HC

100 – 225

2, 3

●

●

●

●

BJ, BJH

100 – 225

2, 3

●

●

●

●

ED

100 – 225

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

EDH

100 – 225

2, 3

●

●

●

●

EHD

15 – 100

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
(80 – 100)

●
(15 – 70)

FD, FDB

15 – 150

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

●
(15 – 100)

●
(80 – 150)

●
(15 – 70)

HFD

15 – 150

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

●
(15 – 100)

●
(80 – 150)

●
(15 – 70)

JD, JDB

70 – 250

2, 3

●

●

●

●

HJD

70 – 250

2, 3

●

●

●

●

DK

250 – 400

2, 3

●

●

●

KD, KDB

100 – 400

2, 3

●

●

●

HKD

100 – 400

2, 3

●

●

LD, LDB

300 – 600

2, 3

HLD

300 – 600

2, 3

LC, LCG, LCA, LCGA

75 – 400

2, 3

●

●

HLC, HLCG, HLCA, HLCGA

75 – 400

2, 3

●

●




37

Range
Amperes

70



●

●

●

●

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory
(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”
Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book
or contact Eaton.

38

● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column
provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in
parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.

39

The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for
applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0671

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

21.3-75

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

Table 21.3-125. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations 
 — 240 Volt System (Continued)
Upstream
Breaker

Type

NB TRI-PAC NB TRI-PAC LA TRI-PAC FB TRI-PAC KDC HKD JDC HJD EDH FDC HFD KDC HKD

Amperes, Maximum 800

500

200

100

400

400

250

250

225

150

150

400

400

Limiter Type

P20

P12

P08

P06

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

65

65

240

240

240

240

240

240

240

240

240

240

240

240

240

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

System kA
System Volts
Downstream
Breaker

Range
Amperes

Poles

BA, BR, HQP, QC

15 – 100

2, 3

●

●

QBHW, BRH, QPHW,
QCHW

15 – 100

2, 3

●

●

●

HBAX, QHPX, QHCX

15 – 100

3

●

●

●

HBAW, QHPW, QHCW

15 – 20

3

●

●

●

GB, GHB

15 – 100

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

GC, GHC

15 – 100

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

CA, CAH, HCA

100 – 225

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

BJ, BJH

100 – 225

2, 3

●

●

●

ED

100 – 225

2, 3

●

●

EDH

100 – 225

2, 3

EHD

15 – 100

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

FD, FDB

15 – 150

2, 3

●
(15 – 100)

●
(15 – 100)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

HFD

15 – 150

2, 3

●

●

●

JD, JDB

70 – 250

2, 3

●

●

●

HJD

70 – 250

2, 3

DK

250 – 400

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

KD, KDB

100 – 400

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

HKD

100 – 400

2, 3

LD, LDB

300 – 600

2, 3

HLD

300 – 600

2, 3

LC, LCG, LCA, LCGA

75 – 400

2, 3

●

●

●

HLC, HLCG, HLCA,
HLCGA

75 – 400

2, 3

●

●

●





●

●

●

●
●

●

●

●

21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28

●
●

20

30

●
●

29

●

31

●

32
33

●

34

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory
(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”
Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book
or contact Eaton.

● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column
provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in
parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.
The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for
applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-76 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0672

Table 21.3-125. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations 
 — 240 Volt System (Continued)

20

Upstream
Breaker

21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

39
40

KD,
KDB,
DK

JD,
JDB

ED

HFD

FD

KD,
KDB,
DK

KD,
KDB,
DK

CAH BJH QBHW, FDB
QPHW
QCHW,
BRH

EHD

250

250

225 150

150 100

400

400

225

225

100

150

100

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Range
Amperes

—
65

65

65

240

240

240

65

—
65

240 240

65

—
65

42

22

22

22

22

18

18

240 240

240

240

240

240

240

240

240

●
(15 – 70)

●

●

Poles

BA, BR,
HQP, QC

15 – 100

2, 3

●

QBHW, BRH,
QPHW, QCHW

15 – 100

2, 3

●

HBAX, QHOX,
QHCX

15 – 100

3

HBAW, QHPW,
QHCW

15 – 20

3

GB, GHB

15 – 100

2, 3

●

●

GC, GHC

15 – 100

2, 3

●

●

CA, CAH, HCA

100 – 225

2, 3

●

BJ, BJH

100 – 225

2, 3

●

ED

100 – 225

2, 3

EDH

100 – 225

2, 3

EHD

15 – 100

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

FD, FDB

15 – 150

2, 3

●

●

●

●

●

HFD

15 – 150

2, 3

JD, JDB

70 – 250

2, 3

HJD

70 – 250

2, 3

DK

250 – 400

2, 3

KD, KDB

100 – 400

2, 3

HKD

100 – 400

2, 3

LD, LDB

300 – 600

2, 3

HLD

300 – 600

2, 3

LC, LCG,
LCA, LCGA

75 – 400

2, 3

HLC, HLCG,
HLCA, HLCGA

75 – 400

2, 3




GB,
GC

Amperes, Maximum 400

System Volts
Downstream
Breaker

HJD

Limiter Type
System kA



38

Type

●
●
(15 – 70) (15 – 70)
●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
(15 – 70)

●

●

●
(15 – 70)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
●
(15 – 70) (15 – 70)

●
●

●

●

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory
(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”
Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book
or contact Eaton.

● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column
provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in
parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.
The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for
applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0673

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

21.3-77

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

Table 21.3-126. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations 
 — 120/240 Volt System
Upstream
Breaker

Type

KDC

LCL

JDC

FDC

FCL

FD, FDB, HFD

Amperes, Maximum 400

LCL

400

250

250

225

100

150

Limiter Type

FD, FDB, HFD
70

KDC

—

—

—

—

—

—

LFD3150R

LFD3070R

—

System kA

200

200

200

200

200

200

200

200

100

System Volts

120/240

120/240

120/240

120/240

120/240

120/240

120/240

120/240

120/240

Downstream
Breaker

Range
Amperes

Poles

BA, BR, HQP, QC

15 – 70

1

●

●

●

●

BA, BR, HQP, QC

15 – 125

2

●
(15 – 100)

●
(15 – 100)

●
(15 – 70)

●
(15 – 100)

QBHW, BRH,
QPHW, QCHW

15 – 70

1

●

●

●

●

QBHW, BRH,
QPHW, QCHW

15 – 125

2

●
(15 – 100)

●
(15 – 100)

●
(15 – 100)

●
(15 – 100)

HBAX, QHPX,
QHCX

15 – 70

1

●

●

●

●

HBAX, QHPX,
QHCX

15 – 100

2

●

●

●

●

QHPW, HBAW,
QHCW

15 – 30

1, 2

●

●

●

●

QBGF, QPGF,
QHCB

15 – 30

1, 2

●

●

●

●

GB, GHB

15 – 100

1, 2

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
(80 – 100)

●
(15 – 70)

●

GC, GHC

15 – 100

1, 2

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
(80 – 100)

●
(15 – 70)

●

EHD

15 – 100

1, 2

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
(80 – 100)

●
(15 – 70)

●

FD

15 – 150

1, 2

●

●

●

●

●

●
(15 – 100)

●
(80 – 150)

●
(15 – 70)

●

HFD

15 – 150

1, 2

●

●

●

●

●

●
(15 – 100)

●
(80 – 150)

●
(15 – 70)

●





20

400

21
22

●
●
(80 – 100)

●
(80 – 100)

●
(80 – 100)

23

●
(15 – 70)
●

●

●
(15 – 70)

●

●

●

●
(15 – 70)

●
●

●

25
26
27

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory
(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”
Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book
or contact Eaton.

● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column
provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in
parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.
The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for
applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

24

28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-78 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0674

Table 21.3-126. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations 
 — 120/240 Volt System (Continued)

20
21
22

Upstream
Breaker

Type

JDC

HJD

EDH

FDC

HFD

FB TRI-PAC

LA TRI- PAC KDC

Amperes, Maximum 400

HKD

250

250

225

150

225

100

100

400

Limiter Type

—

—

—

—

—

—

P06

P08

—

System kA

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

System Volts

120/240

120/240

120/240

120/240

120/240

120/240

120/240

120/240

Downstream
Breaker

Range
Amperes

Poles

65
120/240

BA, BR, HQP, QC

15 – 70

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

23

BA, BR, HQP, QC

15 – 125

2

●

●

●

●
(15 – 70)

●
(15 – 100)

●
(15 – 100)

●
(15 – 70)

24

QBHW, BRH,
QPHW, QCHW

15 – 70

1

●

●

●

●

●

QBHW, BRH,
QPHW, QCHW

15 – 125

2

●

●

●
(15 – 100)

●
(15 – 100)

●
(15 – 100)

HBAX, QHPX,
QHCX

15 – 70

1

●

●

●

●

●

HBAX, QHPX,
QHCX

15 – 100

2

●

●

●

●

●

QHPW, HBAW,
QHCW

15 – 30

1, 2

QBGF, QPGF,
QHCB

15 – 30

1, 2

●
(15 – 40)

●

GB, GHB

15 – 100

1, 2

●

●

●

●

●

GC, GHC

15 – 100

1, 2

●

●

●

●

●

EHD

15 – 100

1, 2

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

FD

15 – 150

1, 2

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

HFD

15 – 150

1, 2

●

●

25
26
27
28
29
30




31
32
33



●
(15 – 40)

●

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory
(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”
Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book
or contact Eaton.

● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column
provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in
parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.
The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for
applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

34
35
36
37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0675

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

21.3-79

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

Table 21.3-126. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations 
 — 120/240 Volt System (Continued)
Upstream
Breaker

Type

JDC

Amperes, Maximum

250

150

400

400

250

250

225

150

225

100

Limiter Type

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

System kA

FDC

65

System Volts

65

120/240

120/240

HKD

65

KD, KDB, DK HJD

65

65

120/240 120/240

Downstream
Breaker

Range
Amperes

Poles

BA, BR, HQP, QC

15 – 70

1

●
(15 – 100)

●

●

BA, BR, HQP, QC

15 – 125

2

●

●

QBHW, BRH,
QPHW, QCHW

15 – 70

1

●

QBHW, BRH,
QPHW, QCHW

15 – 125

2

HBAX, QHPX,
QHCX

15 – 70

HBAX, QHPX,
QHCX

65

120/240 120/240

HFD

65

65

120/240

FD

GB, GC

65

120/240

21

120/240

120/240

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

15 – 100

2

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

QHPW, HBAW,
QHCW

15 – 30

1, 2

QBGF, QPGF,
GFCB

15 – 30

1, 2

●
(15 – 20)

●
(15 – 20)

●
(15 – 40)

●

GB, GHB

15 – 100

1, 2

●

●

●

●

●

●

GC, GHC

15 – 100

1, 2

●

●

●

●

●

●

EHD

15 – 100

1, 2

●

●

●

●

●

FD

15 – 150

1, 2

●

●

●

●

●

HFD

15 – 150

1, 2

●

●

●



●

●
●

●

●

●

●
●
(15 – 100) (15 – 100)
●

●

●
●
●
●
(15 – 100) (15 – 100) (15 – 100) (15 – 100)

●
(15 – 20)

20

65

●




●

JD, JDB ED

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory
(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”
Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book
or contact Eaton.

● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column
provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in
parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.
The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for
applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-80 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

January 2005
Sheet 0676

Table 21.3-126. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations 
 — 120/240 Volt System (Continued)

20

Upstream
Breaker

21

Type

KD, KDB,
DK

23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

33
34

QBHW, QPHW, BWH
QCHW

BJH

FDB

EHD

400

225

100

225

225

150

100

Limiter Type

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—
42

System Volts

22

120/240

22

120/240

22

120/240

25

120/240

22

18

120/240

120/240

18

120/240

120/240

Downstream
Breaker

Range
Amperes

Poles

BA, BR, HQP, QC

15 – 70

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

BA, BR, HQP, QC

15 – 125

2

●

●
(15 – 70)

●

●
(15 – 100)

●
(15 – 100)

●
(15 – 100)

●

●

QBHW, BRH,
QPHW, QCHW

15 – 70

1

●

●

QBHW, BRH,
QPHW, QCHW

15 – 125

2

●

●

HBAX, QHPX,
QHCX

15 – 70

1

HBAX, QHPX,
QHCX

15 – 100

2

QHPW, HBAW,
QHCW

15 – 30

1, 2

QBGF, QPGF,
GFCB

15 – 30

1, 2

●

●

GB, GHB

15 – 100

1, 2

GC, GHC

15 – 100

1, 2

EHD

15 – 100

1, 2

FD

15 – 150

1, 2

HFD

15 – 150

1, 2





32

CAH

Amperes, Maximum 400
System kA

22

KD, KDB,
DK

●

●

●

Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory
(Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”
Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book
or contact Eaton.

● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column
provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in
parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating.
The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for
applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

35
36
37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0677

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

21.3-81

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

Table 21.3-127. Fuse/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations 
 — Active Circuit Breakers
Upstream
Fuse 

Type

RK

J, T

J, T

RK

RK

J, T

J, T

RK

J, T

J, T

RK

J, T

J, T

RK

J, T

RK

Amperes, Maximum 200

J, T

100

400

600

400

200

400

200

100

400

200

100

400

200

100

200

100

System kA

100

100

100

100

100

100

200

200

200

100

200

200

100

100

100

100

100

System Volts

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

120/240

120/240

120/240

240

240

240

480

480

277

277

●

●

Downstream
Breaker

Range
Amperes

Poles

FD, HFD, FDC,
FDB

15 – 150

2, 3, 4

JD, HJD, JDC,
JDB

70 – 250

2, 3, 4

●

KD, HKD, KDC,
KDB

100 – 400

2, 3, 4

●

BA, BR, HQP,
QC, QBHW,
BRH, QPHW,
HBAX, QHPX,
QHCX

15 – 70

1

●

●

●

BA, BR, HQP,
QC, QBHW,
BRH, QPHW,
QCHW, HBAX,
QHPX, QHCX

15 – 100

2

●

●

●

QHPW, HBAW,
QHCW

15 – 30

1, 2

BA, BR, HQP,
QC, QBHW,
BRH, QPHW,
QCHW

15 – 100

2, 3

HBAX, QHPX,
QHCX

15 – 100

3

●

●

●

HBAW, QHPW,
QHCW

15 – 20

3

●

●

●

EHD

15 – 100

2, 3, 4

EHD

15 – 100

1

●

●

FD, HFD

15 – 150

1

●

●






20
21
22

●
●

●

23
●

24
25
26

●

●

●

27
●

●

●

28
29
●

●

Fuse/Circuit Breaker and Fuse/Motor Circuit Protector series connected combinations shown in above tabulations listed by Underwriters Laboratories
in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”
Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book
or contact Eaton.
RK ratings shown are applicable for both RK1 and RK5 fuses. RK1 fuses in higher ampere ratings may also provide series protection.

The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for
applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-82 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Home

Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0678

Table 21.3-128. Fuse/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations 
 — Active Circuit Breakers

20
21
22
23
24
25

Upstream
Fuse 

RK

J, T

RK

J, T

RK

J, T

J, T

J, T

J

L

RK

L

Amperes, Maximum 400

200

200

200

400

200

400

600

200

100

800

600

2000

System kA

200

100

200

200

100

100

200

100

65

100

200

200

200

System Volts

480/277 480/277 240

240

240

240

240

240

277

277

480

600

480

Downstream
Breaker

Range
Amperes
15 –

15 – 100

2, 3

CA

125 – 225

2, 3

CAH, HCA

125 – 225

2, 3

MA, HMA, MC,
MCAM MCG,
MCGA, HMCA,
HMCGA, HMCG,
MDL, HMDL, ND,
HND

125 – 800

2, 3

1000 – 3000

2, 3






20

Poles

GHB, GHC



27

J, T

GHBS

PC, PCG, PCA,
PCGA

26

Type

●

1
●

●

●
●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
●

●

●

Fuse/Circuit Breaker and Fuse/Motor Circuit Protector series connected combinations shown in above tabulations listed by Underwriters Laboratories
in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”
Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book
or contact Eaton.
RK ratings shown are applicable for both RK1 and RK5 fuses. RK1 fuses in higher ampere ratings may also provide series protection.

Table 21.3-129. Fuse/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations  — Active Circuit Breakers

28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

Upstream
Fuse 

Type

RK

L

J, T

RK

L

J, T

RK

RK

RK

J, T

RK

J, T

Amperes, Maximum 600

J, T

400

1200 600

600

400

1200 600

400

100

200

200

400

100

400

100

200

200

100 100

200

200

100 100

200

200

100

100

100

200

200

200

600

600

600 600

480

480

480 240

120/240 120/240 120/240 277

277

240

240

480/277

●

●

●

●

●

●

System kA
System Volts
Downstream
Breaker

Range
Amperes

Poles

LC, LCA, LCG,
LCGA, HLC,
HLCA, HLCG,
HLCGA

125 – 600

2, 3

LC, LCA, LCG,
LCAG, HLC,
HLCA, HLCG,
HLCGA

74 – 400

2, 3

GB, GC, GHB,
GHC

15 – 100

1

GHB, GHC

15 – 100

1

GB, GC, GHB,
GHC

15 – 100

2, 3

GHB, GHC

15 – 100

2, 3

MA, HMA, MC,
MCA, MCG,
MCGA, HMCA,
HMCGA,
HMCG, MDL,
HMDL, ND,
HND

125 – 800

2, 3

NB, NC, NCA,
NCG, NCGA,
HNB, HNC,
HNCA, HNCG,
HNCGA, MDL,
HMDL, ND,
HND

600 – 1200

2, 3





RK

●

RK

RK

●

●

●

●

●

●
●

●

●
●

●

●

Fuse/Circuit Breaker and Fuse/Motor Circuit Protector series connected combinations shown in above tabulations listed by Underwriters Laboratories
in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.”
Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book
or contact Eaton.
RK ratings shown are applicable for both RK1 and RK5 fuses. RK1 fuses in higher ampere ratings may also provide series protection.

The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for
applicable UL recognized assembly combinations.

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0679

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Index

21.3-83

Selection Guide — Panelboard Replacement Breakers

Panelboard Replacement Breaker Selection Guide
Panelboard Replacement Breakers are
generally for use as replacement for
out-of-production panelboard circuit
breakers where both physical and
electrical interchangeability is

required. Where possible, consideration should be given to application
of either Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer or
original Westinghouse circuit breakers

For additional information on replacement circuit breakers and accessories
refer to the Cutler-Hammer YES Catalog.

Table 21.3-130. Replacement Breakers
Breaker
Type

Amperes

240 Vac

21
22

Panelboard Replacement Breaker Interrupting Ampere Rating
120 Vac

20

277 V (1-Pole)

480 Vac

Asym.

Sym.

Asym.

Sym.

Asym.

Sym.

Asym.

Sym.

Asym.

125 V
(1-Pole)

250 Vdc

Sym.

600 Vac

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
5,000
—

—
5,000
—

23

RE
RE
REA

15 – 20
15 – 100
15 – 20

—
7,500
—

—
7,500
—

—
7,500
—

—
7,500
—

10,000

10,000

10,000

10,000

—
—
—

REA
REH
RF

15 – 100
15 – 100
15 – 100

7,500
—
—

7,500
—
—

7,500
18,000
18,000

7,500
20,000
20,000

—
10,000
—

—
10,000
—

—
14,000
14,000

—
15,000
15,000

—
—
14,000

—
—
15,000

5,000
—
—

5,000
10,000
10,000

RFA
RHF
RHFA

15 – 150
15 – 100
15 – 150

—
—
—

—
—
—

18,000
65,000
65,000

20,000
75,000
75,000

—
—
—

—
—
—

14,000
25,000
25,000

15,000
30,000
30,000

14,000
18,000
18,000

15,000
20,000
20,000

—
—
—

10,000
20,000
20,000

RJ
LA
LA

70 – 225
70 – 225
125 – 400

—
—
—

—
—
—

22,000
42,000
42,000

25,000
50,000
50,000

—
—
—

—
—
—

18,000
30,000
30,000

20,000
35,000
35,000

14,000
22,000
22,000

15,000
25,000
25,000

—
—
—

10,000
20,000
20,000

RK
RKL
RLM

70 – 225
125 – 400
125 – 800

—
—
—

—
—
—

25,000
42,000
42,000

30,000
50,000
50,000

—
—
—

—
—
—

22,000
30,000
30,000

25,000
35,000
35,000

22,000
22,000
22,000

25,000
25,000
25,000

—
—
—

10,000
20,000
20,000

27

RHK
RHKL
RHLM

70 – 225
125 – 400
125 – 800

—
—
—

—
—
—

65,000
65,000
65,000

75,000
75,000
75,000

—
—
—

—
—
—

35,000
35,000
35,000

40,000
40,000
40,000

25,000
25,000
25,000

30,000
30,000
30,000

—
—
—

20,000
20,000
20,000

28

Table 21.3-131. Replacement Breakers
Current
Panelboard
Circuit
Breaker Type

Out-ofProduction
Circuit
Breaker Type

RE
REA
REH

E

EA 

EH 


RFA
RHFA
RF

FA 

HFA 

F


RHF
RJ
RK

240 480 600
●
●

RF3100 is a newly manufactured,
3-Pole, 100 Ampere Trip Panelboard
Replacement Breaker for an out-ofproduction F3100.
R

Designates new panelboard
replacement breaker

●
●
●

F

Identifies the out-of-production
circuit breaker frame

HF 

J
K

●
●
●

3

Number of poles

RHK
RKL
RHKL

HK 
KL 
HKL 

●
●
●

Notes:

RLM
RHLM
LA
LA

LM 
HLM 
JK 
JKL 

●
●
●
●





●

Last manufacture date — 1974.
Last manufacture date — 1967.

Replacement of all out-of-production
panelboard circuit breakers other than
the “JK” and “JKL” types are designated by the easily identifiable addition of an “R” prefix to the out-ofproduction circuit breaker catalog
number that they replace.

100 Trip ampere rating

1. Panelboard Replacement Circuit
Breakers have non-interchangeable
trip units and the same interrupting
capacity as the out-of-production
circuit breakers that they replace.
2. The RE breaker has off-center
terminals just like the E breaker
it is replacing.
3. For out-of-production breakers,
the “B” suffix denotes 277 Vac
rating for the Panelboard
Replacement Breaker.
(Example: RE3020B)

25
26

29

An Example:

Volts ac
(50/60 Hz)

24

4. Some Panelboard Replacement
Breakers do not have the same
physical dimensions or mounting
holes as the breakers that they
replace. For example, the types
REH, RFA and RHFA are 6 inches
(152.4 mm) in length and the
breakers they replace, EH, FA and
HFA are 6-1/2 inches (165.1 mm)
in length. Mounting hardware is
provided with each breaker to
resolve these differences, and
must be installed to ensure a
proper fit.
5. Panelboard Replacement Breakers
can be installed in the following
style of out-of-production
Westinghouse panelboards:
ABH

NEB

A2B

NHDP

CDP

NHEB

NAB

NH1B

NA1B

NLAB-AB

NA1B-LX

NLAB-ABH

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38

NDP

39
40
CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.3-84 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0680

This page intentionally left blank.

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0681

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Microprocessor Trip Units

Index

21.4-1

General Description

Contents

20

Trip Unit Selection Chart . . . . . 21.4-1
Molded Case, SPB and DSII
Trip Units (Digitrip and OPTIM)
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4-2
Protection Features . . . . . . . 21.4-3
System Communications . . 21.4-4
Time-Current Curve Shaping . 21.4-5
Zone Selective Interlocking . . 21.4-6
Digitrip OPTIM . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4-7
Digitrip Selection Guide. . . . 21.4-8
Magnum DS Trip Units
(Digitrip 520, 520M, 520MC and 1150)
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4-9
Zone Selective Interlocking . . 21.4-9
Digitrip Selection Guide. . . . 21.4-10

21
22
23
24
Circuit Breakers with Microprocessor Trip Units

25
26

Table 21.4-1. Digitrip RMS Circuit Breaker Trip Unit Selection Chart
Description

Digitrip Digitrip Digitrip OPTIM Digitrip Digitrip OPTIM Digitrip OPTIM Digitrip Digitrip Digitrip Digitrip
310
310+
510
550
610
810
750
910
1050
520
520M
520MC 1150

27

Circuit Breaker Type
Molded Case J250-Frame 250 Ampere X

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Molded Case K-Frame 400 Ampere

X

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

Molded Case L-Frame 600 Ampere

X

X

—

X

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

Molded Case M-Frame 800 Ampere

X

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Molded Case N-Frame 1200 Ampere

X

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

—

—

Molded Case R-Frame 2500 Ampere

X

—

X

—

X

X

—

X

X

—

—

—

—

Insulated Case SPB

—

—

X

—

X

X

X

X

X

—

—

—

—

Power Breaker DSII/DSLII

—

—

X

—

X

X

X

X

X

—

—

—

—

Power Breaker Magnum DS

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

X

X

X

Curve Shaping Functions

5

5

9

10

9

9

10

9

10

9

9

9

10

Front Adjustable

X

X

X

—

X

X

—

X

—

X

X

X

—

Programmable

—

—

—

X

—

—

X

—

X

—

—

—

X

Zone Selective Interlocking

—

—

X

X


X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Load Monitoring

—

—

—

X

X

X

X

X

X

—

X

X

X

Diagnostics

—

—

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Power/Energy Monitoring

—

—

—

—

—

X

—

X

X

—

—

—

X

Harmonics

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

X

X

—

—

—

X

Waveform Capture

—

—

—

—

Features

—

—

—

X

X

—

—

—

X




—

X

X

X

X

—

—

X

X

—

—

—

—

X

—

X

X

X

Communications

—

—

—

X

Ground Fault Alarm

X 

—

—

X 







Optional feature.
Requires auxiliary alarm module below R-Frames.
Not available in J250-Frame yet.

Note: For time current curves for the trip units, see the Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breaker CD-ROM SA.73A.01.T.E.

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

21.4-2 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Microprocessor Trip Units
General Description — Molded Case, SPB and DSII Trip Units

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

Digitrip and OPTIM Trip Units
The Eaton Corporation offers the most
comprehensive range of electronic trip
units in the industry for Cutler-Hammer
Molded Case Circuit Breakers, SPB
Insulated Case Circuit Breakers, and
DSII Power Circuit Breakers. All electronic trip units are rms sensing and
can be applied from 70 amperes up
through 5000 amperes.
Eaton offers electronic trip units as
standard for molded case circuit breakers rated 1000 amperes and above and
offers electronic trip units as optional for
molded case circuit breakers 70 amperes
up through 800 amperes.
Digitrip electronic trip units are ac
devices that employ microprocessorbased technology that provides a true
rms current sensing means for proper
correlation with thermal characteristics
of conductors and equipment. The primary function of the Digitrip electronic
trip unit is to provide circuit protection.
This is achieved by analyzing the secondary current signals received from
the circuit breaker current sensors and
initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker
shunt trip when pre-set current levels
and time delay settings are exceeded.

Electronic trip units are applied
to distribution systems when high
standards of protection and coordination
are called for. In addition, electronic
trip units can provide further enhanced
features such as alarming, diagnostics,
system monitoring and communications.
Cutler-Hammer rms sensing trip units
fall into two main categories:
Front adjustable trip units
(Digitrip RMS 310, 310+, 510, 610,
810 and 910).
■ Programmable trip units
(Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050).
■

Note: OPTIM 750 programmable trip units
not available in molded case circuit breakers.

Front Adjustable Trip Units
Front adjustable trip units are electronic trip units that have up to nine
time-current setting options that are
set by switches mounted on the front
of the trip unit. The application for
front adjustable trip units would be
distribution systems that can be coordinated within the range of settings
available and that do not require
sophisticated coordination strategies to
be applied down through the distribution
system to small rated breakers.

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0682

Programmable Trip Units
Programmable trip units are electronic
trip units that have up to ten timecurrent setting options that are programmed electronically by the use of a
programming device. The application
for programmable trip units would be
high integrity distribution systems that
require superior levels of system
coordination coupled with system
alarming, diagnostics and monitoring.

Rating Plugs
Rating plugs provide a means to
establish the breaker’s continuous
current rating. Rating plugs are colorcoded and interchangeable to make it
easy to match the correct rating plug
with the correct trip unit. The same
rating plug can be applied to both 50
and 60 Hz distribution systems. In
general, most rating plugs are of the
fixed ampere rating type. Eaton offers
an adjustable rating plug as an option
for the Digitrip RMS 310 trip unit.

30
31
Digitrip 310

32
33
Digitrip 1050

Digitrip 310+

34
35
OPTIM 550

Digitrip 910

36
37
OPTIM 1050

38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0683

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

Additional Protection Features
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Digitrip RMS
Electronic trip units are designed and
built with safety and reliability in mind,
both to protect the user and the equipment as well as making sure the trip
functions within its design parameters.
By providing a SURE Start discriminator
circuit to Digitrip RMS 510, 610, 810 and
910 trip units as well as to Digitrip
OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 trip units that
do not have an instantaneous setting,
the user is protected should a faulted
circuit exist. The discriminator (or making current releases as it is often called)
is set at 11 times the rating plug ampere
rating and is enabled for approximately
the first 10 cycles of current flow.
Should a fault condition exist, the
breaker will trip with no intentional time
delay on closing, protecting the user
from a potentially unsafe condition.
In addition to a discriminator, an
instantaneous override is present in all
molded case and insulated case circuit
breakers to provide additional protection for the breaker. The instantaneous
override is factory set nominally just
below the breaker withstand rating.
Digitrip electronic trip units can operate reliably in ambient temperatures
that range from -20°C to +85°C. In
the unlikely event that temperatures
exceed this ambient, the trip unit has a
built-in overtemperature trip to protect
the trip unit should the temperature
exceed these design parameters.

Thermal Memory
Digitrip RMS and Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units incorporate powered
thermal memory, i.e., the units remember recent overcurrent events which may
have initiated the trip timing sequence,
and then returned to nominal levels,
halting the sequence prior to trip initiation. In the event that the current levels
again exceed the pickup set point within
a few cycles of the original pickup, the
unit’s memory recalls the previous near
trip and automatically imposes a shorter
delay time. In effect, the unit treats multiple time related events as a single continuous event thereby preventing system
damage due to cumulative overheating.
As a further enhancement, the trip
units incorporate an unpowered thermal memory feature. In the event
that current levels cause the breaker
to trip and the breaker is immediately
reclosed, the trip unit remembers the
previous overcurrent trip and again
imposes a shorter delay time should
a further overcurrent occur before a
sufficient cooldown period has elapsed.

CA08104001E

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Microprocessor Trip Units

21.4-3

General Description — Molded Case, SPB and DSII Trip Units
Thermal memory protects the distribution system from cumulative overheating caused by repeated overcurrent
conditions. OPTIM trip units allow this
to be turned ON or OFF.

System Alarms
Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910 electronic trip units incorporate a high
load alarm capability. Set at 85% of
Ir, the alarm will be initiated once
the load current exceeds 85% for 40
seconds. Once this occurs, the HILD
message will flash in the display window and the power/relay module will
operate to send a remote signal.
Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units
also offer a high load alarm capability
but with more flexibility. OPTIM trip
units have a high load alarm that can
be programmed to operate between
50% and 100% of Ir.
Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units
incorporate a ground fault alarm
capability. Settings available for ground
fault alarm are the same as for ground
fault trip. Once a ground fault alarm
occurs, both local and remote signal
indication is available. (OPTIM 550
is remote only.)
Peak demand exceeded alarms are
available with Digitrip RMS 810 and
910 as well as Digitrip OPTIM 1050.
Power quality and total harmonic
distortion levels can be set with Digitrip
RMS 910 and Digitrip OPTIM 1050 and
an alarming feature can be initiated
should these levels be exceeded.

System Diagnostics
Whenever a circuit breaker trips, it is
normally imperative that the cause of
trip be determined quickly, the faulty
conditions rectified, and the breaker
put back into service. Digitrip RMS
510, 610, 810, 910, and Digitrip OPTIM
electronic trip units incorporate a complete package of systems diagnostics
to meet this challenge.
Four cause-of-trip LEDs are embedded
in the front of the trip unit case, indicating that the cause-of-trip was either a
long delay, short delay, instantaneous
or ground fault. Remote signal indication for cause of trip as well as magnitude of trip information is also available.

Systems Monitoring
Digitrip RMS and Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units offer a complete menu
of monitoring capability to include current, power and energy, power factor,
power quality harmonics, and other
related parameters with a high level
of accuracy.
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

Digital Display
Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910 have
a large, easy-to-read 4-digit alphanumeric display mounted on the trip
unit. The display is supported by LEDs
that indicate which parameter is being
displayed along with the unit the
value is displayed in, e.g., kA etc.

20
21
22

Current Monitoring
Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910 trip units
are capable of monitoring currents in
individual phases (A, B, C) as well as
ground currents. Digitrip OPTIM 550,
750 and 1050 trip units are capable
of monitoring currents in individual
phases (A, B, C) as well as neutral
and ground currents.

23
24
25

Values are displayed in the digital
display window in kA. Accuracy of the
current monitored values is ±2 percent
of full scale sensor rating.

26

Power and Energy Monitoring

27

For the trip unit to calculate true power
and energy values, a Potential Transformer Module is required. This PTM
is mounted internally (R frame and
larger) or externally (N frame or
smaller) to the breaker, and provides
voltage to the trip unit.
Digitrip RMS 810 and 910 trip units
are capable of monitoring peak power
demand, present power demand, and
reverse power flow in MW. Additionally,
both forward and reverse energy consumption in MWh can be monitored.
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 trip units can also
monitor the same power and energy
parameters but the units are displayed
in kW and kWh.

28
29
30
31
32

The accuracy of power monitored
values is ±4 percent of full scale
sensor/frame rating.

33

The accuracy of energy monitored
values is ±5 percent of full scale
sensor/frame rating.

34

Both the RMS 910 and OPTIM 1050
report power factor. Digitrip RMS 910
trip units have the additional capability
of monitoring line-to-line voltage.

35
36

Harmonics Monitoring
Digitrip RMS 910 and Digitrip OPTIM 1050
trip units are capable of monitoring
values of current harmonics. Percentage
of total harmonic content can be monitored for each level of harmonic content
up to the 27th harmonic. Additionally, a
total harmonic distortion (THD) value can
be calculated and displayed providing
the user with total system current
harmonic monitoring capability.

37
38
39
40

21.4-4 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Microprocessor Trip Units

Home

General Description — Molded Case, SPB and DSII Trip Units

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

System Communications

Sub-Network Displays

The Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer PowerNet
monitoring, protection, and control
communications system is the most
highly reliable, cost-effective communications system available. Digitrip
RMS 810 and 910 as well as Digitrip
OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 electronic
trip units include a capability to communicate within a PowerNet System.

Digitrip RMS 810 and 910 electronic
trip units can be connected as part
of a sub-network system to a panelmounted user interface device known
as an Assemblies Electronic Monitor
(AEMII). All trip units connected to the
sub-network can have their settings
and monitoring information displayed
on the AEMII which is normally
mounted on the front of the
switchgear or switchboard.

Note: Communications is an optional
accessory on the Digitrip OPTIM 550.

PowerNet system communications are
over a shielded twisted pair communications cable that connects devices
daisychain style.
PowerNet system communications
with Digitrip electronic trip units can be
applied for variable levels of sophistication as described as follows:

Display
Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910 electronic
trip units are front adjustable trip units
where all settings and display information is accessible from the front of the
trip unit. Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and
1050 electronic trip units are programmable by the use of a hand-held programmer called a Digitrip OPTIMizer.
The Digitrip OPTIMizer accesses,
displays and configures trip settings
and information.

Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 electronic trip units can also be connected
as part of a sub-network system to a
panel-mounted user interface device
called a Breaker Interface Module II
(BIMII). A Breaker Interface Module
accesses, configures and displays
OPTIM trip unit information as well as
for Digitrip RMS 810 and 910 trip units
as well as Energy Sentinels. The BIMII,
like the AEMII, is normally mounted
on the front of an electrical assembly.
(See Section 4 for more information
on the BIMII.)
Digitrip RMS 810, 910, and Digitrip
OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 electronic
trip units can be connected into a field
bus system which is called PowerNet.
All control, monitoring and configuration of the trip units can be carried
out from a central personal computer.
Please see Section 2 of this catalog for
more information on PowerNet.

32

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0684

■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■




Breaker status (open, closed, tripped).
Address and baud rate.
Trip event time.
Trip event counter.
View protection settings.
Change protection settings. 

Load current values.
Power and energy values. 
Power factor. 
Line-to-line voltage. 
Power quality current
harmonic values. 
Waveform capture. 
Remote status messages.
Remote control-trip/close/reset.
Reset demand/energy/trip event.
Digitrip OPTIM only.
Digitrip RMS 910 and
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 only.
Digitrip RMS 910 only.

Field Testing
System maintenance is an extremely
important part of any distribution system
and the capability to test electronic trip
units is an essential requirement.
Digitrip RMS 310 and 310+ electronic
trip units can be tested using a test
set to perform long delay, short delay,
and ground fault functional testing.
The test set is connected to the trip
unit via a built-in test receptacle.
Digitrip RMS 510, 610, 810 and 910 as
well as Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050
electronic trip units have an integral test
capability and do not require an external
test set. Both phase and ground, trip and
no trip, testing can be carried out with
the breaker in the connected cell position.

33
34
35
36

Index

Control and monitoring features
provided by Digitrip RMS 810 or 910
and Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 or 1050
trip units include:



PowerNet Network

TOC

Breaker Interface Module (BIM)

37

An Auxiliary Power Module can be
provided for bench testing Digitrip
RMS 510, 610, 810, 910, and Digitrip
OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 electronic
trip units, or when the breaker is
disconnected from the cell. The Auxiliary
Power Module operates from a 120 Vac
supply and provides control power to
test the trip unit.

38
39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0685

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

Short Delay (S)

Curve Shaping Economy

3. Short Delay Pickup
Determine or set the level of fault
current at which the short time trip
delay countdown is actuated.

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Digitrip RMS 310
trip units are available with up to five
phase and ground adjustments on the
front of the trip unit. Selective system
coordination with both upstream and
downstream devices can be achieved to
provide an economic solution for less
sophisticated distribution systems.

4. Short Delay
Sets the amount of time the breaker
will carry both a low level and high
fault currents before tripping.

1

2B
2

a. Flat Response
I2t out: For coordination with
other circuit breakers with
electronic trip devices.
b. I2t Response
I2t in: For coordination with
fuses and thermal-magnetic
breakers.

2A
3
4B

Time

21.4-5

General Description — Molded Case, SPB and DSII Trip Units

Time-Current Curve Shaping

4
4A

6

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Microprocessor Trip Units

Instantaneous (I)
5
7B
7

5. Instantaneous Pickup
Determines the level of fault
current which will actuate a trip
with no time delay.

Ground Fault (G)

7A
Current in Multiples

Figure 21.4-1. Time-Current Curve Shaping
Note: See selection guide charts for availability of adjustments.

Long Delay (L)
1. Long Delay Pickup
Determines the continuous
ampere rating of the breaker.
2. Long Delay Time
Determines the amount of time
the breaker will carry a low level
overload before tripping.
a. I2t Response
I2t in: For coordination with other
circuit breakers with electronic
trip devices and for coordination
with thermal-magnetic
circuit breakers.
b. I4t Response
I4t in: For coordination with
fuses and upstream transformer damage curves.

6. Ground Fault Pickup
Determines the level of fault
current at which the ground fault
trip delay countdown is actuated.
7. Ground Fault Delay
Determines the amount of time
the breaker will carry a ground
fault before tripping.
a. Flat Response
I2t out: For coordination with
other circuit breakers with
electronic ground fault settings.
b. I2t Response
I2t in: For coordination with
zero sequence ground fault
relays, fuses, and thermalmagnetic breakers.

Dependent Curve Shaping
For more sophisticated selective
coordination systems Digitrip RMS 510,
610, 810 and 910 trip units are available
with up to nine curve shaping choices
via switches on the front of the unit.
Curve shaping flexibility is provided by
dependent long and short delay adjustments that are based on continuous
amperes (Ir) selection.
Dependent curve shaping offers the
user additional system coordination
possibilities as well as closer thermal
protection of the system. Dependent
curve shaping adjustments are shown
by the blue portion of the graphic
time-current curve on the front of
the trip unit.
Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 trip
units offer programmable dependent
curve shaping via ten curve shaping
choices that are programmed electronically into the trip unit. OPTIM also
offers virtual infinite settings to allow
the user to optimize coordination for
a selectively coordinated distribution
system. In addition, time-current set
points can be downloaded via a
communication system from a central
personal computer. Digitrip OPTIM is
normally applied to systems where
system integrity is very important.

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.4-6 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Microprocessor Trip Units

Home

General Description — Molded Case, SPB and DSII Trip Units

20
21
22
23
24
25
26

Breaker
Number 1
Fault 1
Ground Fault Setting:
0.3 Seconds Time Delay

Zone 2

Breaker
Number 2
Zone Selective
Interlocking Wiring

Fault 2

Zone 3
Ground Fault Setting:
300 A Pickup
No Time Delay
Breaker
Number 3
Fault 3

31

36
37

Sheet 0686

0.5 Seconds Time Delay

Zone 1

Zone selective interlocking provides
positive system coordination by allowing
the breaker closest to the fault to trip
without any preset time delays. This is
achieved by setting up the distribution
system as shown in the adjacent
diagram. The hardwired connection
between the trip units sends a restraining
signal upstream allowing the breaker
closest to the fault to act instantaneously.
Zone selective interlocking also reduces
stress on the distribution system by
isolating faults without time delays.

30

35

>>

Ground Fault Setting:

Note: Optional accessory on the OPTIM 550.

29

34

<<

January 2005

Zone selective interlocking capabilities
are available with Digitrip RMS 510,
610, 810 and 910 trip units as well
as Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and
1050 trip units.

28

33

Index

Zone Selective Interlocking

27

32

TOC

Load

Figure 21.4-2. Zone Selective Interlocking

Fault 1

Fault 3

There are no interlocking signals.
The main breaker trip unit will initiate
the trip instantaneously.

The branch breaker trip unit will initiate
the trip instantaneously to clear the
fault; and Zone 3 will send an interlocking signal to the Zone 2 trip unit; and
Zone 2 will send an interlocking signal
to Zone 1.

Fault 2
The feeder breaker trip unit will initiate
the trip instantaneously to clear the
fault; and Zone 2 will send an interlocking signal to the Zone 1 trip unit.
The Zone 1 trip unit will begin to time
out, and in the event that the feeder
breaker in Zone 2 would not clear
the fault, the main breaker in Zone 1
will clear the fault in 0.5 seconds.

38

Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip units will
begin to time out, and in the event
that the branch breaker in Zone 3
would not clear the fault, the feeder
breaker in Zone 2 will clear the fault
in 0.3 seconds. Similarly, in the event
that the feeder breaker in Zone 2
would not clear the fault, the main
breaker in Zone 1 will clear the fault
in 0.5 seconds.

39
40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0687

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Microprocessor Trip Units

Index

General Description — Molded Case, SPB and DSII Trip Units

Digitrip OPTIM

20

Description
Digitrip OPTIM is a programmable
communicating microprocessor-based
low voltage electronic trip unit system
for Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Molded
Case Circuit Breakers and Low Voltage
DSII Power Breakers. Digitrip OPTIM
trip units are available in three models:
Digitrip OPTIM 550 and 1050, for
the K-, L-, N- and R-Frames (70 through
2500 amperes), as well as Digitrip
OPTIM 550, Digitrip OPTIM 750 and
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 for the SPB
Insulated Case Circuit Breakers and
DSII Power Circuit Breakers.
Digitrip OPTIM trip units are fully
programmable and can be applied as
a standalone breaker with a hand-held
Digitrip OPTIMizer programmer for
configuring the trip unit, displaying
information and testing. In addition,
OPTIM can be applied as a low voltage
assembly with a panel-mounted Breaker
Interface Module (BIM) to configure,
display and test. Alternatively, OPTIM
can be applied as part of a fully integrated IMPACC/PowerNet system.
(See Section 2).

Features
Fully programmable, rms sensing
trip unit.
■ Available in K, L, N and R Series C
breakers and DSII power breakers.
■ Available in 80% and 100%
rated breakers.
■ Available in LSI, LSIG or LSIA
configurations.
■

Note: Ground fault alarm only.
■
■

■

■

■

■
■

■

Available in three models OPTIM
550, OPTIM 750 and OPTIM 1050.
10 function time-current curve
shaping options, including a new
I4t long delay time or slope.
Short delay and ground delay
Zone Selective Interlocking
(Optional on 550).
Additional programmable
protection features including
thermal memory and
discriminator functions.
Advanced warning systems
including high load alarm,
ground fault alarm.
Full system diagnostics capability.
System monitoring features including:
❑ Load current
❑ Power and energy
❑ Power factor
❑ Power quality — harmonics
PowerNet communications saves
individual wiring of breakers.

CA08104001E

21.4-7

21
22
23
24
Circuit Breaker Trip Units and Accessories

Hand-Held Programmer
The Digitrip OPTIMizer hand-held
programmer accesses, displays and
configures information from OPTIM
Trip Units. The OPTIMizer plugs into
the front of the trip unit and is powered
by a nine-volt battery, or an auxiliary
power module.

■

■

An operator can use the OPTIMizer to:
Complete Initial System Setup:
❑ Select breaker address
❑ Select system frequency
(50/60 Hz)
❑ Set system baud rate
❑ Set system password
■ Configure the System:
❑ Change time-current set points
❑ Select protection options
❑ Select alarm levels
■

■

■

Display Information:
❑ Breaker information
❑ Time-current set points
❑ Metered values
❑ Trip event information
Test Trip Unit Performance:
❑ Phase and ground
❑ Trip/no trip

Panel Mounted User Interface
The Breaker Interface Module can
be mounted directly on the assembly
or at a remote location and can be
used to access, configure and display
information from OPTIM Trip Units.
An operator can use the Breaker
Interface Module to:
■

Complete Initial System Setup:
❑ Select system frequency
(50/60 Hz)
❑ Set system password

Configure the System:
❑ Change time-current set points
❑ Select protection options
❑ Select alarm levels
Display Information:
❑ Breaker information
❑ Time-current set points
❑ Metered values
❑ Trip event information

■

Test Trip Unit Performance:
❑ Phase and ground
❑ Trip/no trip

■

Expanded Energy Monitoring:
❑ Set addresses for group energy
monitoring
❑ Group energy readings

■

Common Alarm Contacts:
❑ Three Form C contacts
❑ Saves wiring to each breaker

■

Local and Remote Indication:
❑ Remote indication/alarming
❑ Breaker status LED indication

■

Expanded Communications:
❑

Communicate with:
– OPTIM Trip Units
– Digitrip RMS 810
and 910 Trip Units
– IQ Energy Sentinels
and Universal
– IQ Energy Sentinels
– A total of 50 devices

25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.4-8 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Microprocessor Trip Units

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

Technical Data — Molded Case, SPB, and DSII Trip Units Selection Guide

January 2005
Sheet 0688

Table 21.4-2. Molded Case and DSII Digitrip Selection Guide

20
21
22
23

Trip Unit
Type

Digitrip
RMS 310

Digitrip
RMS 310+

Digitrip
RMS 510

Digitrip
OPTIM 550

Digitrip
RMS 610

Digitrip
OPTIM 750

Digitrip
RMS 810

Digitrip
RMS 910

Digitrip
OPTIM 1050

rms Sensing

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

K, L, N

SPB, DSII,
DSLII 

800 – 2500 A

R, SPB, DSII,
DSLII
800 – 5000 A

R, SPB, DSII,
DSLII
800 – 5000 A

K, L, N, R,
DSII, DSLII
70 – 5000 A

Breaker Type
Frame

J250 
, K, L, M, N, R JG, LG

Ampere Range
Interrupting Rating
at 480 V

15 – 2500 A

20 – 600 A

R, SPB, DSII,
DSLII
800 – 5000 A

70 – 1200 A

R, SPB, DSII,
DSLII
800 – 5000 A

35, 65, 100 (kA)

35, 65, 100 (kA)

65, 100 (kA)

35, 65, 100 (kA)

65, 100 (kA)

35, 65, 100 (kA)

65, 100 (kA)

65, 100 (kA)

35, 65, 100 (kA)

Ordering Options

LS
LSG

LS LSI
LSG LSIG

LI, LS, LSI, LIG,
LSG, LSIG

LSI, LSI (A),
LSIG

LI, LS, LSI, LIG,
LSG, LSIG

LSI(A), LSIG

LI, LS, LSI, LIG,
LSG, LSIG

LI, LS, LSI, LIG,
LSG, LSIG

LSI (A), LISG

Fixed Rated Plug (In)
Overtemperature Trip

Yes
Yes

No
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
0.5 – 1.0(In) 
10 Seconds

No
40 – 100% Frame
2 – 24 Seconds

No
0.5 – 1.0 x (In)
2 – 24 Seconds

No
0.4 – 1.0 x (In)
2 – 24 Seconds

No
0.5 – 1.0 x (In)
2 – 24 Seconds

No
0.5 – 1.0 x (In)
2 – 24 Seconds

No
0.5 – 1.0 x (In)
2 – 24 Seconds

No
0.5 – 1.0 x (In)
2 – 24 Seconds

No
0.4 – 1.0 x (In)
2 – 24 Seconds

No

No

No

1 – 5 Seconds

No

1 – 5 Seconds

No

No

1 – 5 Seconds

Yes
No

Yes
Yes

Yes
No

Yes
0.5 – 1.0 x Ir

Yes
0.85 x Ir

Yes
0.5 – 1.0 x Ir

Yes
0.85 x Ir

Yes
0.85 x Ir

Yes
0.5-1.0 x Ir

Short Delay Pickup

200 – 800% x (In)

—

200 – 600%
S1&S2 x (Ir)

150 – 800%
x (Ir)

200 – 600%
S1&S2 x (Ir)

150 – 800%
x (Ir)

200 – 600%
S1&S2 x (Ir)

200 – 600%
S1&S2 x (Ir)

150 – 800%
x (Ir)

Short Delay Time I2t
Short Delay Time Flat

100
ms
No

No
Yes
Inst – 300 ms No

100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms

100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms

100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms

100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms

100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms

100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms

Short Delay Time Z.S.I.

No

No

Yes

Optional

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

200 – 600%
M1&M2 x (In)

200 – 800%
x (In)

200 – 600%
M1&M2 x (In)

200 – 800%
x (In)

200 – 600%
M1&M2 x (In)

200 – 600%
M1&M2 x (In)

200 – 800%
x (In)

Protection

24

Long Delay Protection (L)

25

Adjustable Rating
Plug (In)
Long Delay Pickup
Long Delay Time I2t

26

Long Delay Time I4t
Long Delay
Thermal Memory
High Load Alarm

LSI
LSIG

Short Delay Protection (S)

27
28

No
100 – 500 ms
Inst – 300 ms 100 – 500 ms

Instantaneous Protection (I)

29

Instantaneous Pickup

No

200 – 800%
x (In)

No
Yes

Yes 
Yes

No
20 – 100% Frame
No

20/25 – 100% 
No
25 – 100% x In  20/25 – 100% 
100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms

No
20/25 – 100%  No
No
20/25 – 100% 
25 – 100% x In  20/25 – 100%  25 – 100% x In  25 – 100% x In  20/25 – 100% 
100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms

—
No

100 – 500 ms
Yes

100 – 500 ms
Optional

100 – 500 ms
Yes

100 – 500 ms
Yes

100 – 500 ms
Yes

100 – 500 ms
Yes

100 – 500 ms
Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Discriminator
No
Instantaneous Override Yes

30

Ground Fault Protection (G)

31

Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst – 500 ms
Ground Fault Z.S.I.
No
Ground Fault
Thermal Memory
Yes

32

System Diagnostics

33

Ground Fault Alarm
Ground Fault Pickup
Ground Fault Delay I2t

Cause of Trip LEDs
Magnitude of
Trip Information
Remote Signal
Contacts

Yes
Var/Frame 
No

Yes
Yes

Yes 
Yes

Yes 
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes 
Yes

Yes
Yes

System Monitoring

34

Digital Display
Current
Voltage

No
No
No

No
No
No

No
No
No

Yes 
Yes
No

Yes
Yes
No

Yes 
Yes
No

Yes
Yes
No

Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes 
Yes
No

No 

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

35

Power and Energy
Power QualityHarmonics
Power Factor

No
No

No
No

No
No

No
No

No
No

No
No

No
Yes (Over
PowerNet Only)

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

No

No

No

Optional

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Test Set

Test Kit

Integral

OPTIMizer, BIM,
Integral
PowerNet (Optional)

OPTIMizer, BIM,
PowerNet

Integral

Integral

OPTIMizer, BIM,
PowerNet

36

Communications
PowerNet
Testing

37

Testing Method



38





39





J250 Frame adjustments are not by rating
plug. Ground fault version not available yet.
Adjust by rating plug.
LS/LSG only.
Not to exceed 1200 amperes.
L and N Frames *20 – 100% x Is.
R-Frame *25 – 100% x In.
By OPTIMizer/BIM.
Yes with addition of Energy Sentinel.

BIM
Is
In
Ir

=
=
=
=

Breaker Interface Module
Sensor Rating
Rating Plug
LDPU Setting x In

40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0689

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

Magnum DS Digitrip Trip Units
The next generation of proven Eaton’s
Cutler-Hammer Digitrip RMS trip
units is available exclusively on CutlerHammer Magnum DS breakers. These
true rms sensing trip units provide
accurate coordination with the conductors and equipment the breaker
is designed to protect.
Eaton introduced the first microprocessor-based trip unit and has advanced
the technology into a new family of UL
and CSA listed Digitrip RMS Electronic
and Programmable Trip Units designed
and engineered exclusively for
Magnum DS Breakers.
Digitrip RMS 520 enables the user
as many as nine phase and ground
current protection settings for maximum flexibility in trip-curve shaping
and multi-unit coordination, and adds
ground current protection settings.
■ Digitrip RMS 520M adds metering
for phase, neutral and ground
current…with a four-character
LCD display window.
■ Digitrip RMS 520MC adds communication of trip values and breaker
status (open, closed and tripped).
■

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Microprocessor Trip Units

21.4-9

General Description — Magnum DS Trip Units
■

Digitrip RMS 1150 provides
programmability for more
sophisticated distribution systems.
❑ Increased protection and
coordination capabilities.
❑ Systems monitoring information
including voltage, current, power,
energy, power factor, and harmonic
distortion values, viewed on a
three-line LED display.
❑ Two programmable contacts
for customer use.
❑ Time stamping of trip events for
improved troubleshooting and
diagnostics.
❑ Accuracy of 1% on voltage
and current metered values,
and 2% on energy and power.
❑ Systems diagnostic information.
❑ PowerNet communications.
❑ Waveform capture.

Zone Selective Interlocking
The Digitrip RMS Zone Selective
Interlocking capability provides positive
system coordination without time delays.
Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI) allows
the breaker closest to the fault to trip
without any preset time delay. The
breaker closest to the fault trips first,
while the remainder of the distribution
system remains online, thus avoiding
unnecessary and costly downtime.

20
21
22
23
24
Digitrip RMS 1150 Programmable Trip Unit

This state-of-the-art trip unit with
true rms sensing can be programmed
at the faceplate or remotely with a
PC using the PowerNet communications system. All system parameters
as well as programming information
can be viewed on the easy-to-read
three-line digital display window.

25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.4-10 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Microprocessor Trip Units

Home

Technical Data — Magnum DS Digitrip Selection Guide

TOC

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0690

Table 21.4-3. Magnum DS Digitrip Selection Guide

20
21

Magnum DS Digitrip Trip Units
The next generation of proven Digitrip RMS Trip Units is
available exclusively on Magnum DS Breakers. These true
rms sensing trip units provide accurate coordination with the
conductors and equipment the breaker is designed to protect.

22
23
24

Trip Unit Type

Digitrip 520

Digitrip 520M

Digitrip 520MC

Digitrip 1150

Ampere Range
rms Sensing

200 – 5000 A
Yes

200 – 5000 A
Yes

200 – 5000 A
Yes

200 – 5000 A
Yes

Protection and Coordination

25

Protection

Ordering Options
Fixed Rating Plug (In)
Overtemperature Trip

LSI, LSIG 

Yes
Yes

LSI, LSIG, LSIA 

Yes
Yes

LSI, LSIG, LSIA 

Yes
Yes

LSI, LSIG, LSIA 

Yes
Yes

26

Long Delay Protection

Adjustable Rating Plug (In)
Long Delay Setting
Long Delay Time I2t at 6 x Ir

No
0.4 – 1.0 x (ln)
2 – 24 Seconds

No
0.4 – 1.0 x (In)
2 – 24 Seconds

No
0.4 – 1.0 x (In)
2 – 24 Seconds

No
0.4 – 1.0 x (In)
2 – 24 Seconds

Long Delay Time I4t
Long Delay Thermal Memory
High Load Alarm

No
Yes
No

No
Yes
No

No
Yes
No

Short Delay Pick-Up
Short Delay Time I2t at 8 x Ir
Short Delay Time Flat
Short Delay Time ZSI

200 – 1000% M1 x (Ir)
100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms
Yes

200 – 1000% M1 x (Ir)
100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms
Yes

200 – 1000% M1 x (Ir)
100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms
Yes

1-5 Seconds
Yes
0.5-1.0 x Ir
150% – 1000% x (Ir)
100 – 500 ms
100 – 500 ms
Yes

27
Short Delay Protection

28
29

Instantaneous Protection Instantaneous Pick-Up
Making Current Release
Off Position

200 – 1000% M1 x (In) 200 – 1000% M1 x (In) 200 – 1000% M1 x (In) 200% – 1000% x (In)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Ground Fault Protection

Ground Fault Alarm
Ground Fault Pick-Up
Ground Fault Delay I2t at .625 x In

No
025 – 100% x (In) 

100 – 500 ms

Yes
025 – 100% x (In) 

100 – 500 ms

Yes
025 – 100% x (In) 

100 – 500 ms

Yes
025 – 100% x (In) 

100 – 500 ms

Ground Fault Delay Flat
Ground Fault ZSI
Ground Fault Thermal Memory

100 – 500 ms
Yes
Yes

100 – 500 ms
Yes
Yes

100 – 500 ms
Yes
Yes

100 – 500 ms
Yes
Yes

Cause of Trip LEDs
Magnitude of Trip Information
Trip Log (3 Events)

Yes 
No
No

Yes 
No
No

Yes 
No
No

Yes 
Yes
Yes

Remote Signal Contacts
Programmable Contacts

No
No

Yes 
No

Yes 
No

Yes
2

Digital Display
Electronic Operations Counter
Current (Accuracy — % FS Sensor)

No
No
No

4-Character LCD
No
Yes (2%)

4-Character LCD
No
Yes (2%)

24-Character LED
Yes
Yes (1%)

Voltage (Accuracy — %) L to L
Power and Energy (Accuracy – %)
Apparent Power kVA and Demand

No
No
No

No
No
No

No
No
No

Yes (1%)
Yes (2%)
Yes

Reactive Power kvar
Power Factor
Crest Factor

No
No
No

No
No
No

No
No
No

Yes
Yes
Yes

Power Quality — Harmonics
% THD
Waveform Capture

No
No
No

No
No
No

No
No
No

Yes
Yes
Yes

No
Test Set 
No

No
Test Set 
No

Yes 
Test Set 
No

Yes 
Integral and Test Set 
Yes

30
31
System Diagnostics

32
33
34
35
36
37
38

System Monitoring

System Communications
IMPACC/PowerNet
Testing Method
Triplink




39




40



Not to exceed 1200 amperes on ground.
Cause of trip — L, S, I, G, and making
current release.
Optional GF only.
Tester for secondary injection.
Must utilize NT-based PowerNet software
to enable communications.

In = Sensor and plug rating.
Ir = LDPU setting.

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0691

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Index

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Enclosed Circuit Breakers

21.5-1

General Description

NEMA 1 General Purpose

NEMA 4/4X, 5 Water and Dustproof

Surface or Flush Mounting
15 – 1200 A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc

Stainless Steel — Type 304,
Surface Mounting
15 – 1200 A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc

for service entrance application. A
NEMA 12 semi-dust-tight design which
includes knockouts is available. These
units are rated 15 – 400 A, 600 Vac,
500 Vdc.
UL File Number E7819
CSA File Number LR84319

NEMA 7/9 Hazardous Location
Cast Aluminum, Explosion-proof
Surface Mounting
15 – 1200 A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc

UL File Number E7819
CSA File Number LR84319

NEMA 3R Rainproof
Surface Mounting
Interchangeable Hubs
(through 400 amperes)
15 – 1200 A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc

21
22
23
24

NEMA 1

Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer NEMA 1
enclosed breakers are designed for
indoor use in commercial buildings,
apartment buildings and other areas
where a general purpose enclosure is
applicable. The breaker is front operable and is capable of being padlocked in
the OFF position. (Padlocking not available on enclosures for QUICKLAG
breakers.) Ratings through 1200
amperes are listed with Underwriters
Laboratories as suitable for service
entrance application. Both surface and
flush mounted enclosures are available.

20

25

NEMA 4/4X, 5

This enclosure meets NEMA 4/4X and
5 requirements for water and dustproof
applications and has no knockouts or
other openings. It is particularly well
suited for use in dairies, borax mines,
breweries, paper mills and other process
industries. The operating handle can
be padlocked in the OFF position, and
is interlocked to prevent the door from
opening when the breaker is ON. Ratings
through 1200 amperes are Underwriters
Laboratories listed as suitable for
service entrance application.
UL File Number E7819
CSA File Number LR84319

NEMA 12 Dustproof
Surface Mounting
No Knockouts or Other Openings
15 – 1200 A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc

26
NEMA 7/9 Hazardous Location

Hazardous location, Class I, Groups B,
C, D, Divisions 1, 2; Class II, Groups E,
F, G, Divisions 1, 2. This special service
cast aluminum enclosure is supplied
with a wide, machined flanged cover to
prevent igniting outside atmospheres
by arcing from inside the enclosure.
Front operable, the handle padlocks in
the OFF position. Enclosures rated 600
amperes and above have lift-off hinges
for ease of assembly.

27
28
29
30

Note: XFDN050 is not Group B compliant.

31

UL File Number E84577 Enclosed
Circuit Breakers

32
33
34
35

NEMA 3R

This general purpose outdoor service
center employs a circuit breaker inside
a weatherproof sheet steel enclosure
to serve as a main disconnect and
protective device for feeder circuits.
The operating handle can be padlocked
in the OFF position, and is interlocked
to prevent the door from opening when
the breaker is ON. Ratings through
1200 amperes are listed by Underwriters
Laboratories as suitable for service
entrance application.
UL File Number E7819
CSA File Number LR84319

CA08104001E

NEMA 12 Dustproof

The Cutler-Hammer Type 12 enclosure
is designed in line with specifications
for special industry application where
unusually severe conditions involving
oil, coolant, dust and other foreign
materials exist in the operating atmosphere. The handle padlocks in the OFF
position and the cover is interlocked
with the handle mechanism to prevent
opening the cover with the circuit
breaker in the ON position. Ratings
through 1200 amperes are listed by
Underwriters Laboratories as suitable
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

36
37
38
39
40

21.5-2 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Enclosed Circuit Breakers

Home

General Description — Enclosures Only
Table 21.5-1. Enclosure Only Catalog Numbers Selection Guide

20
21

Breaker
Frame

Breaker
Ampere
Range

Enclosure
NEMA
Class

Catalog
Number

Series C Breakers
15 – 100

22

1 Surface
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SGDN100 

RGDN100
JGDN100
DGDN100
WGDN100

23

EHD, FD, FDB,
HFD, FDC

15 – 100

1 Surface
1 Flush
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SFDN100
FFDN100
RFDN100
JFDN100
DFDN100
WFDN100

7/9 Cast Alum.
7/9 Cast Alum.

XFDN050B
XFDN225B

1 Surface
1 Flush
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SFDN225
FFDN225
RFDN225
JFDN225
DFDN225
WFDN225

1 Surface
1 Flush
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SJDN250
FJDN250
RJDN250
JJDN250
DJDN250
WJDN250

24
EHD, FD, FDB
HFD, FDC

15 – 50
60 – 225 

FD, FDB, HFD, FDC,
ED, EDH, EDC

125 – 225

26
27

JD, JDB, HJD, JDC

125 – 250

28
29

JD, JDB, HJD, JDC

125 – 250

7/9 Cast Alum.

XJDN250B

KD, KDB, HKD, KDC, DK

125 – 400

1 Surface
1 Flush
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SKDN400
FKDN400
RKDN400
JKDN400
DKDN400
WKDN400

30
31
32
33
34

KD, KDB, HKD, KDC, DK

125 – 400

7/9 Cast Alum.

XKDN400B

LD, LDB, HLD, LDC

300 – 600

1 Surface
3R
12
4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SLDN600
RLDN600
JLDN600
WLDN600

LD, LDB, HLD, LDC
MDL, HMDL

300 – 600
400 – 800

7/9 Cast Alum.

XMCN800B

MDL, HMDL, ND,
NDC, HND

400 – 1200

1 Surface
3R
12
4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SNDN1200
RNDN1200
JNDN1200
WNDN1200

ND, HND, NDC

400 – 1200

7/9 Cast Alum.

XNDN1200B





35
36
37

Suitable for use with one-pole breaker base mounting plate kit.
QCCBP required.
Maximum wire size: 4/0.

Table 21.5-2. Neutral Kits, Insulated and Groundable
Maximum
Enclosure
Rating (Amperes)
100 (RFDN100
and SFDN100)

Index

<<

>>

January 2005
Sheet 0692

Enclosure Only Catalog Numbers Selection Guide (Continued)
Breaker
Frame

Breaker
Ampere
Range

Enclosure
NEMA
Class

Catalog
Number

15 – 100

1 Surface
1 Flush
3R
12
12K
4/4X

SFD100E
FFD100E
RFDN100E
JFDN100E
DFDN100E
WFDN100E

15 – 100

3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 St. Steel

RFDN150
JFDN150
DFDN150
WFDN150

125 – 400

1 Surface
3R
12
4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SNDN1200
RNDN1200
JNDN1200
WNDN1200

FB-P

15 – 100

3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 St. Steel

RFDN150
JFDN150
DFDN150
WFDN150

LA-P 

70 – 400

1 Surface
3R
12
4/4X

SNDN1200
RNDN1200
JNDN1200
WNDN1200

12
4/4X, 5 St. Steel

JNDPN800
WNDPN800

Earth Leakage Breakers

GC, GHC, GD
2- and 3-Pole only
GHCGFEP
1-Pole Only

25

TOC

Main Lug Size
Cu/Al

Ground Lug Size Catalog
Cu/Al
Number

(1) 14 – 1/0

(1) 14 – 2

DH100NK
INK100

100 (All Others)

(1) 14 – 1/0

(1) 14 – 1/0

250

(1)

(1) 4 – 300 kcmil INK250

38

400

(1) 4 – 750 kcmil or
(2) 1/0 – 250 kcmil

(1) 4 – 300 kcmil INK400

600

(2) 250 – 500 kcmil

(1) 4 – 300 kcmil INK600

39

1200

6 – 350 kcmil

ELFD, ELHFD & ELFDC
(3-Pole Only)

Current Limit-R Breakers
FCL

LCL 

TRI-PAC Breakers

NB-P


500 – 800

Requires additional adapter plate.

Table 21.5-3. Raintight Hubs — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Hub Diameter
in Inches (mm)

Catalog
Number

Small Hubs
For use with
RGDN and RFDN
All rainproof enclosures
30 through 400 A are
shipped with plate over
cutout. Hubs are not
supplied with screws
on 30 through 400 A enclosures. Use screws
from plate.

.75 (19.1)
1.00 (25.4)
1.25 (31.8)
1.50 (38.1)
2.00 (50.8)

DS075H1
DS100H1
DS125H1
DS150H1
DS200H1

Large Hubs
For use with
RJDN. RKDN
has two cutouts

2.00 (50.8) R1H200
2.50 (63.5) R1H250
3.00 (76.2) R1H300

Required if using Type DS hubs
on RJDN and RKDN enclosures. R1HA

Table 21.5-4. Breather and Drain, Hazardous Enclosures — Dimensions
in Inches (mm)
Description

Compliance

Conduit
Opening

Catalog
Number

A Universal Breather/Drain
Fitting is installed in the top
of an enclosure to provide
ventilation to minimize
condensation and in the
bottom to allow drainage
of accumulated condensation while maintaining
explosion-proof integrity.

Type BD:
NEMA 7 – Class I,
Groups C, D;
Class I, Zone 1,
Group IIB
NEMA 9 – Class II,
Groups F, G

.50 (12.7)

XPBD2

(3) 1/0 to 750 kcmil or (1) #6 – 250 kcmil INK1200
(4) 1/0 to 750 kcmil

Type DBB:
.50 (12.7)
NEMA 7 – Class I,
Groups B,
C, D; Class I, Zone 1,
Group IIB
+ Hydrogen
NEMA 9 – Class II,
Groups E, F, G

XPDBB50

40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0693

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Enclosed Circuit Breakers

Index

21.5-3

Dimensions and Weights — Enclosure Only
Table 21.5-5. NEMA 1 Surface Mounted — Dimensions in Inches (mm)

E
B

C

A

D

Figure 21.5-1. NEMA 1 Surface Mounted

Catalog
Number

Approximate 

Weight Lbs. (kg)

Maximum
Amperes

20

Box Dimensions
A

B

C

D

E

SGDN100

12 (5)

100

17.50
(444.5)

8.41
(213.5)

6.28
(159.5)

13.03
(331.0)

1.20
(30.6)

SFDN100

12 (5)

100

19.12
(485.6)

9.13 
(231.9)

5.20
(132.1)

17.00
(431.8)

N/A 

SFDN150

15 (7)

150

23.25
(590.6)

8.41
(213.5)

6.28
(159.5)

18.75
(476.2)

1.20
(30.6)

SFDN225

15 (7)

225

23.25
(590.6)

8.41
(213.5)

6.28
(159.5)

18.75
(476.2)

1.20
(30.6)

SJDN250

31 (14)

250

34.70
(881.5)

10.92
(227.4)

7.20
(183.0)

30.00
(762.0)

1.88
(47.6)

SKDN400

53 (24)

400

38.81
(985.9)

11.01
(281.0)

10.94
(277.8)

34.00
(863.6)

2.28
(57.9)

SLDN600

81 (37)

600

45.88
(1165.2)

14.31
(363.6)

12.38
(314.3)

46.56
(1182.7)

1.91
(48.4)

178 (81)

1200

61.22
(1555.0)

21.44
(544.5)

15.41
(391.3)

61.84
(1570.8)

1.97
(50.0)

SNDN1200





Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 21.5-12 for breaker weights.
Total width, due to door clip is 9.95 (252.7).
Single centered mounting hole provided.

B

D

C

A

23
24
25

27

Catalog
Number

Approximate 
Weight Lbs. (kg)

Maximum
Amperes

Box Dimensions
A

B

C

D

E

FFDN100

12 (5)

100

18.81
(477.9)

9.72
(246.9)

6.28
(159.5)

13.03
(331.0)

1.86
(47.2)

FFDN150

15 (7)

150

24.56
(623.9)

9.72
(246.9)

6.28
(159.5)

18.75
(476.2)

1.86
(47.2)

FFDN225

15 (7)

225

24.56
(623.9)

9.72
(246.9)

6.28
(159.5)

18.75
(476.2)

1.86
(47.2)

FJDN250

32 (15)

250

36.02
(914.8)

12.23
(310.7)

7.20
(183.0)

30.00
(762.0)

1.88
(47.6)

FKDN400

53 (24)

400

40.13
(1019.2)

12.38
(314.3)

10.94
(277.8)

34.00
(863.6)

2.94
(74.6)



22

26

Table 21.5-6. NEMA 1 Flush Mounted — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
E

21

28
29
30
31

Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 21.5-12 for breaker weights.

32

Figure 21.5-2. NEMA 1 Flush Mounted

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

Not to be used for construction purposes
unless approved.
CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.5-4 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Enclosed Circuit Breakers

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

Dimensions and Weights — Enclosures Only

January 2005
Sheet 0694

Table 21.5-7. NEMA 12, 12K Dustproof — Dimensions in Inches (mm)

20

E

C

21
22

A

D

ON
OFF

23

Catalog
Number

Approximate 

Weight Lbs. (kg)

Maximum
Amperes

26
27
28
29
30

C

D

E

100

19.91
(505.6)

8.84
(224.6)

9.31
(236.6)

18.53
(470.7)

1.70
(43.3)

JFDN100

14 (6)

100

19.91
(505.6)

8.84
(224.6)

9.31
(236.6)

18.53
(470.7)

1.70
(43.3)

JFDN150

18 (8)

150

25.66
(651.7)

8.84
(224.6)

9.31
(236.6)

24.28
(616.7)

1.70
(43.3)

JFDN225

18 (8)

225

25.66
(651.7)

8.84
(224.6)

9.31
(236.6)

24.28
(616.7)

1.70
(43.3)

JJDN250

37 (17)

250

37.53
(953.3)

11.56
(293.7)

10.22
(259.6)

35.77
(908.5)

1.94
(49.2)

JKDN400

58 (26)

400

41.69
(1058.9)

11.75
(298.4)

14.06
(357.2)

39.94
(1014.4)

1.97
(50.0)

JLDN600

81 (37)

600

48.31
(1227.2)

14.91
(378.6)

15.50
(393.7)

46.56
(1182.7)

1.92
(48.8)

JNDPN800

110 (50)

800

63.59
(1615.3)

22.00
(558.8)

17.63
(447.7)

—

1.97
(50.0)

JNDN1200

170 (77)

1200

63.59
(1615.3)

22.00
(558.8)

17.63
(447.7)

61.84
(1570.8)

—

DGDN100

16 (7)

100

19.91
(505.6)

8.84
(224.6)

9.31
(236.6)

—

—

DFDN100

16 (7)

100

19.91
(505.6)

8.84
(224.6)

9.31
(236.6)

—

—

DFDN150

19 (9)

150

25.66
(651.7)

8.84
(224.6)

9.31
(236.6)

—

—

DFDN225

19 (9)

225

25.66
(651.7)

8.84
(224.6)

9.31
(236.6)

—

—

DJDN250

36 (16)

250

37.53
(953.3)

11.56
(293.7)

10.22
(259.6)

—

—

DKDN400

53 (24)

400

41.69
(1058.9)

11.75
(298.4)

14.06
(357.2)

—

—




Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 21.5-12 for breaker weights.

Table 21.5-8. NEMA 3R Rainproof — Dimensions in Inches (mm)

31

E

C

32
33

B

14 (6)

Figure 21.5-3. NEMA 12, 12K Dustproof

25

A

JGDN100

B

24

Box Dimensions

A

Catalog
Number

Approximate 
Weight Lbs. (kg)

Maximum
Amperes

Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A

B

C

D

E

RGDN100

14 (6)

100

19.91
(505.6)

8.84
(224.6)

9.31
(236.6)

18.53
(470.7)

1.70
(43.3)

ON

RFDN100

14 (6)

100

19.12
(485.6)

9.95
(252.8)

5.14
(130.6)

17.00
(431.8)

N/A 

OFF

RFDN150

19 (9)

150

25.66
(651.7)

8.84
(224.6)

9.31
(236.6)

24.28
(616.7)

1.70
(43.3)

RFDN225

19 (9)

225

25.66
(651.7)

8.84
(224.6)

9.31
(236.6)

24.28
(616.7)

1.70
(43.3)

RJDN250

40 (18)

250

37.50
(952.5)

11.56
(293.7)

10.22
(259.6)

35.77
(908.5)

1.94
(49.2)

RKDN400

60 (27)

400

41.69
(1058.9)

11.75
(298.4)

14.06
(357.2)

39.94
(1014.4)

1.97
(50.0)

RLDN600

84 (38)

600

48.31
(1227.2)

14.91
(378.6)

15.50
(393.7)

46.56
(1182.7)

1.92
(48.8)

175 (79)

1200

63.59
(1615.3)

22.00
(558.8)

17.63
(447.7)

61.84
(1570.8)

1.97
(50.0)

D

34
B

35
Figure 21.5-4. NEMA 3R Rainproof

36

RNDN1200


37



Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 21.5-12 for breaker weights.
Single centered mounting hole provided.

38
39
40

Not to be used for construction purposes
unless approved.
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E

January 2005
Sheet 0695

Home

TOC

<<

>>

Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Enclosed Circuit Breakers

Index

21.5-5

Dimensions and Weights — Enclosures Only
Table 21.5-9. NEMA 4/4X, 5 Stainless Steel — Dimensions in Inches (mm)

E
B

D
A

Approximate 

Weight Lbs. (kg)

Catalog
Number

C

Maximum
Amperes

A

B

C

D

E

WGDN100

16 (7)

100

19.91
(505.6)

8.84
(224.6)

9.31
(236.6)

18.53
(470.7)

1.70
(43.3)

WFDN100

16 (7)

100

19.91
(505.6)

8.84
(224.6)

9.31
(236.6)

18.53
(470.7)

1.70
(43.3)

WFDN150

20 (9)

150

25.66
(651.7)

8.84
(224.6)

9.31
(236.6)

24.28
(616.7)

1.70
(43.3)

WFDN225

20 (9)

225

25.66
(651.7)

8.84
(224.6)

9.31
(236.6)

24.28
(616.7)

1.70
(43.3)

WJDN250

39 (18)

250

37.50
(952.5)

11.56
(293.7)

10.22
(259.6)

35.77
(908.5)

1.94
(49.2)

WKDN400

60 (27)

400

41.69
(1058.9)

11.75
(298.4)

14.06
(357.2)

39.94
(1014.4)

1.97
(50.0)

WLDN600

88 (40)

600

48.31
(1227.2)

14.91
(378.6)

15.50
(393.7)

46.56
(1182.7)

1.92
(48.8)

185 (84)

1200

63.59
(1615.3)

22.00
(558.8)

17.63
(447.7)

61.84
(1570.8)

1.97
(50.0)

ON
OFF

20

Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Figure 21.5-5. NEMA 4/4X, 5 Stainless Steel

WNDN1200



Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 21.5-12 for breaker weights.

21
22
23
24
25
26

Table 21.5-10. NEMA 7/9Cast Aluminum with Weather Resistant Seals — 15 – 250 Amperes
Catalog
Number

Breaker
Size
Amperes

Number
of
Outlets

Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Mounting
A

B

Inside
J

C

Outside
D

E

F

G

H

K
Dim

Standard
Conduit
Size

Approximate
Weight 
Lbs.

kg

XFDN050B

15 – 50

4

5.50
13.13
14.13
6.13
10.75
5.25
10.63
15.25
8.88
(139.7) (333.5) (358.9) (155.7) (273.1) (133.4) (270.0) (387.4) (225.6)

2.00
(50.8)

1.50
(38.1)

38

17.3

XFDN100B 

60 – 100

4

6.00
18.00
19.00
6.50
16.00
5.50
11.00
20.50
9.00
(152.4) (457.2) (482.6) (165.1) (406.4) (139.7) (279.4) (520.7) (228.6)

2.31
(58.7)

2.00
(50.8)

57

25.9

XFDN225B 

125 – 225

4

10.25
22.63
—
(260.4) (574.8)

11.38
20.00
6.38
16.38
25.13
9.63
(289.1) (508.0) (162.1) (416.1) (638.3) (244.6)

3.50
(88.9)

2.50
(63.5)

104

47.2

70 – 225

4

8.50
27.13
—
(215.9) (689.1)

11.25
29.88
7.38
16.00
29.50
12.31
(285.8) (759.0) (187.5) (406.4) (749.3) (312.7)

4.00
3.00
(101.6) (76.2)

145

65.8

4

9.50
27.25
—
(241.3) (692.2)

11.25
29.88
8.06
16.38
35.00
12.38
(285.8) (759.0) (204.7) (416.1) (889.0) (314.5)

4.19
4.00
(106.4) (101.6)

170

77.2

XJDN225B
XJDN250B



250

Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 21.5-12 for breaker weights.
Maximum wire size: 4/0.

27
28
29
30
31
32
33

(2) 1/2-inch
(12.7 mm)
NPT

34
35
36
37
38

Figure 21.5-6. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather Resistant Seals — Dual 3 and 4 Point Mounting Available as Standard on F-Frame 100 A and Below

39
40
CA08104001E

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

21.5-6 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage
Enclosed Circuit Breakers

Home

TOC

Index

<<

>>

Dimensions and Weights/Technical Data — Enclosures and Breakers

January 2005
Sheet 0696

Table 21.5-11. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather Resistant Seals — 400 – 1200 Amperes

20

Catalog
Number

Breaker
Size
Amperes

21
22
23
24

Weight 


Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Overall
Enclosure

Enclosure
Mounting

Conduit

Standard
Conduit

A

B

C

E

F

H

I

Size

Location

Lbs.

XKDN400B 

400

35.00
(889.0)

16.38
(416.1)

12.63
(320.8)

9.50
(241.3)

27.25
(692.2)

3.00
(76.2)

4.19
(106.4)

4.00
(101.6)

1, 3 & 6, 8

170

77

XLDN600B

600

37.88
(962.2)

23.88
(606.6)

14.25
(362.0)

16.00
(406.4)

45.38
(1152.7)

4.00
(101.6)

5.00
(127.0)

4.00
(101.6)

1, 3 & 6, 8

419

191

XKCN800B

800

47.88
(1216.2)

13.63
(346.2)

12.81
(325.4)

16.13
(409.7)

40.75
(1035.1)

4.00
(101.6)

4.00
(101.6)

4.00
(101.6)

1, 3 & 6, 8

228

104

1200

64.00
(1625.6)

26.00
(660.4)

21.38
(543.1)

27.56
(700.0)

38.63
(981.2)

6.50
(165.1)

4.38
(111.3)

4.00
(101.6)

1, 3 & 6, 8

567

257

XNDN1200B 





kg

Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 21.5-12 for breaker weights.
Maximum wire size: 500 kcmil.
Power cables must enter and leave from opposite ends (through-feed).

25
Conduit Position No.

1

Table 21.5-12. Typical Breaker Weights

2 3

Frame

G-MTG.
Holes (4)

26
F-MTG.
A

27

kg

G

B

J

Lbs.

0.9

E

3

1.4

F

5

2.3

J

12

5.4

K

13

5.9

I

D

C

28

2

29

H H
E-MT
8

30

7 6

L

20

9.1

M

30

13.6

N

45

20.4

Figure 21.5-7. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather Resistant Seals
Table 21.5-13. Circuit Breaker Enclosure Interpretation Data

31

1st Field
Enclosure
Type

32

NEMA 1

33

NEMA 3R
NEMA 12
NEMA 12K
NEMA 4/4X, 5
NEMA 7/9

Flush
Surface

Stainless
Cast Al.

F
S
R
J
D
W
X

2nd Field
Breaker
Family

3rd Field
Maximum
Ampacity

NEMA
Enclosure
Type

Definitions
NEMA
Standard

G-Frame
F-Frame
J-Frame
K-Frame
L-Frame
M-Frame
N-Frame

50
100
150
225
250
400
600
1200

1

Type 1 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of
protection against contact with the enclosed equipment.

3R

Type 3R enclosures are intended for outdoor use primarily to provide a degree
of protection against falling rain, sleet, and external ice formation.

12

Type 12 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily
to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt,
and dripping noncorrosive liquids.

12K

Type 12K enclosures with knockouts are intended for indoor use
primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt,
and dripping noncorrosive liquids other than at knockouts.

4/4X

Type 4 enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily
to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain,
splashing water, and hose-directed water, and corrosion; and will
be undamaged by the external formation of ice on the enclosure.

5

Type 5 enclosures are used for indoor use primarily to provide a
degree of protection against dust and falling dirt.

7

Type 7 enclosures are for use indoors in locations classified
as Class I, Groups B, C or D as defined in the National Electrical Code. 

9

Type 9 enclosures are for use in indoor locations classified as
Class II, Groups E, F or G as defined in the National Electrical Code.

34
1st 2nd
Field Field

35

3rd
Field

R FD N 150


36
NEMA
Enclosure

37
38
39
40




Breaker
Frame

NEMA
Enclosure

“N” in this position indicates enclosure complies with NEC gutter space requirement.
XFDN050 is not Group B compliant.

Cutler-Hammer is a federally registered trademark of
Eaton Corporation. UL is a federally registered trademark of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ISO is the registered trademark and sole property of the International
Organization for Standardization. NEMA is the registered trademark and service mark of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. CSA is a registered

trademark of the Canadian Standards Association.
Uniform Building Code (UBC) is a trademark of the
International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO).
National Electrical Code and NEC are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association,
Quincy, Mass.

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

CA08104001E



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Modify Date                     : 2005:04:19 16:04:22-04:00
Create Date                     : 2005:03:02 11:39:42-05:00
Title                           : CA08104001E
Author                          : Zoltun Design
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 for Macintosh
Subject                         : Tab 21 - 150 dpi
Page Count                      : 126
Mod Date                        : 2005:04:19 16:04:22-04:00
Creation Date                   : 2005:03:02 11:39:42-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2005:04:19 16:04:22-04:00
Description                     : Tab 21 - 150 dpi
Has XFA                         : No
Page Layout                     : SinglePage

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools